Changsha BEST Electrical&Technology co.

,LTD

Address:

A6-306,Lugu

International
Industrial
Park,
No
229,Tongzipo
West
Road,Changsha,Hunan,China
User manual
TEL：0731-88719138 E4 Series AC Drive
FAX：0731-88719238
Website：www.best-cn.cn
Technical
support：400-885-5081

Version:000420191121






E4
User
Manual Preface

Preface
Thank
you
for
purchasing
the
E4
series
AC
drive
developed
by
Changsha

Best
Electrical&Technology
Co.,
Ltd.

The
E4
series
AC
drive
is
a
general-purpose
high-performance
current

vector
control
AC
drive.
It
can
implement
the
control
of
asynchronous
motor

and
permanent
magnet
synchronous
motor
(PMSM).
It
increases
the
user

p r o g r a m m a b l e
f u n c t i o n ,
b a c k g r o u n d
m o n i t o r i n g
s o f t w a r e
a n d

communication
bus
function,
and
supports
multi-kind
PG
cards.
It
is
used
to

drive
various
automation
production
equipment
involving
textile,
paper-

making,
wiredrawing,
machine
tool,
packing,
food,
fan
and
pump.

This
manual
describes
the
correct
use
of
the
E4
series
AC
drive,
including

selection,parameter
setting,
commissioning,
maintenance
&
inspection.

Read
and
understand
the
manual
before
use
and
forward
the
manual
to
the

end
user.
Contents E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 1
Product


Information

Contents Chapter
1
Product
Information

In
this
manual,
the
notices
are
graded
based
on
the
degree
of
danger:
Chapter
1
Product
Information
1.1
Safety
Information ············································ ·2
• DANGER
indicates
that
failure
to
comply
with
the
notice
will
result
in
severe
personal

1.2
General
Precautions ················· ··························· ·4
injury
or
even
death.
1.3
Electrical
Specifications ········································ ·5

• WARNING
indicates
that
failure
to
comply
with
the
notice
will
result
in
personal
injury

1.4
Selection
of
Braking
Unit
and
Braking
Resitor ····················· ·7

or
property
damage.
1.5
Technical
Specifications ······································· ·7

Read
this
manual
carefully
so
that
you
have
a
thorough
understanding.
Installation,

commissioning
or
maintenance
may
be
performed
in
conjunction
with
this
chapter.
Best
Chapter
2
Physical
Appearance
and
Overall
Dimensions will
assume
no
liability
or
responsibility
for
any
injury
or
loss
caused
by
improper
operation.
2.1
Inasallation ·················································· 9

2.2
Electrical
Installation ········································· 12

2.3
Cabling
Requirements ········································ 15
Designation
rules
and
nameplate
of
the
E4
2.4
Description
of
Control
Circuit
Terminals ·························· 16

Chapter
3
Operation,
Display
and
Application
Examples BEST 变频调速器

3.1
Operation
Panel ·············································· 19
AC
drive
model 产品型号： E4- 2.2G- T4- B5
3.2
Description
of
Indicators ······································· 20
额定输⼊：三相
380V
50Hz-60HZ
3.3
Viewing
and
Modifying
Function
Codes ·························· 21
Product 额定输出：三相
0V-380V
0Hz-500Hz
3.4
JOD
Running ················································· 22
parameters 额定电流：5.1A
额定功率：2.2KW
Chapter
4
Function
Code
Table
4.1
Standard
Function
Paramenters ·································23
长沙贝士德电气科技有限公司
4.2
Monitoring
Parameters ········································ 76

Chapter
5
Description
of
Function
Codes E4 - 2.2G - T4 - B5
E4
series
AC
drive
Chapter
6
Maintenance
and
Troubleshooting
6.1
Routine
Repair
and
Maintenance ································190 Power
class
6.2
Warranty
Agreement ··········································191
T4:3PH
~380Vac
6.3
Faults
and
Solutions ··········································191 S2:2PH
~220Vac
6.4
Common
Faults
and
Solutions ··································196 Rated
input

Frame
code

-1-
Chapter 1
Product


Information E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 1
Product


Information

1.1

Safety
Information Safety

Use
Stage Precautions
Grade
Safety
• Wiring
must
be
performed
only
by
qualified
personnel
under

Use
Stage Precautions
Grade instructions
described
in
this
manual.
Failure
to
comply
may

• Do
not
install
the
equipment
if
you
find
water
seepage,
result
in
unexpected
accidents.
component
missing
or
damage
upon
unpacking. • A
circuit
breaker
must
be
used
to
isolate
the
power
supply
and

DANGER the
AC
drive.
Failure
to
comply
may
result
in
a
fire.
• Do
not
install
the
equipment
if
the
packing
list
does
not
conform
DANGER
to
the
product
you
received. • Ensure
that
the
power
supply
is
cut
off
before
wiring.
Failure
to

Before
• Handle
the
equipment
with
care
during
transportation
to
prevent
comply
may
result
in
electric
shock.
installation damage
to
the
equipment. • Tie
the
AC
drive
to
ground
properly
by
standard.
Failure
to

• Do
not
use
the
equipment
if
any
component
is
damaged
or
missing.
comply
may
result
in
electric
shock.
WARNING Failure
to
comply
will
result
in
personal
injury. At
wiring • N

ever
connect
the
power
cables
to
the
output
terminals
(U,

• Do
not
touch
the
components
with
your
hands.
Failure
to
comply
V,
W)
of
the
AC
drive.
Pay
attention
to
the
marks
of
the
wiring

will
result
in
static
electricity
damage. terminals
and
ensure
correct
wiring.
Failure
to
comply
will
result

in
damage
to
the
AC
drive.
• Install
the
equipment
on
incombustible
objects
such
as
metal,

and
keep
it
away
from
combustible
materials.
Failure
to
comply
• Never
connect
the
braking
resistor
between
the
DC
bus
terminals

may
result
in
a
fire. WARNING (+)
and
(-).
Failure
to
comply
may
result
in
a
fire.
DANGER
• Do
not
loosen
the
fixed
screws
of
the
components,
especially
• Use
wire
sizes
recommended
in
the
manual.
Failure
to
comply

the
screws
with
red
mark. may
result
in
accidents.
During

installation • Do
not
drop
wire
end
or
screw
into
the
AC
drive.
Failure
to
• Use
a
shielded
cable
for
the
encoder,
and
ensure
that
the

comply
will
result
in
damage
to
the
AC
drive. shielding
layer
is
reliably
grounded.

WARNING • Install
the
AC
drive
in
places
free
of
vibration
and
direct
sunlight. •
Check
that
the
following
requirements
are
met:

• When
two
AC
drives
are
laid
in
the
same
cabinet,
arrange
the
‒
The
voltage
class
of
the
power
supply
is
consistent
with
the

installation
positions
properly
to
ensure
the
cooling
effect. rated
voltage
class
of
the
AC
drive.
• Repair
or
maintenance
of
the
AC
drive
may
be
performed
only
‒
The
input
terminals
(R,
S,
T)
and
output
terminals
(U,
V,
W)

by
qualified
personnel.
Failure
to
comply
will
result
in
personal
are
properly
connected.
injury
or
damage
to
the
AC
drive. DANGER ‒
No
short-circuit
exists
in
the
peripheral
circuit.
• Do
not
repair
or
maintain
the
AC
drive
at
power-on.
Failure
to
‒
The
wiring
is
secured.
comply
will
result
in
electric
shock. Before
Failure
to
comply
will
result
in
damage
to
the
AC
drive

• Repair
or
maintain
the
AC
drive
only
ten
minutes
after
the
AC
power-on • D

o
not
perform
the
voltage
resistance
test
on
any
part
of
the
AC

drive
is
powered
off.
This
allows
for
the
residual
voltage
in
the
drive
because
such
test
has
been
done
in
the
factory.
Failure
to

capacitor
to
discharge
to
a
safe
value.
Failure
to
comply
will
comply
will
result
in
accidents.
result
in
personal
injury. • C

over
the
AC
drive
properly
before
power-on
to
prevent
electric

During
• Ensure
that
the
AC
drive
is
disconnected
from
all
power
supplies
shock.
maintenance DANGER before
starting
repair
or
maintenance
on
the
AC
drive. WARNING • All
peripheral
devices
must
be
connected
properly
under
the

• Set
and
check
the
parameters
again
after
the
AC
drive
is
instructions
described
in
this
manual.
Failure
to
comply
will

replaced. result
in
accidents
• All
the
pluggable
components
must
be
plugged
or
removed
only
• Do
not
open
the
AC
drive's
cover
after
power-on.

Failure
to

after
power-off. comply
may
result
in
electric
shock.
• The
rotating
motor
generally
feeds
back
power
to
the
AC
drive.
DANGER
• Do
not
touch
any
I/O
terminal
of
the
AC
drive.
Failure
to
comply

As
a
result,
the
AC
drive
is
still
charged

even
if
the
motor
After
may
result
in
electric
shock.
stops,
and
the
power
supply
is
cut
off.
Thus
ensure
that
the
AC

power-on • Do
not
touch
the
rotating
part
of
the
motor
during
the
motor

drive
is
disconnected
from
the
motor
before
starting
repair
or

auto-tuning
or
running.
Failure
to
comply
will
result
in
accidents.
maintenance
on
the
AC
drive. WARNING
• D

o
not
change
the
default
settings
of
the
AC
drive.
Failure
to

comply
will
result
in
damage
to
the
AC
drive.

-2- -3-
Chapter 1
Product


Information E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 1
Product


Information

1.2
General
Precautions 1.3

Electrical
Specifications
1)
Requirement
on
residual
current
device
(RCD)
Power Output Input Adaptable Braking
The
AC
drive
generates
high
leakage
current
during
running,
which
flows
through
the
Model
Capacity current current Motor Unit
protective
earthing
(PE)
conductor.
Thus
install
a
type-B
RCD
at
primary
side
of

the

power
supply.
When
selecting
the
RCD,
you
should
consider
the
transient
and
steady- E4-0.4G-S2-B5




0.4G
2.3
5.4
0.4

state
leakage
current
to
ground
that
may
be
generated
at
startup
and
during
running
of

the
AC
drive.
You
can
select
a
specialized
RCD
with
the
function
of
suppressing
high
E4-0.75G-S2-B5




0.75G
4.0
8.2
0.75

harmonics
or
a
general-purpose
RCD
with
relatively
large
residual
current.
2)
High
leakage
current
warning E4-1.5G-S2-
B5




1.5G
7.0
14
1.5

The
AC
drive
generates
high
leakage
current
during
running,
which
flows
through
the
E4-2.2G-S2-B5




2.2G

9.6
23
2.2

PE
conductor.
Earth
connection
must
be
done
before
connection
of
power
supply.

Earthing
shall
comply
with
local
regulations
and
related
IEC
standards. E4-3.7G-S2-B5




3.7G
13
2 3.7

3)

Motor
insulation
test
E4-0.75G-T4-B5



0.75G

2.1
3.4
0.75

Perform
the
insulation
test
when
the
motor
is
used
for
the
first
time,
or
when
it
is

reused
after
being
stored
for
a
long
time,
or
in
a
regular
check-up,
in
order
to
prevent
E4-1.5G-T4-B5




1.5G

3.8
5.1
1.5
Built-in
the
poor
insulation
of
motor
windings
from
damaging
the
AC
drive.
The
motor
must
be
(Standard)
disconnected
from
the
AC
drive
during
the
insulation
test.
A
500-V
mega-Ohm
meter
is

E4-2.2G-T4-B5




2.2G

5.1
9.2
2.2

recommended
for
the
test.
The
insulation
resistance
must
not
be
less
than
5
MΩ.

4)
Thermal
protection
of
motor E4-3.7G-T4-B5




3.7G
9

14.9
3.7

If
the
rated
capacity
of
the
motor
selected
does
not
match
that
of
the
AC
drive,
E4-5.5G-T4-B5



5.5G
13

21.5
5.5

especially
when
the
AC
drive's
rated
power
is
greater
than
the
motor's,
adjust
the
motor

protection
parameters
on
the
operation
panel
of
the
AC
drive
or
install
a
thermal
relay

in
the
motor
circuit
for
protection.
E4-7.5G-T4-B6




7.5G
17

27.9
7.5

5)
Running
at
over
50
Hz E4-11G-T4-B6




11G
25
39
11

The
AC
drive
provides
frequency
output
of
0
to
3200
Hz
(Up
to
300
Hz
is
supported
if

the
AC
drive
runs
in
CLVC
and
SFVC
mode).
If
the
AC
drive
is
required
to
run
at
over
E4-15G-T4-C4




15G
32

50.3
15

50
Hz,
consider
the
capacity
of
the
machine.
E4-18.5G-T4-A6




18.5G
37
60
18.5

6)
Vibration
of
mechanical
device Built-in
(Standard)
The
AC
drive
may
encounter
the
mechanical
resonance
point
at
some
output
E4-22G-T4-A6




22G
45
69.3
22

frequencies,
which
can
be
avoided
by
setting
the
skip
frequency.
E4-30G-T4-A8




30G
60
86
30

7)
Motor
heat
and
noise
The
output
of
the
AC
drive
is
pulse
width
modulation
(PWM)
wave
with
certain
harmonic
E4-37G-T4-A8




37G
75
104
37

Built-in
frequencies,
and
therefore,
the
motor
temperature,
noise,
and
vibration
are
slightly
(Optinoal)
greater
than
those
when
the
AC
drive
runs
at
power
frequency
(50
Hz). E4-45G-T4-A10




45G
91
124
45

E4-55G-T4-A10




55G
112
150
55

E4-75G-T4-A12




75G
150
201
75
External

-4- -5-
Chapter 1
Product


Information E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 1
Product


Information

1.4
Selection
of
Braking
Unit
and
Braking
Resistor
Power Output Input Adaptable Braking
Model
Capacity current current Motor Unit AC
Driver
Braking
Unit Braking
Resistance
E4-90G-T4-A12
90G
176
236
90
Voltage
Power (KW) Configuration Configuration Resistance Dosage

0.4
Built-in(Standard) External 50W
/200Ω
1
E4-110G-T4-A13 110G
210
281
110

0.75
Built-in(Standard) External 80W/150Ω
1
Signal-phase
E4-132G-T4-A13 132G
253
339
132
1.5
Built-in(Standard) External 200W/100Ω
1
220V
2.2
Built-in(Standard) External 200W/70Ω
1
E4-160G-T4-A16
160G
304
415
160

3.7
Built-in(Standard) External 300W/50Ω
1
E4-200G-T4-A16
200G
377
509
200

0.75
Built-in(Standard) External 150W
/400Ω
1
External 1.5
Built-in(Standard) External 200W/300Ω
1
E4-220G-T4-A16 220G
426
576
220

2.2
Built-in(Standard) External 250W/200Ω
1
E4-250G-T4-A20
250G
465
629
250
3.7
Built-in(Standard) External 400W/150Ω
1
5.5
Built-in(Standard) External 500W/90Ω
1
E4-280G-T4-A20
280G
520
696
280
Three-phase 7.5
Built-in(Standard) External 800W/60Ω
1
380V 11
1000W/47Ω
1
E4-315G-T4-A20 315G
585
790
315
Built-in(Standard) External
15
Built-in(Standard) External 1500W/47Ω
1
E4-355G-T4-A20 355G
650
871
355
18.5
Built-in(Optional) 2000W/40Ω
1
External
22
Built-in(Optional) 2500W/33Ω
1
E4-400G-T4-A20 400G
725
971
400
External
30-400
According
to
the
requirements
of
the
brake
unit
to
choose

1.5
Technical
Specifications

Nominal
Voltage Three-phase AC 380V±10%
/Single-phaseAC220V± 10%

Input
Nominal
Frequency 50Hz〜60Hz±5%

Output
Voltage Three-phase
0~rated
input
voltage

Output
Voltage Vector
control：0-500Hz
Output
V/F
control：0-500Hz
Overload
Capacity 150%
1min ；180 %
10 s；200%
0.5 s

Voltage/Frequency（V/F）control
Control
Method Sensorless
flux
vector
control(SFVC)
Closed-loop
vector
control(CLVC)


















1:100
（V/F）

Standard
Speed
Range 1:200
（SFVC）

functions
1:1000（CLVC）

Speed
Stability ±0.5%
（V/F）

Accuracy ±0.2%
（SFVC）

±0.02%
（CLVC）

-6- - 7-
 Chapter 1
Product


Information E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 2 Physical Appearance and Overall Dimensions

Chapter
2
Physical
Appearance
and
Overall
Dimensions
0.5Hz：150%(V/F) control
Startup torque 0.5Hz：180%(SFVC)
0.25Hz：
180%(CLVC) 2.1
Installation
There are a total of 10 frequency sources, such as digital
Frequency setting, analog voltage setting, analog current setting,
W D
source pulse,setting and serial communication port setting. W W1
d
You can perform switchover between these sources in W1
various ways.
Running • Operation panel
command • Control terminals
source • Serial communication port
Auxiliary

H1
There are ten auxiliary frequency sources. It can

H1
H

H
frequency implementfine tuning of auxiliary frequency and
Standard source frequency synthesis.
functions
The optional I/O extension card enables AI3 to receive the
Motor overheat
motor temperature sensor input (PT100, PT1000) so as to
protection
realize motor overheat protection. D

Input terminal 7 digital input (DI) terminals, X5 supports up to Sheet
mental
housing Plastic housing
100 kHz high-speed pulse input
2 analog input (AI) terminals
1 analog output (AO) terminal that supports 0–20 mA
Output terminal
1 high-speed pulse output terminal (open-collector) that Mounting
supports 0–100 kHz square wave signal output Mounting Hole
Overall Dimensions (mm) Hole
1 relay output terminal Diameter
The optional programming card helps you to realize Model
User W(mm) H(mm) D(mm) W1(mm) H1(mm) d(mm)
programmable secondary development. Its programming environment is
function compatible with that of the PLC of BEST. B3 110 152 128 96 140 4.5
B4 140 205 157 126 191 5.0
B5 107 200 146 70 190 4.5
B6 140 280 192 100 267 6
K2 170 280 184 110 266 6
C4 210 338 194 192 319 7
A6 210 350 200 180 332 6
A8 250 400 230 220 380 7
A10 300 542 285 265 523 10
A12 338 580 325 303 565 10
A14 400 915 330 320 892 10

-8- -9-



Chapter
2
Physical
Appearance
and
Overall
Dimensions




























E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

























Chapter
2
Physical
Appearance
and
Overall
Dimensions

2.1.2
Installation
Clearance
Requirements
W D W1
The
clearance
that
needs
to
be
reserved
varies
with
the
power
class
of
the
E4,
as

shown
in
the
following
figure.

≥120
H

H1

≥50 ≥50

A16,A20 Frame

Mounting
Hole Mounting

≥120
Overall
Dimensions Hole
(mm)
Diameter

Model
W(mm) H(mm) D(mm) W1(mm) H1(mm) d(mm)
The
E4
series
AC
drive
dissipates
heat
from
the
bottom
to
the
top.
When
multiple
AC

A16














365 1140 510 216 200 13
drives
are
required
to
work
together,
install
them
side
by
side.

A20














400 1409 555 216 200 16
For
application
installing
multiple
AC
drives,
if
one
row
of
AC
drives
need
to
be
installed

above
another
row,
install
an
insulation
guide
plate
to
prevent
AC
drives
in
the
lower
row

2.1.1
Installation
Environment
Requirements from
heating
those
in
the
upper
row
and
causing
faults.

Item Requirements
Ambient
temperature -10°C
to
+50°C
Install
the
AC
drive
on
the
surface
of
an
incombustible
object,
and

Heat
dissipation ensure
that
there
is
sufficient
space
around
for
heat
dissipation.
Install
the
AC
drive
vertically
on
the
support
using
screws.
Free
from
direct
sunlight,
high
humidity
and
condensation
Mounting
location Free
from
corrosive,
explosive
and
combustible
gas
Free
from
oil
dirt,
dust
and
metal
powder
Less
than
0.6
g
Vibration
Far
away
from
the
punching
machine
or
the
like
The
E4
series
AC
drives
of
plastic
housing
are
the
whole
unit

built-in
products
operated
through
remote
control
and
need
to
be

installed
in
the
final
system.The
final
system
must
have
the
required

Protective
enclosure
fireproof
cover,
electrical
protective
cover
and
mechanical
protective

cover,
and
satisfy
the
regional
laws
&
regulations
and
related
IEC

requirements.

-10- -11-



Chapter
2
Physical
Appearance
and
Overall
Dimensions




























E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

























Chapter
2
Physical
Appearance
and
Overall
Dimensions

2.2
Electrical
installation 2.2.1
Recommended
Cable
Diameter
and
Installation
Dimensions
of

Power
Terminals
Braking
resistor

B5 P+ PB R S T
PE
Braking
resistor

Braking
unit

RL1
DC+
RL2
DC-
P(-) P1 P(+) PB U V W

Filter

B6 R S T P+ P1 PE
U V W PB
U
R L C4 P- P+ R S T
U V W PB PE
V M
S
W
T N
K2
signal-phase P- P+ R S T
U V W PE

PE K2

three-phase
+10V



AO1
L N




PB P+




U





P-


V


W




PE



Anolog
input
AI1 DC
0-10V
(0-10V)


GND Output

GND A6、A8 R S T PB P+ P- U V W



PLC
Anolog
input

AI2

DC+24V
(0-10V/4-20mA)

COM
A10、A12 R S T P1 P+ P- U V W
COM
Forward
RUN


X1
Forward
JOG
TC1


X2 A14、A16、A20 P+ P- R S T U V W
Fault
reset


X3 TA1 Relay
output


Multi-reference

terminal
1


X4
Multi-reference
TB1
terminal
2


X5/DI •
The
recommended
data
and
models
are
for
reference
only.
The
cable
diameter

Y1 you
select
cannot
be
larger
than
the
size
in
the
following
figures.
X6
Diode
output


X7 •
The
prerequisite
of
cable
selection
is
as
follows:
Under
ambient
temperature

COM of
40°C
in
steady
state,
for
the
recommended
diameters
of
the
insulation
copper

FM
A High
speed
pules
conductor
or
cable,
see
section12.4
of
the
IEC
60204-1-2005
Modbus
RS485

output


B COM

- 12 - -13-



Chapter
2
Physical
Appearance
and
Overall
Dimensions




























E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

























Chapter
2
Physical
Appearance
and
Overall
Dimensions

2.3

Cabling
Requirements
2.2.2

Description
of
maim
Circuit
Terminals
1)
The
motor
cables
must
be
laid
far
away
from
other
cables.
The
motor
cables
of
several

AC
drives
can
be
laid
side
by
side.
Terminal Name Description 2)
It
is
recommended
that
the
motor
cables,
power
input
cables
and
control
cables
be
laid

L、N Power
supply

in
different
ducts.
To
avoid
electromagnetic
interference
caused
by
rapid
change
of
the

Connect
to
the
power

supply. output
voltage
of
the
AC
drive,
the
motor
cables
and
other
cables
must
not
be
laid
side

R、S、T input
terminals
by
side
for
a
long
distance.
U、V、

P+、
W

PB
AC
drive
output
terminals
Connecting
terminals
of
Connect
to
a
three-phase
motor.

Connect
to
a
braking
resistor.

3)
If
the
control
cable
must
run
across
the
power
cable,
make
sure
they
are
arranged
at

an
angle
of
close
to
90°.
Other
cables
must
not
run
across
the
AC
drive.
braking
resistor
4)
The
power
input
and
output
cables
of
the
AC
drive
and
weak-current
signal
cables

PE Grounding
terminal Must
be
grounded. (such
as
control
cable)
should
be
laid
vertically
(if
possible)
rather
than
in
parallel.

Positive
and
negative 5)
The
cable
ducts
must
be
in
good
connection
and
well
grounded.
Aluminium
ducts
can

P+、P- Common
DC
bus
input
point. be
used
to
improve
electric
potential.
terminals
of
DC
bus
6)
The
filter,
AC
drive
and
motor
should
be
connected
to
the
system
(machinery
or

P1、P+ External
DC
filter
terminal Connect
to
external
DC
filter. appliance)
properly,
with
spraying
protection
at
the
installation
part
and
conductive

metal
in
full
contact.

1)
Power
input
terminals
L1,
L2
or
R,
S,
T Figure
2-1
Cabling
diagram

Power
cable
‒
The
cable
connection
on
the
input
side
of
the
AC
drive
has
no
phase
sequence
Power
cable
requirement. Min.
200
mm 90°
Min.
300mm
‒
The
specification
and
installation
method
of
external
power
cables
must
comply
Motor
cable
Control
cable
with
the
local
safety
regulations
and
related
IEC
standards.
‒
Use
copper
conductors
of
a
proper
size
as
power
cables
according
to
the

recommended
values
in
section
8.3. E4
AC
drive
2)
AC
drive
output
terminals
U,
V,
W
Control
cable
‒
The
specification
and
installation
method
of
external
power
cables
must
comply

90° Min.
500
mm
with
the
local
safety
regulations
and
related
IEC
standards. Braking
resistor
cable
‒
Use
copper
conductors
of
a
proper
size
as
power
cables
according
to
the

Motor
cable
recommended
values
in
section
8.3.
Control
cable
‒
The
capacitor
or
surge
absorber
cannot
be
connected
to
the
output
side
of
the
90°

Min.
500
mm
Control
cable
Power
cable
AC
drive.
Otherwise,
it
may
cause
frequent
AC
drive
fault
or
even
damage
the
AC

drive.

‒
If
the
motor
cable
is
too
long,
electrical
resonance
will
be
generated
due
to

the
impact
of
distributed
capacitance.
This
will
damage
the
motor
insulation

or
generate
higher
leakage
current,
causing
the
AC
drive
to
trip
in
overcurrent

protection.
If
the
motor
cable
is
greater
than
100
m
long,
an
AC
output
reactor

must
be
installed
close
to
the
AC
drive.
3)
Terminal

PE

‒
This
terminal
must
be
reliably
connected
to
the
main
earthing
conductor.
Otherwise,

it
may
cause
electric
shock,
mal-function
or
even
damage
to
the
AC
drive.

- 14 - -15-



Chapter
2
Physical
Appearance
and
Overall
Dimensions




























E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

























Chapter
2
Physical
Appearance
and
Overall
Dimensions

2.4
Description
of
Control
Circuit
Terminals 2.4.1
Peripheral
Electrical
Devices
and
System
Configuration

+10V
AI1



GND

AI2
CO



X

X3
X6 FM TA1 TB1 TC1
POWER
A
B
GND AO1 X1 X3 X5 X7 COM Y 1 PLC +24V

Terminal Name Function
Description

AI1（AVI）
Analog
input
1 Input
voltage
range:
0‒10
VDC MCCB 断路器
AI2（ACI）
Input
range:
0‒10
VDC/4‒20
mA,
decided
by

Analog
input
2 jumper
J8
on
the
control
board
Impedance:
22
kΩ
(voltage
input),
500
Ω
(current

input)
AO1（AFM）
Analog
output
1 Voltage
or
current
output
is
decided
by
jumper
J5.
Contactor
Output
voltage
range:
0‒10
V
Output
current
range:
0‒20
mA
+10V
External
+10
V
Provide
+10
V
power
supply
to
external
unit.

power
supply Generally,
it
provides
power
supply
to
external

potentiometer
with
resistance
range
of
1‒5
kΩ.
Maximum
output
current:
10
mA AC
input

reactor
A、B
Modbus
Rs458
X1
Digital
input
1 Optical
coupling
isolation,
compatible
with
dual

X2
Digital
input
2 polarity
input

X3
Digital
input
3 Impedance:
2.4
kΩ
X4
Digital
input
4 Voltage
range
for
level
input:
9‒30
V
EMC

X5（DI）
High-speed
pulse
Besides
features
of
DI1‒DI4,
it
can
be
used
for
Input
filter
input
high-speed
pulse
input.
Maximum
input
frequency:
100
kHz

X6
Digital
input
6 Parameter
F4-05

X7
Digital
input
7 Parameter
F4-06
Y1
Open-collector
output Use
common
terminal
with
24V,voltage
range 24V±20%

FM（Y2）
High-speed
pulse
It
is
limited
by
F5-00
(FM
terminal
output
mode
E4
AC
driver
output selection).
TA1、TB1、TC1
Relay output
terminals
TA1、TB1 NO
terminal 、TA1、TC1
NC
terminal
PLC、COM
Input
terminal
of
Connect
to
+24
V
by
default.

external
power
When
DI1-DI5
need
to
be
driven
by
external

supply signal,
OP
needs
to
be
connected
to
external

power
supply
and
be
disconnected
from
+24
V.

24V
、COM
External
+24
Provide
+24
V
power
supply
to
external
unit.

V
power
Generally,
it
provides
power
supply
to
DI/DO

supplyApplying

terminals
and
external
sensors.
Press Motor Braking Encoder
to
Overvoltage


Maximum
output
current:
200
mA
Category
II
circuit sensor resistance terminal

-16- - 17 -



Chapter
2
Physical
Appearance
and
Overall
Dimensions




























E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual







































Chapter
3

Mechanical
and
Electrical
Installation

2.4.2

Description
of
Peripheral
Electrical
Devices Chapter
3
Mechanical
and
Electrical
Installation
Part Mounting
Location Function
Description 3.1
Operation
Panel
Interrupt
the
power
supply
when
overcurrent
occurs
on

MCCB Power
receiving
side You
can
modify
the
parameters,
monitor
the
working
status
and
start
or

downstream
devices
Start
and
stop
the
AC
drive. stop
the
E4
byoperating
the
operation
panel,
as
shown
in
the
following
figure.
Between
MCCB
and
Do
not
start
and
stop
the
AC
drive
frequently
by
switching

Contactor
AC
drive
input
side the
contactor
on
and
off
(less
than
twice
per
minute)
nor

use
it
to
directly
start
the
AC
drive.

Status
LED
•
Improve
the
power
factor
of
the
input
side.
Data
display
•
Eliminate
the
higher
harmonics
of
the
input
side

AC
input
effectively
and
prevent
other
devices
from
being

AC
drive
input
side
reactor damaged
due
to
distortion
of
the
voltage
waveform.

•
Eliminate
the
input
current
unbalance
due
to
unbalance

between
the
power
phases. Encoder
•
Reduce
the
external
conduction
and
radiation
Cancel
key Menu
key
interference
of
the
AC
drive.

EMC

AC
drive
input
side •
Decrease
the
conduction
interference
flowing
from
Programming
key
Shift
key
Input
filter
the
power
end
to
the
AC
drive
and
improve
the
anti-
interference
capacity
of
the
AC
drive.
RUN
key Stop/Reset
key
•
Improve
the
power
factor
of
the
input
side.
E4
series
AC
drive
Increment
key
•
Improve
the
efficiency
and
thermal
stability
of
the
AC
drive.

DC
of
7.5G
and
above
Decrement
key
reactor configured
with
DC
•
Eliminate
the
impact
of
higher
harmonics
of
the
AC

reactor
as
standard drive
input
side
and
reduce
the
external
conduction

and
radiation
interference.
The
output
side
of
the
AC
drive
generally
has
much

higher
harmonics.
When
the
motor
is
far
from
the
AC
Key Name Function
drive,
there
is
much
distributed
capacitance
in
the
circuit

and
certain
harmonics
may
cause
resonance
in
the

Between
AC
drive
circuit,
bringing
about
the
following
two
impacts:
RUN Start
the
AC
drive
in
the
operation
panel
control
mode.
AC
output
output
side
and
the
•
Degrade
the
motor
insulation
performance
and

reactor motor,
close
to
the
damage
the
motor
in
the
long
run.
Stop
the
AC
drive
when
it
is
in
the
running
state
and
perform
the

AC
drive Stop/Reset reset
operation
when
it
is
in
the
fault
state.
The
functions
of
this

•
Generate
large
leakage
current
and
cause
frequent
AC
key
are
restricted
in
F7-02.
drive
protection
trips.
If
the
distance
between
the
AC
drive
and
the
motor
is
Perform
function
switchover
(such
as
quick
switchover
of

Multifunction command
source
or
direction)
according
to
the
setting
of
F7-01.
greater
than
100
m,
install
an
AC
output
reactor.

Cancel
key Exit
Level
I
menu.
1)


Do
not
install
the
capacitor
or
surge
suppressor
on
the
output
side
of
the
AC
drive.

Otherwise,
it
may
cause
faults
to
the
AC
drive
or
damage
to
the
capacitor
and
surge

suppressor.
Enter
the
menu
interfaces
level
by
level,
and
2)


Inputs/Outputs
(main
circuit)
of
the
AC
drive
contain
harmonics,
which
may
interfere
with
Confirm confirm
the
parameter
setting.
the
communication
device
connected
to
the
AC
drive.
Therefore,
install
an
anti-interference

filter
to
minimize
the
interference.
Increment Increase
data
or
function
code.
3)


For
more
details
on
peripheral
devices,
refer
to
related
selection
manual.

- 18 - -19-



Chapter
3

Mechanical
and
Electrical
Installation










































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual







































Chapter
3

Mechanical
and
Electrical
Installation

3.3

Viewing
and
Modifying
Function
Codes


Decrement Decrease
data
or
function
code. The
operation
panel
of
the
E4
adopts
three-level
menu.
The
three-level
menu
consists
of
function
code
group
(Level
I),
function
code
(Level
II),
and

Select
the
displayed
parameters
in
turn
in
the
stop
or
running
function
code
setting
value
(level
III),
as
shown
in
the
following
figure.
Shift state,
and
select
the
digit
to
be
modified
when
modifying

Figure
3-2
operation
procedure
on
the
operation
panel
parameters.

Status
parameter Level-I
menu If
there
is
a
blinking
digit,
press

(default
display) (Select
the
function
/



/




to
modify
the
digit.
Frequence
setting code
group)
Encoder
PRG
50.00 F0 ENTER
PRG

Level-II
menu
(Select
the
PRG
function
code)
F0-03 ENTER F0-04 ENTER

Next
function

3.2
Description
of
Indicators code
Level-III
menu ENTER
(Set
the
value
of

PRG
Not
to
save

5 To
save

the
function
code) the
setting the
setting
Light
Description

ON
indicates
that
the
AC
drive
is
in
the
running
state,
and
OFF
You
can
return
to
Level
II
menu
from
Level
III
menu
by
pressing

RUN

indicates
that
the
AC
drive
is
in
the
stop
state.
• After
you
press








ENTER


,
the
system
saves
the
parameter
setting
first,
and
then
goes

F/R
ON
indicates
reverse
rotation,
and
OFF
indicates
forward
rotation. back
to
Level
II
menu
and
shifts
to
the
next
function
code.

Hz

Hz:
unit
of
frequency • After
you
press
PRG

,
the
system
does
not
save
the
parameter
setting,
but
directly

returns
to
Level
II
menu
and
remains
at
the
current
function
code.
A

A:
unit
of
current
V

V:
unit
of
voltage 3.4
JOG
Running
Hz+A

RPM:
unit
of
rotational
speed In
certain
applications,
the
AC
drive
needs
to
run
in
low
speed
temporarily
to
facilitate

equipment
test
or
other
commissioning
operations.
In
this
case,
you
can
set
the
AC
drive
to

A+V

%:
percentage perform
JOG
running.
Output

frequency
Acceleration /Deceleration

base
frequency
(F0-25)
JOG
running

frequency
(F0-08)

Time
(t)

Actual
Actual

acceleration
time deceleration
time
JOG
acceleration
JOG
deceleration

Set
time
(F8-01) Set

acceleration
time time
(F8-02)
deceleration
time

JOG

command

- 20 - - 21 -



Chapter
3

Mechanical
and
Electrical
Installation










































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

■ Parameter
Setting
and
Operation
of
JOG
Running
in
Operation
Panel
Control Chapter
4
Function
Code
Table
If
FP-00
is
set
to
a
non-zero
number,
parameter
protection
is
enabled.
You
must
enter
the

Define
the
MF.K
key
correct
user
password
to
enter
the
menu.
JOG
JOG
running

command
key as
the
"Forward
Operation
parameters
JOG"
key
panel
control To
cancel
the
password
protection
function,
enter
with
password
and
set
FP-00
to
0.
(stop
state)
Group
F
and
Group
A
are
standard
function
parameters.
Group
U
includes
the
monitoring

F8-00
( JOG
running
frequency)
function
parameters.
MF.K F7-01
=
3 F0-02
=
0 F8-01
( JOG
acceleration
time)
F8-02
( JOG
deceleration
time) Forward
The
symbols
in
the
function
code
table
are
described
as
follows:
JOG

"☆":
The
parameter
can
be
modified
when
the
AC
drive
is
in
either
stop
or
running
state.
Set
the
parameters
according
to
the
preceding
figure.
In
stop
state
of
the
AC
drive,
hold

"★":
The
parameter
cannot
be
modified
when
the
AC
drive
is
in
the
running
state.
down
MF.K


,
and
the
AC
drive
starts
JOG
running.
After
you
release







,
the
AC
drive

"●":
The
parameter
is
the
actually
measured
value
and
cannot
be
modified.
decelerates
to
stop.
"*":
The
parameter
is
factory
parameter
and
can
be
set
only
by
the
manufacturer.
To
perform
reverse
JOG,
set
F7-01
to
4
and
F8-13
to
1.
Hold
down
MF.K




and
the
AC

drive
starts
reverse
JOG
running.
4.1
Standard
Function
Parameters

Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code
Group
F0:
Standard
Function
Parameters
1:
G
type
(constant
torque
load)
Model

F0-00 G/P
type
display 2:
P
type
(variable
torque
load
●
dependent
e.g.
fan
and
pump)
0:
Sensorless
flux
vector
control

(SFVC)
1:
Closed-loop
vector
control

F0-01 Motor
1
control
mode 0 ★
(CLVC)
2:
Voltage/Frequency
(V/F)

control
0:
Operation
panel
control
(LED
off)
1:
Terminal
control
(LED
on)
F0-02 Command
source
selection 0 ☆
2:
Communication
control
(LED

blinking)
0:
Digital
setting
(non-retentive
at

power
failure)
1:
Digital
setting
(retentive
at

Main
frequency
source
X
power
failure)
F0-03 0 ★
selection
2:
AI1
3:
AI2
4:
AI3

- 22 - - 23 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code
5:
Pulse
setting
(DI5) Frequency
lower
limit
(F0-14)
to

F0-12 Frequency
upper
limit 50.00
Hz ☆
6:
Multi-reference maximum
frequency
(F0-10)
Main
frequency
source
X

F0-03 7:
Simple
PLC 0 ★ 0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency

selection F0-13 Frequency
upper
limit
offset 0.00
Hz ☆
8:
PID (F0-10)
9:
Communication
setting 0.00
Hz
to
frequency
upper
limit

F0-14 Frequency
lower
limit 0.00
Hz ☆
(F0-12)
Auxiliary
frequency
source
Y
The
same
as
F0-03
(Main

F0-04 0 ★
selection frequency
source
X
selection) Model

F0-15 Carrier
frequency 0.5‒16.0
kHz ☆
dependent
Range
of
auxiliary
frequency
0:
Relative
to
maximum
frequency
F0-05 0 ☆ 0:
No
Y
for
X
and
Y
operation 1:
Relative
to
main
frequency
X Carrier
frequency

F0-16 1 ☆
adjustment
with
temperature 1:
Yes
Range
of
auxiliary
frequency

F0-06 0%‒150% 100% ☆
Y
for
X
and
Y
operation 0.00‒650.00s
(F0-19
=
2)
Model

Unit's
digit
(Frequency
source
F0-17 Acceleration
time
1 0.0‒6500.0s
(F0-19
=
1) ☆
dependent
selection) 0‒65000s
(F0-19
=
0)
0:
Main
frequency
source
X 0.00‒650.00s
(F0-19
=
2)
1:
X
and
Y
operation Model

F0-18 Deceleration
time
1 0.0‒6500.0s
(F0-19
=
1) ☆
dependent
(operation
relationship
determined
0‒65000s
(F0-19
=
0)
by
ten's
digit)
0:1s
2:
Switchover
between
X
and
Y Acceleration/Deceleration

F0-19 1:
0.1s 1 ★
3:
Switchover
between
X
and
"X
time
unit
2:
0.01s
F0-07 Frequency
source
selection and
Y
operation" 00 ☆
4:
Switchover
between
Y
and
"X
Frequency
offset
of
auxiliary

0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency

and
Y
operation" F0-21 frequency
source
for
X
and
0.00
Hz ☆
(F0-10)
Y operation
Ten's
digit
(X
and
Y
operation

relationship) Frequency
reference
1:
0.1
Hz
F0-22 2 ★
resolution 2:
0.01
Hz
0:
X+Y
1:
X-Y Retentive
of
digital
setting
0:
Not
retentive
F0-23 frequency
upon
power
2 ☆
2:
Maximum failure 1:
Retentive
3:
Minimum
0:
Motor
parameter
group
1
0.00
to
maximum
frequency
(valid
1:
Motor
parameter
group
2
Motor
parameter
group

F0-08 Preset
frequency when
frequency
source
is
digital
50.00
Hz ☆ F0-24 0 ★
selection 2:
Motor
parameter
group
3
setting)
3:
Motor
parameter
group
4
0:
Same
direction
F0-09 Rotation
direction 0 ☆ 0:
Maximum
frequency
(F0-10)
1:
Reverse
direction
Acceleration/Deceleration

F0-25 1:
Set
frequency 0 ★
F0-10 Maximum
frequency 50.00‒320.00
Hz 50.00
Hz ★ time
base
frequency
2:
100
Hz
0:
Set
by
F0-12
Base
frequency
for
UP/ 0:
Running
frequency
1:
AI1
F0-26 DOWN
modification
during
0 ★
Source
of
frequency
upper
2:
AI2 running 1:
Set
frequency
F0-11 0 ★
limit 3:
AI3
4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5)
5:
Communication
setting

- 24 - - 25 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code
Unit's
digit
(Binding
operation
0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power

panel
command
to
frequency
Stator
resistance
≤
55
kW) Model

F1-06 ★
source) (asynchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
dependent
0:
No
binding power
>
55
kW)
1:
Frequency
source
by
digital
0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power

setting Rotor
resistance
≤
55
kW) Model

F1-07 ★
2:
AI1 (asynchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
dependent
3:
AI2 power
>
55
kW)

4:
AI3 0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power

5:
Pulse
setting
(DI5) Leakage
inductive
reactance
≤
55
kW) Model

F1-08 ★
(asynchronous
motor) 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
dependent
Binding
command
source
to
6:
Multi-reference
F0-27 000 ☆ power
>
55
kW)
frequency
source
7:
Simple
PLC
0.1‒6553.5
mH
(AC
drive
power

8:
PID
Mutual
inductive
reactance
≤
55
kW) Model

9:
Communication
setting F1-09 ★
(asynchronous
motor) 0.01‒-655.35
mH
(AC
drive
dependent
Ten's
digit
(Binding
terminal
power
>
55
kW)
command
to
frequency
source) 0.01
to
F1-03
(AC
drive
power
≤

0‒9,
same
as
unit's
digit No-load
current
55
kW) Model

F1-10 ★
(asynchronous
motor) 0.1
to
F1-03
(AC
drive
power
>
dependent
Hundred's
digit
(Binding

communication
command
to
55
kW)
frequency
source) 0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power

0‒9,
same
as
unit's
digit Stator
resistance
≤
55
kW) Model

F1-16 ★
(synchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
dependent
0:
Modbus
protocol
Serial
communication
power
>
55
kW)
F0-28 1:
Profibus-DP
bridge 0 ☆
protocol 0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power

2:
CANopen
bridge ≤
55
kW)
Shaft
D
inductance
Model

F1-17 ★
Group
F1:
Motor
1
Parameters (synchronous
motor) 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
dependent
0:
Common
asynchronous
motor power
>
55
kW)
1:
Variable
frequency
0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power

F1-00 Motor
type
selection asynchronous
motor 1 ★ Shaft
Q
inductance
≤
55
kW) Model

F1-18 ★
2:
Permanent
magnetic
(synchronous
motor) 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
dependent
synchronous
motor power
>
55
kW)
Model
Back
EMF
(synchronous
Model

F1-01 Rated
motor
power 0.1‒1000.0
kW ★ F1-20 0.1‒6553.5
V ★
dependent motor) dependent
Model
Encoder
pulses
per

F1-02 Rated
motor
voltage 1‒2000
V ★ F1-27 1‒65535 1024 ★
dependent revolution
0.01‒655.35
A
(AC
drive
power
≤
0:
ABZ
incremental
encoder
55
kW) Model
1:
UVW
incremental
encoder
F1-03 Rated
motor
current ★
0.1‒6553.5
A
(AC
drive
power
>
dependent F1-28 Encoder
type 2:
Resolver 0 ★
55
kW)
3:
SIN/COS
encoder
Model
4:
Wire-saving
UVW
encoder
F1-04 Rated
motor
frequency 0.01
Hz
to
maximum
frequency ★
dependent
A/B
phase
sequence
of
ABZ
0:
Forward
Rated
motor
rotational
Model
F1-30 0 ★
F1-05 1‒65535
RPM ★ incremental
encoder 1:
Reserve
speed dependent

- 26 - - 27 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table
Function

Function
Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Code
Code
Excitation
adjustment

F1-31 Encoder
installation
angle 0.0°‒359.9° 0.0° ★ F2-13 0‒20000 2000 ☆
proportional
gain
U,
V,
W
phase
sequence
of
0:
Forward Excitation
adjustment

F1-32 0 ★ F2-14 0‒20000 1300 ☆
UVW
encoder 1:
Reverse integral
gain
F1-33 UVW
encoder
angle
offset 0.0°‒359.9° 0.0° ★ Torque
adjustment

F2-15 0‒20000 2000 ☆
proportional
gain
Number
of
pole
pairs
of

F1-34 1‒65535 1 ★ Torque
adjustment
integral

resolver F2-16 0‒20000 1300 ☆
gain
Encoder
wire-break
fault
0.0s:
No
action
F1-36 0.0s ★ Unit's
digit:
integral
separation
detection
time 0.1‒10.0s
F2-17 Speed
loop
integral
property 0:
Disabled 0 ☆
0:
No
auto-tuning
1:
Enabled
1:
Asynchronous
motor
static

auto-tuning 0:
No
field
weakening
Field
weakening
mode
of

2:
Asynchronous
motor
complete
F2-18 1:
Direct
calculation 1 ☆
synchronous
motor
F1-37 Auto-tuning
selection auto-tuning 0 ★ 2:
Automatic
adjustment
11:
Synchronous
motor
with-load
Field
weakening
depth
of

auto-tuning F2-19 50%‒500% 100% ☆
synchronous
motor
12:
Synchronous
motor
no-load

Maximum
field
weakening

auto-tuning F2-20 1%‒300% 50% ☆
current
Group
F2:
Vector
Control
Parameters
Field
weakening
automatic

F2-21 10%‒500% 100% ☆
F2-00 Speed
loop
proportional
gain
1 0‒100 30 ☆ adjustment
gain
F2-01 Speed
loop
integral
time
1 0.01‒10.00s 0.50s ☆ Field
weakening
integral

F2-22 2‒10 2 ☆
F2-02 Switchover
frequency
1 0.00
to
F2-05 5.00
Hz ☆ multiple

F2-03 Speed
loop
proportional
gain
2 0‒100 20 ☆ Group
F3:
V/F
Control
Parameters

0.01‒10.00s 0:
Linear
V/F
F2-04 Speed
loop
integral
time
2 1.00s ☆
1:
Multi-point
V/F
F2-02
to
maximum
output

F2-05 Switchover
frequency
2 10.00
Hz ☆ 2:
Square
V/F
frequency
3:
1.2-power
V/F
F2-06 Vector
control
slip
gain 50%‒200% 100% ☆
4:
1.4-power
V/F
Time
constant
of
speed
loop
F3-00 V/F
curve
setting 0 ★
F2-07 0.000‒0.100s 0.000s ☆ 6:
1.6-power
V/F
filter
8:
1.8-power
V/F
Vector
control
over-
F2-08 0‒200 64 ☆ 9:
Reserved
excitation
gain
10:
V/F
complete
separation
0:
F2-10
11:
V/F
half
separation
1:
AI1
0.0%
(fixed
torque
boost) Model

F3-01 Torque
boost ☆
Torque
upper
limit
source
in
2:
AI2 0.1%‒30.0% dependent
F2-09 0 ☆
speed
control
mode 3:
AI3
Cut-off
frequency
of
torque
0.00
Hz
to
maximum
output

4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5) F3-02 50.00
Hz ★
boost frequency
5:
Communication
setting Multi-point
V/F
frequency
1

F3-03 0.00
Hz
to
F3-05 0.00
Hz ★
Digital
setting
of
torque
(F1)
F2-10 upper
limit
in
speed
control
0.0%‒200.0% 150.0% ☆ Multi-point
V/F
voltage
1

mode F3-04 0.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ★
(V1)

- 28- - 29 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting Range Default Property
Code Code
Multi-point
V/F
frequency
2
Group
F4:
Input
Terminals
F3-05 F3-03
to
F3-07 0.00 Hz ★
(F2)
0:
No
function
Multi-point
V/F
voltage
2

F3-06 0.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ★ 1:
Forward
RUN
(FWD)
(V2)
2:
Reverse
RUN
(REV)
F3-05
to
rated
motor
frequency

(F1-04) F4-00 DI1
function
selection 3:
Three-line
control 1 ★
Multi-point
V/F
frequency
3
Note:
The
rated
frequencies
4:
Forward
JOG
(FJOG)
F3-07 0.00 Hz ★
(F3) of
motors
2,
3,
and
4
are
5:
Reverse
JOG
(RJOG)
respectively
set
in
A2-04,
A3-04,
6:
Terminal
UP
and
A4-04.
7:
Terminal
DOWN
Multi-point
V/F
voltage
3

F3-08 0.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ★ 8:
Coast
to
stop
(V3)
9:
Fault
reset
(RESET)
F3-09 V/F
slip
compensation
gain 0%‒200.0% 0.0% ☆
10:
RUN
pause
F3-10 V/F
over-excitation
gain 0‒200 64 ☆ F4-01 DI2
function
selection 4 ★
11:
Normally
open
(NO)
input
of

V/F
oscillation
suppression
Model
external
fault
F3-11 0‒100 ☆
gain dependent
12:
Multi-reference
terminal
1
0:
Digital
setting
(F3-14) 13:
Multi-reference
terminal
2
1:
AI1
14:
Multi-reference
terminal
3
2:
AI2
15:
Multi-reference
terminal
4
3:
AI3
F4-02 DI3
function
selection 16:
Terminal
1
for
acceleration/ 9 ★
4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5) deceleration
time
selection
Voltage
source
for
V/F
5:
Multi-reference 17:
Terminal
2
for
acceleration/
F3-13 0 ☆
separation deceleration
time
selection
6:
Simple
PLC
7:
PID 18:
Frequency
source
switchover
8:
Communication
setting 19:
UP
and
DOWN
setting
clear

100.0%
corresponds
to
the
rated
(terminal,
operation
panel)
motor
voltage
(F1-02,
A4-02,
A5- 20:
Command
source
switchover

02,
A6-02). terminal
1
Voltage
digital
setting
for
V/ 21:
Acceleration/Deceleration

F3-14 0
V
to
rated
motor
voltage 0
V ☆ F4-03 DI4
function
selection prohibited 12 ★
F
separation
0.0‒1000.0s 22:
PID
pause
Voltage
rise
time
of
V/F
It
indicates
the
time
for
the
23:
PLC
status
reset
F3-15 0.0s ☆
separation voltage
rising
from
0
V
to
rated
24:
Swing
pause
motor
voltage. 25:
Counter
input
0.0‒1000.0s 26:
Counter
reset
Voltage
decline
time
of
V/F
It
indicates
the
time
for
the

F3-16 0.0s ☆ 27:
Length
count
input
separation voltage
to
decline
from
rated

motor
voltage

to
0
V. F4-04 DI5
function
selection 28:
Length
reset 13 ★
29:
Torque
control
prohibited
0:
Frequency
and
voltage

Stop
mode
selection
upon
declining
to
0
independently
F3-17 0 ☆
V/F
separation 1:
Frequency
decliining
after
voltage
declines
to
0

- 30 - - 31 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code

30:
Pulse
input
(enabled
only
for
Corresponding
setting
of
AI

F4-14 -100.00%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
DI5) curve
1
minimum
input
31:Reserved F4-15 AI
curve
1
maximum
input F4-13
to
10.00
V 10.00
V ☆
32:
Immediate
DC
braking Corresponding
setting
of
AI

F4-16 -100.00%‒100.0% 100.0% ☆
F4-05 DI6
function
selection 33:
Normally
closed
(NC)
input
of
0 ★ curve
1
maximum
input
external
fault F4-17 AI1
filter
time 0.00‒10.00s 0.10s ☆
34:
Frequency
modification
F4-18 AI
curve
2
minimum
input 0.00
V
to
F4-20 0.00
V ☆
forbidden
Corresponding
setting
of
AI

35:
Reverse
PID
action
direction F4-19 -100.00%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
curve
2
minimum
input
36:
External
STOP
terminal
1
F4-20 AI
curve
2
maximum
input F4-18
to
10.00
V 10.00
V ☆
37:
Command
source
switchover

terminal
2 Corresponding
setting
of
AI

F4-21 -100.00%‒100.0% 100.0% ☆
curve
2
maximum
input

F4-06 DI7
function
selection 38:
PID
integral
pause 0 ★
F4-22 AI2
filter
time 0.00‒10.00s 0.10s ☆
39:
Switchover
between
main

frequency
source
X
and
preset
F4-23 AI
curve
3
minimum
input 0.00
V
to
F4-25 0.00
V ☆
frequency Corresponding
setting
of
AI

F4-24 -100.00%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
40:
Switchover
between
auxiliary
curve
3
minimum
input
frequency
source
Y
and
preset
F4-25 AI
curve
3
maximum
input F4-23
to
10.00
V 10.00
V ☆
frequency
F4-07 DI8
function
selection 0 ★ Corresponding
setting
of
AI

41:
Motor
selection
terminal
1 F4-26 -100.00%‒100.0% 100.0% ☆
curve
3
maximum
input

42:
Motor
selection
terminal
2
F4-27 AI3
filter
time 0.00‒10.00s 0.10s ☆
43:
PID
parameter
switchover
F4-28 Pulse
minimum
input 0.00
kHz
to
F4-30 0.00
kHz ☆
44:
User-defined
fault
1
Corresponding
setting
of

45:
User-defined
fault
2 F4-29 -100.00%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
pulse
minimum
input
F4-08 DI9
function
selection 46:
Speed
control/Torque
control
0 ★
switchover F4-30 Pulse
maximum
input F4-28
to
50.00
kHz 50.00
kHz ☆
47:
Emergency
stop Corresponding
setting
of

F4-31 -100.00%‒100.0% 100.0% ☆
pulse
maximum
input
48:
External
STOP
terminal
2
F4-32 Pulse
filter
time 0.00‒10.00s 0.10s ☆
49:
Deceleration
DC
braking
50:
Clear
the
current
running
time
F4-09 DI10
function
selection 0 ★
51:
Switchover

between
two-line

mode
and
three-line
mode
52‒59:
Reserved
F4-10 DI
filter
time 0.000‒1.000s 0.010s ☆
0:
Two-line
mode
1
1:
Two-line
mode
2
F4-11 Terminal
command
mode 0 ★
2:
Three-line
mode
1
3:
Three-line
mode
2
F4-12 Terminal
UP/DOWN
rate 0.01‒65.535
Hz/s 1.00
Hz/s ☆
F4-13 AI
curve
1
minimum
input 0.00
V
to
F4-15 0.00
V ☆

- 32 - - 33 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code

Unit's
digit
(AI1
curve
selection) Thousand's
digit
(DI4
valid
mode)

Curve
1
(2
points,
see
F4-13
to
0,
1
(same
as
DI1)
F4-16) F4-38 DI
valid
mode
selection
1 Ten
thousand's
digit
(DI5
valid
00000 ★
Curve
2
(2
points,
see
F4-18
to
mode)
F4-21) 0,
1
(same
as
DI1)
Curve
3
(2
points,
see
F4-23
to

Unit's
digit
(DI6
valid
mode)
F4-26)
Curve
4
(4
points,
see
A6-00
to
0,
1
(same
as
DI1)
F4-33 AI
curve
selection A6-07) 321 ☆ Ten's
digit
(DI7
valid
mode)
Curve
5
(4
points,
see
A6-08
to
0,
1
(same
as
DI1)
A6-15)
Hundred's
digit
(DI8
state)
Ten's
digit
(AI2
curve
selection)
F4-39 DI
valid
mode
selection
2 0,
1
(same
as
DI1) 00000 ★
Curve
1
to
curve
5
(same
as
AI1)
Thousand's
digit
(DI9
valid
mode)
Hundred's
digit
(AI3
curve

selection) 0,
1
(same
as
DI1)

Curve
1
to
curve
5
(same
as
AI1) Ten
thousand's
digit
(DI10
valid

mode)
Unit's
digit
(Setting
for
AI1
less

than
minimum
input) 0,
1
(same
as
DI1)

0:
Minimum
value 0:
Voltage

signal
F4-40 AI2
input
signal
selection 0 ★
1:
0.0% 1:
Current
signal

Setting
for
AI
less
than
Ten's
digit
(Setting
for
AI2
less
Group
F5:
Output
Terminals

F4-34 000 ☆
minimum
input
than
minimum
input) 0:
Pulse
output
(FMP)
F5-00 FM
terminal
output
mode 0 ☆
0,
1
(same
as
AI1) 1:
Switch
signal
output
(FMR)
Hundred's
digit
(Setting
for
AI3
FMR
function
(open- 0:
No
output
F5-01 2 ☆
less
than
minimum
input) collector
output
terminal) 1:
AC
drive
running
0,
1
(same
as
AI1) 2:
Fault
output
(stop)
F4-35 DI1
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s ★ 3:
Frequency-level
detection

F4-36 DI2
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s ★ FDT1
output
4:
Frequency
reached
F4-37 DI3
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s ★
5:
Zero-speed
running
(no
output

Unit's
digit
(DI1
valid
mode) at
stop)
0:
High
level
valid 6:
Motor
overload
pre-warning
1:
Low
level
valid 7:
AC
drive
overload
pre-warning
F5-02 Relay
function
(T/A-T/B-T/C) 2 ☆
F4-38 DI
valid
mode
selection
1 Ten's
digit
(DI2
valid
mode) 00000 ★ 8:
Set
count
value
reached
0,
1
(same
as
DI1) 9:
Designated
count
value

reached
Hundred's
digit
(DI3
valid
mode)
10:
Length
reached
0,
1
(same
as
DI1)
11:
PLC
cycle
complete
12:
Accumulative
running
time

reached
13:
Frequency
limited

- 34- - 35 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code
Extension
card
relay
function
14:
Torque
limited F5-06 FMP
function
selection 0:
Running
frequency 0 ☆
F5-03 0 ☆
(P/A-P/B-P/C) 15:
Ready
for
RUN 1:
Set
frequency
F5-07 AO1
function
selection 0 ☆
O1
function
selection
(open- 16:
AI1
larger
than
AI2 2:
Output
current
F5-04
collector
output
terminal)
17:
Frequency
upper
limit
reached 3:
Output
torque
(absolute
value)
18:
Frequency
lower
limit
reached
4:
Output
power
(no
output
at
stop) 5:
Output
voltage
DO1
function
selection
19:
Undervoltage
state
output 6:
Pulse
input
F5-04 (open-collector
output
1 ☆
20:
Communication
setting 7:
AI1
terminal)
21:
Reserved 8:
AI2
22:
Reserved 9:
AI3
F5-08 AO2
function
selection 1 ☆
23:
Zero-speed
running
2
(having
10:
Length
output
at
stop)
11:
Count
value
24:
Accumulative
power-on
time

reached 12:
Communication
setting

25:
Frequency
level
detection
13:
Motor
rotational
speed
FDT2
output 14:
Output
current
26:
Frequency
1
reached 15:
Output
voltage
27:
Frequency
2
reached 16:
Output
torque
(actual
value)
28:
Current
1
reached Maximum
FMP
output

F5-09 0.01‒100.00
kHz 50.00
kHz ☆
29:
Current
2
reached frequency
30:
Timing
reached F5-10 AO1
offset
coefficient -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
31:
AI1
input
limit
exceeded F5-11 AO1
gain -10.00‒10.00 1.00 ☆
32:
Load
becoming
0 F5-12 AO2
offset
coefficient -100.0%‒100.0% 0.00% ☆
F5-05 Extension
card
DO2
function 4 ☆
33:
Reverse
running F5-13 AO2
gain -10.00‒10.00 1.00 ☆
34:
Zero
current
state
F5-17 FMR
output
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s ☆
35:
Module
temperature
reached
F5-18 Relay
1
output
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s ☆
36:
Software
current
limit

exceeded F5-19 Relay
2
output
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s ☆
37:
Frequency
lower
limit
reached
F5-20 DO1
output
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s ☆
(having
output
at
stop)
F5-21 DO2
output
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s ☆
38:
Alarm
output
39:
Motor
overheat
warning
40:
Current
running
time
reached
41:
Fault
output
(There
is
no

output
if
it
is
the
coast
to
stop

fault
and
undervoltage
occurs.)

- 36 - - 37 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code
Unit's
digit
(FMR
valid
mode) Time
proportion
of
S-curve

F6-08 0.0%
to
(100.0%
‒
F6-09) 30.0% ★
start
segment
0:
Positive
logic
1:
Negative
logic Time
proportion
of
S-curve

F6-09 0.0%
to
(100.0%
‒
F6-08) 30.0% ★
end
segment
Ten's
digit
(Relay
1
valid
mode)
0:
Decelerate
to
stop
0,
1
(same
as
FMR) F6-10 Stop
mode 0 ☆
1:
Coast
to
stop
Hundred's
digit
(Relay
2
valid

Initial
frequency
of
stop
DC

mode) F6-11 0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency 0.00
Hz ☆
F5-22 DO
valid
mode
selection 00000 ☆ braking
0,
1
(same
as
FMR)
Waiting
time
of
stop
DC

F6-12 0.0‒36.0s 0.0s ☆
Thousand's
digit
(DO1
valid
braking
mode)
F6-13 Stop
DC
braking
current 0%‒100% 0% ☆
0,
1
(same
as
FMR)
F6-14 Stop
DC
braking
time 0.0‒36.0s 0.0s ☆
Ten
thousand's
digit
(DO2
valid

F6-15 Brake
use
ratio 0%‒100% 100% ☆
mode)
Group F7: Operation Panel and Display
0,
1
(same
as
FMR)
0:
MF.K
key
disabled
0:
Voltage
signal
F5-23 AO1
output
signal
selection
0 ★ 1:
Switchover
between
operation

1:
Current
signal
panel
control
and
remote

Group
F6:
Start/Stop
Control command
control
(terminal
or

0:
Direct
start F7-01 MF.K
Key
function
selection communication) 0 ★
1:
Rotational
speed
tracking
2:
Switchover
between
forward

F6-00 Start
mode restart 0 ☆ rotation
and
reverse
rotation

2:
Pre-excited
start
(asynchronous
3:
Forward
JOG
motor) 4:
Reverse
JOG
0:
From
frequency
at
stop 0:
STOP/RESET
key
enabled

Rotational
speed
tracking
only
in
operation
panel
control
F6-01 1:
From
zero
speed 0 ★ F7-02 STOP/RESET
key
function 1 ☆
mode
2:
From
maximum
frequency 1:
STOP/RESET
key
enabled
in

any
operation
mode
Rotational
speed
tracking

F6-02 1‒100 20 ☆ 0000‒FFFF
speed
Bit00:
Running
frequency
1
(Hz)
F6-03 Startup
frequency 0.00‒10.00
Hz 0.00
Hz ☆
Bit01:
Set
frequency
(Hz)
Startup
frequency
holding

F6-04 0.0‒100.0s 0.0s ★ Bit02:
Bus
voltage
(V)
time LED
display
running
F7-03 Bit03:
Output
voltage
(V) 1F ☆
Startup
DC
braking
current/ parameters
1
F6-05 0%‒100% 0% ★ Bit04:
Output
current
(A)
Pre-excited
current
Startup
DC
braking
time/ Bit05:
Output
power
(kW)
F6-06 0.0‒100.0s 0.0s ★
Pre-excited
time Bit06:
Output
torque
(%)
0:
Linear
acceleration/ Bit07:
DI
input
status
deceleration
Acceleration/Deceleration
1:
S-curve
acceleration/
F6-07 0 ★
mode deceleration
A
2:
S-curve
acceleration/
deceleration
B

- 38 - - 39-





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code

Bit08:
DO
output
status 0000‒FFFF
Bit09:
AI1
voltage
(V) Bit00:
Set
frequency
(Hz)
Bit10:
AI2
voltage
(V) Bit01:
Bus
voltage
(V)
LED
display
running Bit11:
AI3
voltage
(V) Bit02:
DI
input
status
F7-03 1F ☆ Bit03:
DO
output
status
parameters
1 Bit12:
Count
value
Bit13:
Length
value Bit04:
AI1
voltage
(V)
Bit14:
Load
speed
display Bit05:
AI2
voltage
(V)
F7-05 LED
display
stop
parameters Bit06:
AI3
voltage
(V) 33 ☆
Bit15:
PID
setting
0000‒FFFF Bit07:
Count
value

Bit00:
PID
feedback Bit08:
Length
value

Bit01:
PLC
stage Bit09:
PLC
stage

Bit02:
Pulse
setting
frequency
Bit10:
Load
speed
(kHz) Bit11:
PID
setting
Bit03:
Running
frequency
2
(Hz) Bit12:
Pulse
setting
frequency

Bit04:
Remaining
running
time (kHz)

Bit05:
AI1
voltage
before
Load
speed
display

F7-06 0.0001‒6.5000 1.0000 ☆
correction
(V) coefficient
Bit06:
AI2
voltage
before
Heatsink
temperature
of

F7-07 0.0‒100.0°C - ●
correction
(V) inverter
module
Bit07:
AI3
voltage
F7-08 Temporary
software
version - - ●
LED
display
running before
correction
(V) F7-09 Accumulative
running
time 0‒65535
h - ●
F7-04 0 ☆
parameters
2 Bit08:
Linear
speed F7-10 Product
number - - ●
Bit09:
Current
power-on
time

F7-11 Software
version - - ●
(Hour)
Bit10:
Current
running
time
(Min) 0:
0
decimal
place

Bit11:
Pulse
setting
frequency
Number
of
decimal
places
1:
1
decimal
place

F7-12 1 ☆
(Hz) for
load
speed
display 2:
2
decimal
places
Bit12:
Communication
setting
3:
3
decimal
places
value F7-13 Accumulative
power-on
time 0‒65535
h 0
h ●
Bit13:
Encoder
feedback
speed

Accumulative
power

(Hz) F7-14 0‒65535
kWh - ●
consumption
Bit14:
Main
frequency
X
display

(Hz) Group
F8:
Auxiliary
Functions
Bit15:
Auxiliary
frequency
Y
F8-00 JOG
running
frequency 0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency 2.00
Hz ☆
display
(Hz) F8-01 JOG
acceleration
time 0.0‒6500.0s 20.0s ☆
F8-02 JOG
deceleration
time 0.0‒6500.0s 20.0s ☆
Model

F8-03 Acceleration
time
2 0.0‒6500.0s ☆
dependent
Model

F8-04 Deceleration
time
2 0.0‒6500.0s ☆
dependent

- 40 - - 41 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code
Model
Frequency
detection
value

F8-05 Acceleration
time
3 0.0‒6500.0s ☆ F8-28 0.00
to
maximum
frequency 50.00
Hz ☆
dependent (FDT2)
Model
Frequency
detection

F8-06 Deceleration
time
3 0.0‒6500.0s ☆ F8-29 0.0%‒100.0%
(FDT2
level) 5.0% ☆
dependent hysteresis
(FDT
hysteresis
2)
Model
Any
frequency
reaching

F8-07 Acceleration
time
4 0.0‒500.0s ☆ F8-30 0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency 50.00
Hz ☆
dependent detection
value
1
Model
Any
frequency
reaching
0.0%‒100.0%
(maximum

F8-08 Deceleration
time
4 0.0‒6500.0s ☆ F8-31 0.0% ☆
dependent detection
amplitude
1 frequency)
F8-09 Jump
frequency
1 0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency 0.00
Hz ☆ Any
frequency
reaching

F8-32 0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency 50.00
Hz ☆
detection
value
2
F8-10 Jump
frequency
2 0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency 0.00
Hz ☆
Any
frequency
reaching
0.0%‒100.0%
(maximum

F8-11 Frequency
jump
amplitude 0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency 0.00
Hz ☆ F8-33 0.0% ☆
detection
amplitude
2 frequency)
Forward/Reverse
rotation

F8-12 0.0‒3000.0s 0.0s ☆ 0.0%‒300.0%
(rated
motor

dead-zone
time F8-34 Zero
current
detection
level 5.0% ☆
current)
0:
Enabled
F8-13 Reverse
control 0 ☆ Zero
current
detection
delay

1:
Disabled F8-35 0.00‒600.00s 0.10s ☆
time
Running
mode
when
set
0:
Run
at
frequency
lower
limit 0.0%
(no
detection)
F8-14 frequency
lower
than
1:
Stop 0 ☆ F8-36 Output
overcurrent
threshold 0.1%‒300.0%
(rated
motor
200.0% ☆
frequency
lower
limit 2:
Run
at
zero
speed current)
F8-15 Droop
control 0.00‒10.00
Hz 0.00
Hz ☆ Output
overcurrent
detection

F8-37 0.00‒600.00s 0.00s ☆
delay
time
Accumulative
power-on
time

F8-16 0‒65000
h 0
h ☆ 0.0%‒300.0%
(rated
motor

threshold F8-38 Any
current
reaching
1 100.0% ☆
current)
Accumulative
running
time

F8-17 0‒65000
h 0
h ☆ Any
current
reaching
1
0.0%‒300.0%
(rated
motor

threshold F8-39 0.0% ☆
amplitude current)
0:
No
F8-18 Startup
protection 0 ☆ 0.0%‒300.0%
(rated
motor

1:
Yes F8-40 Any
current
reaching
2 100.0% ☆
current)
Frequency
detection
value

F8-19 0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency 50.00
Hz ☆ Any
current
reaching
2
0.0%‒300.0%
(rated
motor

(FDT1) F8-41 0.0% ☆
amplitude current)
Frequency
detection

F8-20 0.0%‒100.0%
(FDT1
level) 5.0% ☆ 0:
Disabled
hysteresis
(FDT
hysteresis
1) F8-42 Timing
function 0 ☆
1:
Enabled
Detection
range
of
frequency

F8-21 0.00‒100%
(maximum
frequency) 0.0% ☆ 0:
F8-44
reached
Jump
frequency
during
1:
AI1
F8-22 0:
Disabled1:
Enabled 0 ☆
acceleration/deceleration 2:
AI2
F8-43 Timing
duration
source 0 ☆
Frequency
switchover
point
3:
AI3
F8-25 between
acceleration
time
1
0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency 0.00
Hz ☆ (100%
of
analog
input
corresponds

and
acceleration
time
2 to
the
value
of
F8-44)
Frequency
switchover
point
F8-44 Timing
duration 0.0‒6500.0
min 0.0
min ☆
F8-26 between
deceleration
time
1
0.00
to
maximum
frequency 0.00
Hz ☆
and
deceleration
time
2 F8-45 AI1
input
voltage
lower
limit 0.00
V
to
F8-46 3.10
V ☆

F8-27 Terminal
JOG
preferred 0:
Disabled1:
Enabled 0 ☆ F8-46 AI1
input
voltage
upper
limit F8-45
to
10.00
V 6.80
V ☆

- 42- - 43 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code

F8-47
Module
temperature

0‒100°C 75°C ☆ Output
phase
loss
protection
0:
Disabled
threshold F9-13 1 ☆
selection 1:
Enabled
0:
Fan
working
during
running F9-14 1st
fault
type 0:
No
fault - ●
F8-48 Cooling
fan
control 0 ☆
1:
Fan
working
continuously 1:
Reserved
Dormant
frequency
(F8-51)
to
2:
Overcurrent
during
acceleration
F8-49 Wakeup
frequency 0.00
Hz ☆
maximum
frequency
(F0-10)
3:
Overcurrent
during
deceleration
F8-50 Wakeup
delay
time 0.0‒6500.0s 0.0s ☆ 4:
Overcurrent
at
constant
speed
0.00
Hz
to
wakeup
frequency
(F8- 5:
Overvoltage
during

F8-51 Dormant
frequency 0.00
Hz ☆
49) acceleration

F8-52 Dormant
delay
time 0.0‒6500.0s 0.0s ☆ 6:
Overvoltage
during

deceleration
Current
running
time

F8-53 0.0‒6500.0
min 0.0
min ☆ 7:
Overvoltage
at
constant
speed

reached
Output
power
correction
8:
Buffer
resistance
overload
F8-54 0.00%‒200
.0% 100.0% ☆
coefficient 9:
Undervoltage
Group
F9:
Fault
and
Protection 10:
AC
drive
overload
11:
Motor
overload
Motor
overload
protection
0:
Disabled
F9-00 1 ☆ 12:Power
input
phase
loss
selection 1:
Enabled
13:
Power
output
phase
loss
Motor
overload
protection

F9-01 0.20‒10.00 1.00 ☆ 14:
Module
overheat
gain
15:
External
equipment
fault
Motor
overload
warning

F9-02 50%‒100% 80% ☆ 16:
Communication
fault
coefficient F9-15 2nd
fault
type - ●
F9-03 Overvoltage
stall
gain 0
(no
stall
overvoltage)‒100 0 ☆ 17:
Contactor
fault
18:
Current
detection
fault
Overvoltage
stall
protective

F9-04 120%‒150% 130% ☆ 19:
Motor
auto-tuning
fault
voltage
F9-05 Overcurrent
stall
gain 0‒100 20 ☆ 20:
Encoder/PG
card
fault
21:
EEPROM
read-write
fault
Overcurrent
stall
protective

F9-06 100%‒200% 150% ☆ 22:
AC
drive
hardware
fault
current
23:
Short
circuit
to
ground
Short-circuit
to
ground
upon
0:
Disabled
F9-07 1 ☆ 24:
Reserved
power-on 1:
Enabled
25:
Reserved
F9-09 Fault
auto
reset
times 0‒20 0 ☆
26:
Accumulative
running
time

DO
action
during
fault
auto
0:
Not
act reached
F9-10 0 ☆
reset 1:
Act 27:
User-defined
fault
1
Time
interval
of
fault
auto
28:
User-defined
fault
2
F9-11 0.1s‒100.0s 1.0s ☆
reset
29:
Accumulative
power-on
time

Unit's
digit:
Input
phase
loss
reached
protection 30:
Load
becoming
0
Input
phase
loss
protection/ Ten's
digit:
Contactor
energizing

F9-12 contactor
energizing
11 ☆ 31:
PID
feedback
lost
during

protection running
protection
selection
0:
Disabled
1:
Enabled

- 44 - - 45 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code
40:
With-wave
current
limit
fault Unit's
digit
(Motor
overload,
Err11)
41:
Motor
switchover
fault
during
0:
Coast
to
stop
running
1:
Stop
according
to
the
stop

F9-16 3rd
(latest)
fault
type 42:
Too
large
speed
deviation - ● mode
43:
Motor
over-speed 2:
Continue
to
run
45:
Motor
overheat Ten's
digit
(Power
input
phase

51:
Initial
position
fault loss,
Err12)
F9-17 Frequency
upon
3rd
fault - - ● Same
as
unit's
digit
Fault
protection
F9-18 Current
upon
3rd
fault - - ● F9-47 Hundred's
digit
(Power
output
00000 ☆
action
selection
1 phase
loss,
Err13)
F9-19 Bus
voltage
upon
3rd
fault - - ●
Same
as
unit's
digit
F9-20 DI
status
upon
3rd
fault - - ●
Thousand's
digit
(External

Output
terminal
status
upon

F9-21 - - ● equipment
fault,
Err15)
3rd
fault
Same
as
unit's
digit
AC
drive
status
upon
3rd

F9-22 - - ●
fault Ten
thousand's
digit

(Communication
fault,
Err16)
Power-on
time
upon
3rd

F9-23 - - ●
fault Same
as
unit's
digit
F9-24 Running
time
upon
3rd
fault - - ● Unit's
digit
(Encoder
fault,
Err20)
F9-27 Frequency
upon
2nd
fault - - ● 0:
Coast
to
stop
F9-28 Current
upon
2nd
fault - - ● 1:
Switch
over
to
V/F
control,
stop

F9-29 Bus
voltage
upon
2nd
fault - - ● according
to
the
stop
mode
2:
Switch
over
to
V/F
control,

F9-30 DI
status
upon
2nd
fault - - ● Fault
protection
F9-48 continue
to
run 00000 ☆
Output
terminal
status
upon
action
selection
2
F9-31 - - ● Ten's
digit
(EEPROM
read-write

2nd
fault
fault,
Err21)
F9-32 Frequency
upon
2nd
fault - - ●
0:
Coast
to
stop
F9-33 Current
upon
2nd
fault - - ● 1:
Stop
according
to
the
stop

F9-34 Bus
voltage
upon
2nd
fault - - ● mode
F9-37 DI
status
upon
1st
fault - - ● Hundred's
digit:
reserved
Output
terminal
status
upon
Thousand's
digit
(Motor
overheat,

F9-38 - - ● Err25)
1st
fault
F9-39 Frequency
upon
1st
fault - - ● Fault
protection
action
Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47
F9-48 00000 ☆
selection
2
F9-40 Current
upon
1st
fault - - ● Ten
thousand's
digit

(Accumulative
running
time

F9-41 Bus
voltage
upon
3rd
fault - - ● reached)
F9-42 DI
status
upon
1st
fault - - ● Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47
Output
terminal
status
upon

F9-43 - - ●
1st
fault
F9-44 Frequency
upon
1st

fault - - ●

- 46 - -47 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Function

Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code
Unit's
digit
(User-defined
fault
1,

Err27) Backup
frequency
upon
0.0%‒100.0%
(maximum

F9-55 100.0% ☆
abnormality frequency)
Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47
0:
No
temperature
sensor
Ten's
digit
(User-defined
fault
2,
Type
of
motor
temperature

F9-56 1:
PT100 1 ☆
Err28) sensor
2:
PT1000
Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47
Motor
overheat
protection

Hundred's
digit
(Accumulative
F9-57 0‒200°C 110°C ☆
threshold
power-on
time
reached,
Err29)
Motor
overheat
warning

Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47 F9-58 0‒200°C 90°C ☆
threshold
Thousand's
digit
(Load
becoming
0:
Invalid
Fault
protection
action
0,
Err30)
F9-49 00000 ☆ Action
selection
at

selection
3 F9-59 1:
Decelerate 0 ☆
0:
Coast
to
stop instantaneous
power
failure
2:
Decelerate
to
stop
1:
Stop
according
to
the
stop

mode Action
pause
judging
voltage

F9-60 at
instantaneous
power
80.0%‒100.0% 90.0% ☆
2:
Continue
to
run
at
7%
of
rated
failure
motor
frequency
and
resume

to
the
set
frequency
if
the
load
Voltage
rally
judging
time
at

F9-61 0.00‒100.00s 0.50s ☆
recovers instantaneous
power
failure
Ten
thousand's
digit
(PID
Action
judging
voltage
at
60.0%‒100.0%
(standard
bus

F9-62 80.0% ☆
feedback
lost
during
running,
instantaneous
power
failure voltage)
Err31) 0:
Disabled
Protection
upon
load

F9-63 0 ☆
Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47 becoming
0 1:
Enabled
Unit's
digit
(Too
large
speed
Detection
level
of
load
0.0%‒100.0%
(rated
motor

deviation,
Err42) F9-64 10.0% ☆
becoming
0 current)
Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47 Detection
time
of
load

F9-65 0.0‒60.0s 1.0s ☆
Ten's
digit
(Motor
over-speed,
becoming
0
Err43) 0.0%‒50.0%
(maximum

F9-67 Over-speed
detection
value 20.0% ☆
Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47 frequency)
Fault
protection
action
F9-68 Over-speed
detection
time 0.0‒60.0s 1.0s ☆
F9-50 Hundred's
digit
(Initial
position
00000 ☆
selection
4
fault,
Err51) Detection
value
of
too
large
0.0%‒50.0%
(maximum

F9-69 20.0% ☆
Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47 speed
deviation frequency)

Thousand's
digit
(Speed
feedback
Detection
time
of
too
large

F9-70 0.0‒60.0s 5.0s ☆
fault,
Err52) speed
deviation

Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47 Group FA: Process Control PID Function

Ten
thousand's
digit:
Reserved 0:
FA-01
1:
AI1
0:
Current
running
frequency 2:
AI2
1:
Set
frequency FA-00 PID
setting
source 3:
AI3 0 ☆
4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5)
Frequency
selection
for
2:
Frequency
upper
limit
F9-54 0 ☆ 5:
Communication
setting
continuing
to
run
upon
fault 3:
Frequency
lower
limit
6:
Multi-reference
4:
Backup
frequency
upon
FA-01 PID
digital
setting 0.0%‒100.0% 50.0% ☆
abnormality

- 48 - -49 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code
0:
AI1 Maximum
deviation
between

1:
AI2 FA-24 two
PID
outputs
in
reverse
0.00%‒100.00% 1.00% ☆
direction
2:
AI3
Unit's
digit
(Integral
separated)
3:
AI1
‒
AI2
FA-02 PID
feedback
source 4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5) 0 ☆ 0:
Invalid
5:
Communication
setting 1:
Valid
6:
AI1
+
AI2 FA-25 PID
integral
property Ten's
digit
(Whether
to
stop
00 ☆
integral
operation
when
the
output

7:
MAX
(|AI1|,
|AI2|)
reaches
the
limit)
8:
MIN
(|AI1|,
|AI2|)
0:
Continue
integral
operation
0:
Forward
action
FA-03 PID
action
direction 0 ☆ 1:
Stop
integral
operation
1:
Reverse
action
Detection
value
of
0.0%:
Not
judging
feedback
loss
FA-04 PID
setting
feedback
range 0‒65535 1000 ☆ FA-26 0.0% ☆
PID
feedback
loss 0.1%‒100.0%
FA-05 Proportional
gain
Kp1 0.0‒100.0 20.0 ☆
Detection
time
of

FA-06 Integral
time
Ti1 0.01‒10.00s 2.00s ☆ FA-27 0.0‒20.0s 0.0s ☆
PID
feedback
loss
FA-07 Differential
time
Td1 0.00‒10.000 0.000s ☆ 0:
No
PID
operation
at
stop
FA-28 PID
operation
at
stop 0 ☆
Cut-off
frequency
of
PID
1:
PID
operation
at
stop
FA-08 0.00
to
maximum
frequency 2.00
Hz ☆
reverse
rotation
Group
FB:
Swing
Frequency,
Fixed
Length
and
Count
FA-09 PID
deviation
limit 0.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
0:
Relative
to
the
central

FA-10 PID
differential
limit 0.00%‒100.00% 0.10% ☆ Swing
frequency
setting
frequency
FB-00 0 ☆
FA-11 PID
setting
change
time 0.00‒650.00s 0.00s ☆ mode 1:
Relative
to
the
maximum

FA-12 PID
feedback
filter
time 0.00‒60.00s 0.00s ☆ frequency

FA-13 PID
output
filter
time 0.00‒60.00s 0.00s ☆ FB-01 Swing
frequency
amplitude 0.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆

FA-14 Reserved - - ☆ FB-02 Jump
frequency
amplitude 0.0%‒50.0% 0.0% ☆

FA-15 Proportional
gain
Kp2 0.0‒100.0 20.0 ☆ FB-03 Swing
frequency
cycle 0.0‒3000.0s 10.0s ☆

FA-16 Integral
time
Ti2 0.01‒10.00s 2.00s ☆ Triangular
wave
rising
time

FB-04 0.0%‒100.0% 50.0% ☆
coefficient
FA-17 Differential
time
Td2 0.000‒10.000s 0.000s ☆
FB-05 Set
length 0‒65535
m 1000
m ☆
0:
No
switchover
FB-06 Actual
length 0‒65535
m 0
m ☆
PID
parameter
switchover
1:
Switchover
via
DI
FA-18 0 ☆ FB-07 Number
of
pulses
per
meter 0.1‒6553.5 100.0 ☆
condition 2:
Automatic
switchover
based
on

deviation FB-08 Set
count
value 1‒65535 1000 ☆
PID
parameter
switchover
FB-09 Designated
count
value 1‒65535 1000 ☆
FA-19 0.0%
to
FA-20 20.0% ☆
deviation
1 Group
FC:
Multi-Reference
and
Simple
PLC
Function
PID
parameter
switchover
FC-00 Reference
0 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
FA-20 FA-19
to
100.0% 80.0% ☆
deviation
2
FC-01 Reference
1 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
FA-21 PID
initial
value 0.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
FC-02 Reference
2 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
FA-22 PID
initial
value
holding
time 0.00‒650.00s 0.00s ☆
Maximum
deviation
between
FC-03 Reference
3 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
FA-23 two
PID
outputs
in
forward
0.00%‒100.00% 1.00% ☆
FC-04 Reference
4 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
direction

- 50 - -51 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property
Code
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Group
FD:
Communication
Parameters
Acceleration/deceleration
time
Unit's
digit
(Modbus
baud
rate)
FC-47 0‒3 0 ☆
of
simple
PLC
reference
14
0:
300
BPs
Running
time
of
simple
PLC
1:
600
BPs
FC-48 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆
reference
15
2:
1200
BPs
Acceleration/deceleration
time

FC-49 0‒3 0 ☆ 3:
2400
BPs
of
simple
PLC
reference
15
4:
4800
BPs
Time
unit
of
simple
FC-50 0:
s
(second)1:h
(hour) 0 ☆ 5:
9600
BPs
PLC
running

6:
19200
BPs
0:
Set
by
FC-00
7:
38400
BPs
1:
AI1
8:
57600
BPs
2:
AI2
9:
115200
BPs
3:
AI3
FC-51 Reference
0
source 0 ☆ Ten's
digit
(PROFIBUS-DP
baud

4:
Pulse
setting
rate)
5:
PID
FD-00 Baud
rate 0:
115200
BPs 6005 ☆
6:
Set
by
preset
frequency
(F0-
08),
modified
via
terminal
UP/ 1:
208300
BPs
DOWN 2:
256000
BPs
3:
512000
Bps
Hundred's
digit
(reserved)
Thousand's
digit
(CANlink
baud

rate)
0:
20
1:
50
2:
100
3:
125
4:
250
5:
500
6:
1
M
0:
No
check,
data
format
<8,N,2>
1:
Even
parity
check,
data
format

<8,E,1>
FD-01
Data
format 2:
Odd
Parity
check,
data
format
0 ☆
<8,O,1>
3:
No
check,
data
format
<8,N,1>
Valid
for
Modbus
0:
Broadcast
address
1‒247
FD-02 Local
address 1 ☆
Valid
for
Modbus,
PROFIBUS-DP

and
CANlink

- 52- -53-





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code
FC-05 Reference
5 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
Running
time
of
simple
PLC

FC-06 Reference
6 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆ FC-26 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆
reference
4
FC-07 Reference
7 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
Acceleration/deceleration
time

FC-27 0‒3 0 ☆
FC-08 Reference
8 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆ of
simple
PLC
reference
4
FC-09 Reference
9 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆ Running
time
of
simple
PLC

FC-28 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆
reference
5
FC-10 Reference
10 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
Acceleration/deceleration
time

FC-11 Reference
11 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆ FC-29 0‒3 0 ☆
of
simple
PLC
reference
5
FC-12 Reference
12 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆ Running
time
of
simple
PLC

FC-30 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆
FC-13 Reference
13 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆ reference
6
FC-14 Reference
14 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆ Acceleration/deceleration
time

FC-31 0‒3 0 ☆
of
simple
PLC
reference
6
FC-15 Reference
15 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
Running
time
of
simple
PLC

0:
Stop
after
the
AC
drive
runs
FC-32 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆
reference
7
one
cycle
Acceleration/deceleration
time

1:
Keep
final
values
after
the
AC
FC-33 0‒3 0 ☆
FC-16 Simple
PLC
running
mode 0 ☆ of
simple
PLC
reference
7
drive
runs
one
cycle
Running
time
of
simple
PLC

2:
Repeat
after
the
AC
drive
runs
FC-34 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆
reference
8
one
cycle
Acceleration/deceleration
time

Unit's
digit
(Retentive
upon
power
FC-35 0‒3 0 ☆
of
simple
PLC
reference
8
failure)
Running
time
of
simple
PLC

0:
No FC-36 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆
reference
9
Simple
PLC
retentive
1:
Yes
FC-17 00 ☆ Acceleration/deceleration
time

selection FC-37 0‒3 0 ☆
Ten's
digit
(Retentive
upon
stop) of
simple
PLC
reference
9
0:
No Running
time
of
simple
PLC

FC-38 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆
1:
Yes reference
10

Running
time
of
simple
PLC
Acceleration/deceleration
time

FC-18 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆ FC-39 0‒3 0 ☆
of
simple
PLC
reference
10
reference
0
Acceleration/deceleration
time
Running
time
of
simple
PLC

FC-19 0‒3 0 ☆ FC-40 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆
of
simple
PLC
reference
0 reference
11

Running
time
of
simple
PLC
Acceleration/deceleration
time

FC-20 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆ FC-41 0‒3 0 ☆
of
simple
PLC
reference
11
reference
1
Acceleration/deceleration
time
Running
time
of
simple
PLC

FC-21 0‒3 0 ☆ FC-42 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆
of
simple
PLC
reference
1 reference
12

Running
time
of
simple
PLC
Acceleration/deceleration
time

FC-22 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆ FC-43 0‒3 0 ☆
of
simple
PLC
reference
12
reference
2
Acceleration/deceleration
time
Running
time
of
simple
PLC

FC-23 0‒3 0 ☆ FC-44 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆
of
simple
PLC
reference
2 reference
13

Running
time
of
simple
PLC
Acceleration/deceleration
time

FC-24 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆ FC-45 0‒3 0 ☆
of
simple
PLC
reference
13
reference
3
Acceleration/deceleration
time
Running
time
of
simple
PLC

FC-25 0‒3 0 ☆ FC-46 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) ☆
of
simple
PLC
reference
3 reference
14

- 54 - - 55 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
0‒20
ms Code
FD-03 Response
delay 2
ms ☆
Valid
for
Modbus FE-15 User-defined
function
code
15 F6-10 ☆
0.0s
(invalid) FE-16 User-defined
function
code
16 F0-00 ☆
0.1‒60.0s FE-17 User-defined
function
code
17 F0-00 ☆
FD-04 Communication
timeout 0.0s ☆
Valid
for
Modbus,
PROFIBUS-DP
FE-18 User-defined
function
code
18 F0-00 ☆
and
CANopen
FE-19 User-defined
function
code
19 F0-00 ☆
Unit's
digit:
Modbus
protocol
FE-20 User-defined
function
code
20 F0-00 ☆
0:
Non-standard
Modbus
protocol
FE-21 User-defined
function
code
21 F0-00
to
FP-xx F0-00 ☆
1:
Standard
Modbus
protocol
FE-22 User-defined
function
code
22 A0-00
to
Ax-xx F0-00 ☆
Ten's
digit:
PROFIBUS-DP
data

Modbus
protocol
selection
FE-23 User-defined
function
code
23 U0-xx
to
U0-xx F0-00 ☆
format
FD-05 and
PROFIBUS-DP
data
30 ☆
format FE-24 User-defined
function
code
24 F0-00 ☆
0:
PPO1
format
FE-25 User-defined
function
code
25 F0-00 ☆
1:
PPO2
format
FE-26 User-defined
function
code
26 F0-00 ☆
2:
PPO3
format
3:
PPO5
format FE-27 User-defined
function
code
27 F0-00 ☆
FE-28 User-defined
function
code
28 F0-00 ☆
Communication
reading
0:
0.01A
FD-06 0 ☆ FE-29 User-defined
function
code
29 F0-00 ☆
current
resolution 1:
0.1A
Group
FP:
Function
Code
Management
CANlink
communication
0.0s:
Invalid
FD-08 0 ☆ FP-00 User
password 0‒65535 0 ☆
timeout
time 0.1‒60.0s
0:
No
operation
Group
FE:
User-defined
Parameters
01:
Restore
factory
settings
FE-00 User-defined
function
code
0 F0-10 ☆
except
motor
parameters
FE-01 User-defined
function
code
1 F0-02 ☆
02:
Clear
records
FE-02 User-defined
function
code
2 F0-03 ☆ FP-01 Restore
default
settings 0 ★
04:
Restore
user

FE-03 User-defined
function
code
3 F0-07 ☆ backup
parameters
FE-04 User-defined
function
code
4 F0-08 ☆ 501:
Back
up
current
FE-05 User-defined
function
code
5 F0-17 ☆ user
parameters
FE-06 User-defined
function
code
6 F0-00
to
FP-xx F0-18 ☆ Unit's
digit
(Group
U
display

selection)
FE-07 User-defined
function
code
7 A0-00
to
Ax-xx F3-00 ☆
0:
Not
display
FE-08 User-defined
function
code
8 U0-xx
to
U0-xx F3-01 ☆
AC
drive
parameter
display
1:
Display
FE-09 User-defined
function
code
9 F4-00 ☆ FP-02 11 ★
property Ten's
digit
(Group
A
display

FE-10 User-defined
function
code
10 F4-01 ☆ selection)
FE-11 User-defined
function
code
11 F4-02 ☆ 0:
Not
display
FE-12 User-defined
function
code
12 F5-04 ☆ 1:
Display
FE-13 User-defined
function
code
13 F5-07 ☆
FE-14 User-defined
function
code
14 F6-00 ☆

- 56 - - 57 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code
Unit's
digit
(User-defined
A1-04 VDI5
function
selection 0‒59 0 ★
parameter
display
selection)
Unit's
digit
(VDI1)
0:
Not
display
0:
Decided
by
state
of
VDOx
Individualized
1:
Display
FP-03 00 ☆ 1:
Decided
by
A1-06
parameter
display
property Ten's
digit
(User-modified

parameter
display
selection) Ten's
digit
(VDI2)

0:
Not
display 0,
1
(same
as
VDI1)
1:
Display A1-05 VDI
state
setting
mode Hundred's
digit
(VDI3) 00000 ★
Parameter
0:
Modifiable 0,
1
(same
as
VDI1)
FP-04 0 ☆
modification
property 1:
Not
modifiable Thousand's
digit
(VDI4)
Group
A0:
Torque
Control
and
Restricting
Parameters 0,
1
(same
as
VDI1)
Speed/Torque
0:
Speed
control Ten
thousand's
digit
(VDI5)
A0-00 0 ★
control
selection 1:
Torque
control 0,
1
(same
as
VDI1)
0:
Digital
setting
(A0-03) Unit's
digit
(VDI1)
1:
AI1 0:
Invalid
2:
AI2 1:
Valid
3:
AI3
Ten's
digit
(VDI2)
4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5)
Torque
setting
source
in
0,
1
(same
as
VDI1)
A0-01 5:
Communication
setting 0 ★
torque
control
A1-06 VDI
state
selection Hundred's
digit
(VDI3) 00000 ★
6:
MIN
(AI1,
AI2)
7:
MAX
(AI1,
AI2) 0,
1
(same
as
VDI1)
Full
range
of
values
1‒7 Thousand's
digit
(VDI4)
corresponds
to
the
digital
setting
0,
1
(same
as
VDI1)
of
A0-03.
Ten
thousand's
digit
(VDI5)
Torque
digital
setting
in

A0-03 -200.0%‒200.0% 150.0% ☆ 0,
1
(same
as
VDI1)
torque
control
Function
selection
for
AI1

Forward
maximum 0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency
A1-07 0‒59 0 ★
A0-05 50.00
Hz ☆ used
as
DI
frequency
in
torque
control (F0-10)
Function
selection
for
AI2

Reverse
maximum A1-08 0‒59 0 ★
0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency
used
as
DI
A0-06 50.00
Hz ☆
frequency
in
torque
control (F0-10) Function
selection
for
AI3

A1-09 0‒59 0 ★
Acceleration
time
in
torque
used
as
DI
A0-07 0.00‒65000s 0.00s ☆
control Unit's
digit
(AI1)
Deceleration
time
in
torque
0:
High
level
valid
A0-08 0.00‒65000s 0.00s ☆
control
1:
Low
level
valid
Group
A1:
Virtual
DI
(VDI)/Virtual
DO
(VDO) State
selection
for
AI
used

A1-10 Ten's
digit
(AI2) 000 ★
A1-00 VDI1
function
selection 0‒59 0 ★ as
DI
0,
1
(same
as
unit's
digit)
A1-01 VDI2
function
selection 0‒59 0 ★
Hundred's
digit
(AI3)
A1-02 VDI3
function
selection 0‒59 0 ★
0,
1
(same
as
unit's
digit)
A1-03 VDI4
function
selection 0‒59 0 ★

- 58- -59-





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function
Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property
Code Code

0:
Short
with
physical
DIx
Group
A2:
Motor
2
Parameters
internally 0:
Common
asynchronous
motor
A1-11 VDO1
function
selection 0 ☆
1‒40:
Refer
to
function
selection
1:
Variable
frequency

of
physical
DO
in
group
F5. A2-00 Motor
type
selection asynchronous
motor 0 ★
0:
Short
with
physical
DIx
2:
Permanent
magnetic

internally synchronous
motor
A1-12 VDO2
function
selection 0 ☆
1‒40:
Refer
to
function
selection
Model

of
physical
DO
in
group
F5. A2-01 Rated
motor
power 0.1‒1000.0
kW ★
dependent
0:
Short
with
physical
Dix
Model

internally A2-02 Rated
motor
voltage 1‒2000
V ★
dependent
A1-13 VDO3

function
selection 0 ☆
1‒40:
Refer
to
function
selection
0.01‒655.35
A
(AC
drive
power
≤

of
physical
DO
in
group
F5. 55
kW) Model

A2-03 Rated
motor
current ★
0:
Short
with
physical
Dix
0.1‒6553.5
A
(AC
drive
power
>
dependent
internally 55
kW)
A1-14 VDO4
function
selection 0 ☆
1‒40:
Refer
to
function
selection
Model

of
physical
DO
in
group
F5. A2-04 Rated
motor
frequency 0.01
Hz
to
maximum
frequency ★
dependent
0:
Short
with
physical
Dix
Rated
motor
rotational
Model

internally A2-05 1‒65535
RPM ★
A1-15 VDO5
function
selection 0 ☆ speed dependent
1‒40:
Refer
to
function
selection

0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power

of
physical
DO
in
group
F5.
Stator
resistance
≤
55
kW) Model

A1-16 VDO1
output
delay 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s ☆ A2-06 ★
(asynchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
dependent
A1-17 VDO2
output
delay 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s ☆ power
>
55
kW)
A1-18 VDO3
output
delay 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s ☆ 0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power

Rotor
resistance
≤
55
kW) Model

A1-19 VDO4
output
delay 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s ☆ A2-07 ★
(asynchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
dependent
A1-20 VDO5
output
delay 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s ☆ power
>
55
kW)
Unit's
digit
(VDO1) 0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power

0:
Positive
logic Leakage
inductive
reactance
≤
55
kW) Model

A2-08 ★
1:
Reverse
logic (asynchronous
motor) 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
dependent
power
>
55
kW)
Ten's
digit
(VDO2)
0.1‒6553.5
mH
(AC
drive
power

0,
1
(same
as
unit's
digit)
Mutual
inductive
reactance
≤
55
kW) Model

A2-09 ★
A1-21 VDO
state
selection Hundred's
digit
(VDO3) 00000 ☆ (asynchronous
motor) 0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power
dependent
0,
1
(same
as
unit's
digit) >
55
kW)

Thousand's
digit
(VDO4) 0.01
A
to
A2-03
(AC
drive
power

No-load
current
≤
55
kW) Model

0,
1
(same
as
unit's
digit) A2-10 ★
(asynchronous
motor) 0.1
A
to
A2-03
(AC
drive
power
>
dependent
Ten
thousand's
digit
(VDO5) 55
kW)
0,
1
(same
as
unit's
digit) 0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power

Stator
resistance
≤
55
kW) Model

A2-16 ★
(synchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
dependent
power
>
55
kW)

- 60- -61-





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Function

Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code
0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power

A2-42 Speed
loop
integral
time
2 0.01‒10.00s 1.00s ☆
Shaft
D
inductance
≤
55
kW) Model

A2-17 ★ A2-40
to
maximum
output

(synchronous
motor) 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
dependent A2-43 Switchover
frequency
2 10.00
Hz ☆
power
>
55
kW) frequency

0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power
A2-44 Vector
control
slip
gain 50%‒200% 100% ☆

Shaft
Q
inductance
≤
55
kW) Model
Time
constant
of
speed
loop

A2-18 ★ A2-45 0.000‒0.100s 0.000s ☆
(synchronous
motor) 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
dependent filter
power
>
55
kW) Vector
control
over-
A2-46 0‒200 64 ☆
Back
EMF
(synchronous
Model
excitation
gain
A2-20 0.1‒6553.5
V ★
motor) dependent 0:
A2-48
Encoder
pulses
per
1:
AI1
A2-27 1‒65535 1024 ★
revolution 2:
AI2
0:
ABZ
incremental
encoder
Torque
upper
limit
source
in
3:
AI3
1:
UVW
incremental
encoder A2-47 0 ☆
speed
control
mode 4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5)
A2-28 Encoder
type 2:
Resolver 0 ★ 5:
Via
communication
3:
SIN/COS
encoder 6:
MIN(AI1,AI2)
4:
Wire-saving
UVW
encoder 7:
MIN(AI1,AI2)
A,
B
phase
sequence
of
ABZ
0:
Forward Digital
setting
of
torque

A2-30 0 ★
incremental
encoder 1:
Reserve A2-48 upper
limit
in
speed
control
0.0%‒200.0% 150.0% ☆
mode
A2-31 Encoder
installation
angle 0.0°‒359.9° 0.0° ★
Excitation
adjustment

U,
V,
W
phase
sequence
of
0:
Forward A2-51 0‒20000 2000 ☆
A2-32 0 ★ proportional
gain
UVW
encoder 1:
Reverse
Excitation
adjustment

A2-33 UVW
encoder
angle
offset 0.0°‒359.9° 0.0° ★ A2-52 0‒20000 1300 ☆
integral
gain
Number
of
pole
pairs
of
Torque
adjustment

A2-34 1‒65535 1 ★ A2-53 0‒20000 2000 ☆
resolver proportional
gain
Encoder
wire-break
fault
0.0s:
No
action Torque
adjustment
integral

A2-36 0.0s ★ A2-54 0‒20000 1300 ☆
detection
time 0.1‒10.0s gain
0:
No
auto-tuning Unit's
digit:
Integral
separated
1:
Asynchronous
motor
static
A2-55 Speed
loop
integral
property 0:
Disabled 0 ☆
auto-tuning 1:
Enabled
2:
Asynchronous
motor
complete
0:
No
field
weakening
A2-37 Auto-tuning
selection auto-tuning 0 ★ Field
weakening
mode
of

A2-56 1:
Direct
calculation 0 ☆
synchronous
motor
11:
Synchronous
motor
with-load
2:
Adjustment
auto-tuning
Field
weakening
degree
of

12:
Synchronous
motor
no-load
A2-57 50%‒500% 100% ☆
synchronous
motor
auto-tuning
Maximum
field
weakening

Speed
loop
proportional
gain
A2-58 1%‒300% 50% ☆
A2-38 0‒100 30 ☆ current
1
Field
weakening
automatic

A2-39 Speed
loop
integral
time
1 0.01‒10.00s 0.50s ☆ A2-59 adjustment
gain 10%‒500% 100% ☆
A2-40 Switchover
frequency
1 0.00
to
A2-43 5.00
Hz ☆ Field
weakening
integral

A2-60 multiple 2‒10 2 ☆
A2-41 Speed
loop
proportional
gain
2 0‒100 15 ☆

- 62- -63-





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code
0:
Sensorless
flux
vector
control
0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power

(SFVC
) Leakage
inductive
reactance
≤
55
kW) Model

A3-08 ★
1:
Closed-loop
vector
control
(asynchronous
motor) 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
dependent
A2-61 Motor
2
control
mode 0 ☆
(CLVC) power
>
55
kW)
2:
Voltage/Frequency
(V/F)
0.1‒6553.5
mH
(AC
drive
power

control Mutual
inductive
reactance
≤
55
kW) Model

A3-09 ★
0:
Same
as
motor
1 (asynchronous
motor) 0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power
dependent
1:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
1 >
55
kW)
Motor
2
acceleration/ 0.01
A
to
A2-03
(AC
drive
power

A2-62 2:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
2 0 ☆
deceleration
time ≤
55
kW)
3:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
3 No-load
current
Model

A3-10 ★
(asynchronous
motor) 0.1
A
to
A2-03
(AC
drive
power
>
dependent
4:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
4
55
kW)
0.0%:
Automatic
torque
boost Model

A2-63 Motor
2
torque
boost ☆ 0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power

0.1%‒30.0% dependent
Stator
resistance
≤
55
kW) Model

A3-16 ★
Motor
2
oscillation
Model
(synchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
dependent
A2-65 0‒100 ☆
suppression
gain dependent power
>
55
kW)
Group
A3:
Motor
3
Parameters 0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power

0:
Common
asynchronous
motor Shaft
D
inductance
≤
55
kW) Model

A3-17 ★
(synchronous
motor) 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
dependent
1:
Variable
frequency

A3-00 Motor
type
selection asynchronous
motor 0 ★ power
>
55
kW)
2:
Permanent
magnetic
0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power

synchronous
motor Shaft
Q
inductance
≤
55
kW) Model

A3-18 ★
(synchronous
motor) 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
dependent
Model

A3-01 Rated
motor
power 0.1‒1000.0
kW ★ power
>
55
kW)
dependent
Model
Back
EMF
(synchronous
Model

A3-02 Rated
motor
voltage 1‒2000
V ★ A3-20 0.1‒6553.5
V ★
dependent motor) dependent

0.01‒655.35
A
(AC
drive
power
≤
Encoder
pulses
per

A3-27 1‒65535 1024 ★
55
kW) revolution
Model

A3-03 Rated
motor
current ★
0.1‒6553.5
A
(AC
drive
power
>
dependent 0:
ABZ
incremental
encoder
55
kW) 1:
UVW
incremental
encoder
Model
A3-28 Encoder
type 2:
Resolver 0 ★
A3-04 Rated
motor
frequency 0.01
Hz
to
maximum
frequency ★
dependent 3:
SIN/COS
encoder
Rated
motor
rotational
Model
4:
Wire-saving
UVW
encoder
A3-05 1‒65535
RPM ★
speed dependent
A,
B
phase
sequence
of
ABZ
0:
Forward
0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power
A3-30 0 ★
incremental
encoder 1:
Reserve
Stator
resistance
≤
55
kW) Model

A3-06 ★ A3-31 Encoder
installation
angle 0.0°‒359.9° 0.0° ★
(asynchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
dependent
power
>
55
kW) U,
V,
W
phase
sequence
of
0:
Forward
A3-32 0 ★
0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power
UVW
encoder 1:
Reverse
Rotor
resistance
≤
55
kW) Model

A3-07 ★ A3-33 UVW
encoder
angle
offset 0.0°‒359.9° 0.0° ★
(asynchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
dependent
power
>
55
kW)

- 64- -65-





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code
Number
of
pole
pairs
of
Torque
adjustment

A3-34 1‒65535 1 ★ A3-53 0‒20000 2000 ☆
resolver proportional
gain

Encoder
wire-break
fault
0.0s:
No
action Torque
adjustment
integral

A3-36 0.0s ★ A3-54 0‒20000 1300 ☆
detection
time gain
0.1‒10.0s
Unit's
digit:
Integral
separated
0:
No
auto-tuning
A3-55 Speed
loop
integral
property 0:
Disabled 0 ☆
1:
Asynchronous
motor
static

auto-tuning 1:
Enabled
2:
Asynchronous
motor
complete
0:
No
field
weakening
A3-37 Auto-tuning
selection auto-tuning 0 ★ Field
weakening
mode
of

A3-56 1:
Direct
calculation 0 ☆
synchronous
motor
11:
Synchronous
motor
with-load
2:
Adjustment
auto-tuning
Field
weakening
degree
of

12:
Synchronous
motor
no-load
A3-57 50%‒500% 100% ☆
synchronous
motor
auto-tuning
Maximum
field
weakening

A3-38 Speed
loop
proportional
gain
1 0‒100 30 ☆ A3-58 1%‒300% 50% ☆
current
A3-39 Speed
loop
integral
time
1 0.01‒10.00s 0.50s ☆
Field
weakening
automatic

A3-59 10%‒500% 100% ☆
A3-40 Switchover
frequency
1 0.00
to
A2-43 5.00
Hz ☆ adjustment
gain
A3-41 Speed
loop
proportional
gain
2 0‒100 15 ☆ Field
weakening
integral

A3-60 2‒10 2 ☆
multiple
A3-42 Speed
loop
integral
time
2 0.01‒10.00s 1.00s ☆
0:
Sensorless
flux
vector
control

A2-40
to
maximum
output

A3-43 Switchover
frequency
2 10.00
Hz ☆ (SFVC
)
frequency
1:
Closed-loop
vector
control

A3-44 Vector
control
slip
gain 50%‒200% 100% ☆ A3-61 Motor
2
control
mode 0 ☆
(CLVC)
Time
constant
of
speed
loop
2:
Voltage/Frequency
(V/F)

A3-45 0.000‒0.100s 0.000s ☆
filter control
Vector
control
over- 0:
Same
as
motor
1
A3-46 0‒200 64 ☆
excitation
gain
1:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
1
0:
A2-48 Motor
2
acceleration/
A3-62 2:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
2 0 ☆
deceleration
time
1:
AI1 3:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
3
2:
AI2 4:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
4
Torque
upper
limit
source
in
3:
AI3 0.0%:
Automatic
torque
boost Model

A3-47 0 ☆ A3-63 Motor
2
torque
boost ☆
speed
control
mode 4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5) dependent
0.1%‒30.0%
5:
Via
communication
Motor
2
oscillation
Model

6:
MIN
(AI1,AI2) A3-65 0‒100 ☆
suppression
gain dependent
7:
MAX
(AI1,AI2) Group
A4:
Motor
4
Parameters
Digital
setting
of
torque
0:
Common
asynchronous
motor
A3-48 upper
limit
in
speed
control
0.0%‒200.0% 150.0% ☆
mode 1:
Variable
frequency

A4-00 Motor
type
selection asynchronous
motor 0 ★
Excitation
adjustment

A3-51 0‒20000 2000 ☆ 2:
Permanent
magnetic

proportional
gain
synchronous
motor
Excitation
adjustment

A3-52 0‒20000 1300 ☆ Model

integral
gain A4-01 Rated
motor
power 0.1‒1000.0
kW ★
dependent

- 66- -67-





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code
Model
Back
EMF
(synchronous
Model

A4-02 Rated
motor
voltage 1‒2000
V ★ A4-20 0.1‒6553.5
V ★
dependent motor) dependent
0.01‒655.35
A
(AC
drive
power
≤
Encoder
pulses
per

A4-27 1‒65535 1024 ★
55
kW) Model
revolution
A4-03 Rated
motor
current ★
0.1‒6553.5
A
(AC
drive
power
>
dependent 0:
ABZ
incremental
encoder
55
kW) 1:
UVW
incremental
encoder
Model
A4-28 Encoder
type 2:
Resolver 0 ★
A4-04 Rated
motor
frequency 0.01
Hz
to
maximum
frequency ★
dependent
3:
SIN/COS
encoder
Rated
motor
rotational
Model

A4-05 1‒65535
RPM ★ 4:
Wire-saving
UVW
encoder
speed dependent
0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power
A,
B
phase
sequence
of
ABZ
0:
Forward
A4-30 0 ★
≤
55
kW) incremental
encoder 1:
Reserve
Stator
resistance
Model

A4-06 ★
(asynchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
dependent A4-31 Encoder
installation
angle 0.0°‒359.9° 0.0° ★
power
>
55
kW) 0:
Forward
U,
V,
W
phase
sequence
of

A4-32 0 ★
0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power
UVW
encoder 1:
Reverse
Rotor
resistance
≤
55
kW) Model

A4-07 ★ A4-33 UVW
encoder
angle
offset 0.0°‒359.9° 0.0° ★
(asynchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
dependent
power
>
55
kW) Number
of
pole
pairs
of

A4-34 1‒65535 1 ★
resolver
0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power

Leakage
inductive
reactance
≤
55
kW) Model
Encoder
wire-break
fault
0.0s:
No
action
A4-08 ★ A4-36 0.0s ★
(asynchronous
motor) 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
dependent detection
time 0.1‒10.0s
power
>
55
kW) 0:
No
auto-tuning
0.1‒6553.5
mH
(AC
drive
power
1:
Asynchronous
motor
static

Mutual
inductive
reactance
≤
55
kW) Model
auto-tuning
A4-09 ★
(asynchronous
motor) 0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power
dependent 2:
Asynchronous
motor
complete

>
55
kW) A4-37 Auto-tuning
selection auto-tuning 0 ★
0.01
A
to
A2-03
(AC
drive
power
11:
Synchronous
motor
with-load

No-load
current
≤
55
kW) Model
auto-tuning
A4-10 ★
(asynchronous
motor) 0.1
A
to
A2-03
(AC
drive
power
>
dependent 12:
Synchronous
motor
no-load

55
kW) auto-tuning
0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power
A4-38 Speed
loop
proportional
gain
1 0‒100 30 ☆
Stator
resistance
≤
55
kW) Model

A4-16 ★ A4-39 Speed
loop
integral
time
1 0.01‒10.00s 0.50s ☆
(synchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
dependent
power
>
55
kW) A4-40 Switchover
frequency
1 0.00
to
A2-43 5.00
Hz ☆

0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power
A4-41 Speed
loop
proportional
gain
2 0‒100 15 ☆

Shaft
D
inductance
≤
55
kW) Model

A4-17 ★ A4-42 Speed
loop
integral
time
2 0.01‒10.00s 1.00s ☆
(synchronous
motor) 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
dependent
power
>
55
kW) A2-40
to
maximum
output

A4-43 Switchover
frequency
2 10.00
Hz ☆
0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power
frequency
Shaft
Q
inductance
≤
55
kW) Model
A4-44 Vector
control
slip
gain 50%‒200% 100% ☆
A4-18 ★
(synchronous
motor) 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
dependent
Time
constant
of
speed
loop

power
>
55
kW) A4-45 0.000‒0.100s 0.000s ☆
filter

- 68 - - 69-





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code
Vector
control
over- 0:
Same
as
motor
1
A4-46 0‒200 64 ☆
excitation
gain 1:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
1
0:
A2-48 Motor
2
acceleration/
A4-62 2:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
2 0 ☆
deceleration
time
1:
AI1 3:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
3
2:
AI2 4:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
4
Torque
upper
limit
source
in
3:
AI3 0.0%:
Automatic
torque
boost Model

A4-47 0 ☆ A4-63 Motor
2
torque
boost ☆
speed
control
mode 4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5) 0.1%‒30.0% dependent
5:
Via
communication Motor
2
oscillation
Model

A4-65 0‒100 ☆
6:
MIN(AI1,AI2) suppression
gain dependent
7:
MIN(AI1,AI2) Group
A5:
Control
Optimization
Parameters
Digital
setting
of
torque
DPWM
switchover
frequency

A4-48 upper
limit
in
speed
control
0.0%‒200.0% 150.0% ☆ A5-00 0.00‒15.00
Hz 12.00
Hz ☆
upper
limit
mode
0:
Asynchronous
modulation
Excitation
adjustment
A5-01 PWM
modulation
mode 0 ☆
A4-51 0‒20000 2000 ☆ 1:
Synchronous
modulation
proportional
gain
0:
No
compensation
Excitation
adjustment
Dead
zone
compensation

A4-52 0‒20000 1300 ☆ A5-02 1:
Compensation
mode
1 1 ☆
integral
gain mode
selection
Torque
adjustment
2:
Compensation
mode
2
A4-53 0‒20000 2000 ☆
proportional
gain 0:
Random
PWM
invalid
A5-03 Random
PWM
depth 0 ☆
Torque
adjustment
integral
1‒10
A4-54 0‒20000 1300 ☆
gain
A5-04 Rapid
current
limit 0:
Disabled1:
Enabled 1 ☆
Unit's
digit:
Integral
separated
Current
detection

A4-55 Speed
loop
integral
property 0:
Disabled 0 ☆ A5-05 0‒100 5 ☆
compensation
1:
Enabled A5-06 Undervoltage
threshold 60.0%‒140.0% 100.0% ☆
0:
No
field
weakening 0:
No
optimization
Field
weakening
mode
of
SFVC
optimization
mode

A4-56 1:
Direct
calculation 0 ☆ A5-07 1:
Optimization
mode
1 1 ☆
synchronous
motor selection
2:
Adjustment 2:
Optimization
mode
2
Field
weakening
degree
of
A5-08 Dead-zone
time
adjustment 100%‒200% 150% ☆
A4-57 50%‒500% 100% ☆
synchronous
motor
A5-09 Overvoltage
threshold 200.0‒2500.0
V 2000.0
V ☆
Maximum
field
weakening

A4-58 1%‒300% 50% ☆ Group
A6:
AI
Curve
Setting
current
Field
weakening
automatic
A6-00 AI
curve
4
minimum
input -10.00
V
to
A6-02 0.00
V ☆
A4-59 10%‒500% 100% ☆
adjustment
gain Corresponding
setting
of
AI

A6-01 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
Field
weakening
integral
curve
4
minimum
input
A4-60 2‒10 2 ☆
multiple A6-02 AI
curve
4
inflexion
1
input A6-00
to
A6-04 3.00
V ☆
0:
Sensorless
flux
vector
control
Corresponding
setting
of
AI

(SFVC
) A6-03 -100.0%‒100.0% 30.0% ☆
curve
4
inflexion
1
input
1:
Closed-loop
vector
control
A6-04 AI
curve
4
inflexion
1
input A6-02
to
A6-06 6.00
V ☆
A4-61 Motor
2
control
mode 0 ☆
(CLVC) Corresponding
setting
of
AI

A6-05 curve
4
inflexion
1
input -100.0%‒100.0% 60.0% ☆
2:
Voltage/Frequency
(V/F)

control A6-06 AI
curve
4
maximum
input A6-06
to
10.00
V 10.00
V ☆

- 70- - 71-





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Function

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Code Code
Corresponding
setting
of
AI
Unit's
digit:
FMR
(FM
used
as

A6-07 -100.0%‒100.0% 100.0% ☆
curve
4
maximum
input digital
output)
A6-08 AI
curve
5
minimum
input -10.00
V
to
A6-10 0.00
V ☆ 0:
Controlled
by
the
AC
drive
Corresponding
setting
of
AI
1:
Controlled
by
the
user

A6-09 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆ programmable
card
curve
5
minimum
input
A6-10 AI
curve
5
inflexion
1
input A6-08
to
A6-12 3.00
V ☆ Ten's
digit:
relay
(T/A-T/B-T/C)
Corresponding
setting
of
AI
Selection
of
control
mode
of
Same
as
unit's
digit
A6-11 -100.0%‒100.0% 30.0% ☆ A7-01 the
output
terminals
on
the
0 ★
curve
5
inflexion
1
input Hundred's
digit:
DO1
control
board
A6-12 AI
curve
5
inflexion
1
input A6-10
to
A6-14 6.00
V ☆ Same
as
unit's
digit
Corresponding
setting
of
AI
Thousand's
digit
FMR
(FM
used

A6-13 -100.0%‒100.0% 60.0% ☆
curve
5
inflexion
1
input as
pulse
output)
A6-14 AI
curve
5
maximum
input A6-14
to
10.00
V 10.00
V ☆ Same
as
unit's
digit
Corresponding
setting
of
AI
Ten
thousand's
digit:
AO1
A6-15 -100.0%‒100.0% 100.0% ☆
curve
5
maximum
input
Same
as
unit's
digit
Jump
point
of
AI1
input

A6-16 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆ 0:
AI3
(voltage
input),
AO2

corresponding
setting
(voltage
output)
Jump
amplitude
of
AI1
input

A6-17 0.0%‒100.0% 0.5% ☆ 1:
AI3
(voltage
input),
AO2

corresponding
setting
(current
output)
Jump
point
of
AI2
input

A6-18 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆ 2:
AI3
(current
input),
AO2

corresponding
setting
(voltage
output)
Jump
amplitude
of
AI2
input
3:
AI3
(current
input),
AO2

A6-19 0.0%‒100.0% 0.5% ☆
corresponding
setting
AI/AO
function
selection
of
(current
output)
A7-02 0 ★
Jump
point
of
AI3
input
the
user
programmable
card 4:
AI3
(PTC
input),
AO2
(voltage

A6-20 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
corresponding
setting output)
Jump
amplitude
of
AI3
input
5:
AI3
(PTC
input),
AO2
(current

A6-21 0.0%‒100.0% 0.5% ☆
corresponding
setting output)
Group
A7:
User
Programmable
Function 6:
AI3
(PTC100
input),
AO2

(voltage
output)
User
programmable
function
0:
Disabled
A7-00 0 ★ 7:
AI3
(PTC100
input),
AO2

selection 1:
Enabled
(current
output)
A7-03 FMP
output 0.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
A7-04 AO1
output 0.0%‒100.0% 0.0% ☆
Binary
setting
Unit's
digit:
FMR
A7-05 Digital
output 1 ☆
Ten's
digit:
Relay1
Hundred's
digit:
DO
Frequency
setting
through

A7-06 -100.00%
to
100.00% 0.0% ☆
the
user
programmable
card
Torque
setting
through
the

A7-07 -200.00%
to
200.00% 0.0% ☆
user
programmable
card

- 72- -73-





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function

Function
Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property
Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Code
Code
Factory

1:
Forward
RUN AC-03 AI1
displayed
voltage
2 6.000‒9.999
V ☆
corrected
2:
Reverse
RUN
Factory

3:
Forward
JOG AC-04 AI2
measured
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V ☆
corrected
Command
given
by
the
user

A7-08 4:
Reverse
JOG 0 ☆
programmable
card Factory

5:
Coast
to
stop AC-05 AI2
displayed
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V ☆
corrected
6:
Decelerate
to
stop Factory

AC-06 AI2
measured
voltage
2 6.000‒9.999
V ☆
7:
Fault
reset corrected
Faults
given
by
the
user
0:
No
fault Factory

A7-09 0 ☆ AC-07 AI2
displayed
voltage
2 9.999‒10.000
V ☆
programmable
card 80‒89:
Fault
codes corrected

Group
A8:
Point-point
Communication Factory

AC-08 AI3
measured
voltage
1 9.999‒10.000
V ☆
corrected
Point-point
communication
0:
Disabled
A8-00 0 ☆ Factory

selection 1:
Enabled AC-09 AI3
displayed
voltage
1 9.999‒10.000
V ☆
corrected
0:
Master Factory

A8-01 Master
and
slave
selection 0 ☆ AC-10 AI3
measured
voltage
2 9.999‒10.000
V ☆
1:
Slave corrected
0:
Slave
not
following

running
Factory

commands
of
the
master AC-11 AI3
displayed
voltage
2 9.999‒10.000
V ☆
Slave
following
master
corrected
A8-02 0 ☆
command
selection 1:
Slave
following
running
Factory

commands
of
the
master AC-12 AO1
target
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V ☆
corrected
Usage
of
data
received
by
0:
Torque
setting1:
Frequency
Factory

A8-03 0 ☆ AC-13 AO1
measured
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V ☆
slave setting corrected
Zero
offset
of
received
data
Factory

A8-04 -100.00%‒100.00% 0.00% ★ AC-14 AO1
target
voltage
2 6.000‒9.999
V ☆
(torque) corrected
Gain
of
received
data
Factory

A8-05 -10.00‒10.00 1.00 ★ AC-15 AO1
measured
voltage
2 6.000‒9.999
V ☆
(torque) corrected
Point-point
communication
Factory

A8-06 0.0‒10.0s 1.0s ☆ AC-16 AO2
target
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V ☆
interruption
detection
time corrected
A8-07 Master
data
sending
cycle 0.001‒10.000s 0.001s ☆ Factory

AC-17 AO2
measured
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V ☆
Zero
offset
of
received
data
corrected
A8-08 -100.00%‒100.00% 0.00% ★
zero
offset
(frequency) Factory

AC-18 AO2
target
voltage
2 6.000‒9.999
V ☆
Gain
of
received
data
gain
corrected
A8-09 -10.00‒10.00 1.00 ★
(frequency) Factory

AC-19 AO2
measured
voltage
2 6.000‒9.999
V ☆
Runaway
prevention
corrected
A8-10 0.00%‒100.00% 10.00% ★
coefficient Factory

AC-20 AI2
measured
current
1 0.000‒20.000
mA ☆
Group
AC:
AI/AO
Correction corrected

Factory
Factory

AC-00 AI1
measured
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V ☆ AC-21 AI2
sampling
current
1 0.000‒20.000
mA ☆
corrected corrected

Factory
Factory

AC-01 AI1
displayed
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V ☆ AC-22 AI2
measured
current
2 0.000‒20.000
mA ☆
corrected corrected

Factory
Factory

AC-02 AI1
measured
voltage
2 6.000‒9.999
V ☆ AC-23 AI2
sampling
current
2 0.000‒20.000
mA ☆
corrected corrected

- 74- -75 -





C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

















































































E4
User
Manual






E4
User
Manual

















































































C hapter
4
Function
Code
Table

Function
Communication

Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Property Function
Code Parameter
Name Min.
Unit
Code Address
Factory
Group
U0:
Standard
Monitoring
Parameters
AC-24 AO1
ideal
current
1 0.000‒20.000
mA ☆
corrected
U0-23 AI3
voltage
before
correction 0.001
V 7017H
Factory

AC-25 AO1
sampling
current
1 0.000‒20.000
mA ☆ U0-24 Linear
speed 1
m/Min 7018H
corrected
U0-25 Accumulative
power-on
time 1
Min 7019
Factory

AC-26 AO1
ideal
current
2 0.000‒20.000
mA ☆
corrected U0-26 Accumulative
running
time 0.1
Min 701AH
Factory
U0-27 Pulse
input
frequency 1
Hz 701BH
AC-27 AO1
sampling
current
2 0.000‒20.000
mA ☆
corrected
U0-28 Communication
setting
value
0.01% 701CH
U0-29 Encoder
feedback
speed 0.01
Hz 701DH
4.2
Monitoring
Parameters
U0-30 Main
frequency
X 0.01
Hz 701EH
Communication
U0-31 Auxiliary
frequency
Y 0.01
Hz 701FH
Function
Code Parameter
Name Min.
Unit
Address
U0-32 Viewing
any
register
address
value 1 7020H
Group
U0:
Standard
Monitoring
Parameters
U0-33 Synchronous
motor
rotor
position 0.1° 7021H
U0-00 Running
frequency
(Hz) 0.01
Hz 7000H
U0-34 Motor
temperature 1°C 7022H
U0-01 Set
frequency
(Hz) 0.01
Hz 7001H
U0-35 Target
torque 0.1% 7023H
U0-02 Bus
voltage 0.1
V 7002H
U0-36 Resolver
position 1 7024H
U0-03 Output
voltage 1
V 7003H
U0-37 Power
factor
angle 0.1° 7025H
U0-04 Output
current 0.01
A 7004H
U0-38 ABZ
position 1 7026H
U0-05 Output
power 0.1
kW 7005H
U0-39 Target
voltage
upon
V/F
separation 1
V 7027H
U0-06 Output
torque 0.1% 7006H
U0-40 Output
voltage
upon
V/F
separation 1V
7028H
U0-07 DI
state 1 7007H
U0-41 DI
state
visual
display 1 7029H
U0-08 DO
state 1 7008H
U0-42 DO
state
visual
display 1 702AH
U0-09 AI1
voltage
(V) 0.01
V 7009H
U0-43 DI
function
state
visual
display
1 1 702BH
U0-10 AI2
voltage
(V)/current
(mA) 0.01
V/0.01
mA 700AH
U0-44 DI
function
state
visual
display
2 1 702CH
U0-11 AI3
voltage
(V) 0.01
V 7007BH
U0-45 Fault
information 1 702DH
U0-12 Count
value 1 700CH
U0-58 Phase
Z
counting 1 703AH
U0-13 Length
value 1 700DH
U0-59 Current
set
frequency 0.01% 703BH
U0-14 Load
speed 1 700EH
U0-60 Current
running
frequency 0.01% 703CH
U0-15 PID
setting 1 700FH
U0-61 AC
drive
running
state 1 703DH
U0-16 PID
feedback 1 7010H
U0-62 Current
fault
code 1 703EH
U0-17 PLC
stage 1 7011H
Sent
value
of
point-point

U0-18 Input
pulse
frequency
(Hz) 0.01
kHz 7012H U0-63 0.01% 703FH
communication
U0-19 Feedback
speed 0.01
Hz 7013H Received
value
of
point-point

U0-64 0.01% 7040H
U0-20 Remaining
running
time 0.1
Min 7014H communication
U0-21 AI1
voltage
before
correction 0.001
V 7015H U0-65 Torque
upper
limit 0.1% 7041H
AI2
voltage
(V)/current
(mA)
before

U0-22 0.01
V/0.01
mA 7016H
correction

- 76- -77-
Chapter 4 Function Code Table E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Chapter
5
Description
of
Function
Codes

Group
F0:
Basic
Parameters
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
1:
G
type
(constant
torque
load)
Model

F0-00 G/P
type
display 2:
P
type
(variable
torque
load
e.g.
fan
dependent
and
pump)

This
parameter
is
used
to
display
the
delivered
model
and
cannot
be
modified.
•
1:
Applicable
to
constant
torque
load
with
rated
parameters
specified
•
2:
Applicable
to
variable
torque
load
(fan
and
pump)
with
rated
parameters
specified

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

0:
Sensorless
flux
vector
control
(SFVC)
Motor
1
control

F0-01 1:
Closed-loop
vector
control
(CLVC) 0
mode
2:
Voltage/Frequency
(V/F)
control

•
0:
Sensorless
flux
vector
control
(SFVC)
It
indicates
open-loop
vector
control,
and
is
applicable
to
high-performance
control

applications
such
as
machine
tool,
centrifuge,
wire
drawing
machine
and
injection

moulding
machine.
One
AC
drive
can
operate
only
one
motor.
•
1:
Closed-loop
vector
control
(CLVC)
It
is
applicable
to
high-accuracy
speed
control
or
torque
control
applications
such
as

high-speed
paper
making
machine,
crane
and
elevator.
One
AC
drive
can
operate
only

one
motor.
An
encoder
must
be
installed
at
the
motor
side,
and
a
PG
card
matching
the

encoder
must
be
installed
at
the
AC
drive
side.

•
2:
Voltage/Frequency
(V/F)
control
It
is
applicable
to
applications
with
low
load
requirements
or
applications
where
one
AC

drive
operates
multiple
motors,
such
as
fan
and
pump.

Note

•
If
vector
control
is
used,
motor
auto-tuning
must
be
performed
because
the
advantages

of
vector
control
can
only
be
utilized
after
correct
motor
parameters
are
obtained.
Better

performance
can
be
achieved
by
adjusting
speed
regulator
parameters
in
group
F2
(or
groups

A2,
A3,
and
A4
respectively
for
motor
2,
3,
and
4).
•
For
the
permanent
magnetic
synchronous
motor
(PMSM),
the
E4
does
not
support
SFVC.

CLVC
is
used
generally.
In
some
low-power
motor
applications,
you
can
also
use
V/F.

- 78- - 79 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

It
is
used
to
select
the
setting
channel
of
the
main
frequency.
You
can
set
the
main

frequency
in
the
following
10
channels:
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
• 0:
Digital
setting
(non-retentive
at
power
failure)
0:
Operation
panel
control
(LED
off)
Command
The
initial
value
of
the
set
frequency
is
the
value
of
F0-08
(Preset
frequency).
You
can

F0-02 1:
Terminal
control
(LED
on) 0
source
selection
2: Communication control (LED blinking) change
the
set
frequency
by
pressing

and

on
the
operation
panel
(or
using

the
UP/DOWN
function
of
input
terminals).
It
is
used
to
determine
the
input
channel
of
the
AC
drive
control
commands,
such
as
run,

stop,
forward
rotation,
reverse
rotation
and
jog
operation.
You
can
input
the
commands
in
When
the
AC
drive
is
powered
on
again
after
power
failure,
the
set
frequency
reverts
to

the
following
three
channels: the
value
of
F0-08.
•
0:
Operation
panel
control
("LOCAL/REMOT"
indicator
off) • 1:
Digital
setting
(retentive
at
power
failure)
The
initial
value
of
the
set
frequency
is
the
value
of
F0-08
(Preset
frequency).
You
can

Commands
are
given
by
pressing
keys

and

on
the
operation
panel.
change
the
set
frequency
by
pressing
keys

and

on
the
operation
panel
(or

• 1:
Terminal
control
("LOCAL/REMOT"
indicator
on) using
the
UP/DOWN
function
of
input
terminals).
Commands
are
given
by
means
of
multifunctional
input
terminals
with
functions
such
When
the
AC
drive
is
powered
on
again
after
power
failure,
the
set
frequency
is
the

as
FWD,
REV,
JOGF,
and
JOGR. value
memorized
at
the
moment
of
the
last
power
failure.
• 2:
Communication
control
("LOCAL/REMOT"
indicator
blinking) Note
that
F0-23
(Retentive
of
digital
setting
frequency
upon
power
failure)
determines

Commands
are
given
from
host
computer.
If
this
parameter
is
set
to
2,
a
communication
whether
the
set
frequency
is
memorized
or
cleared
when
the
AC
drive
stops.
It
is

card
(Modbus
RTU,
PROFIBUS-DP
card,
CANlink
card,
user
programmable
card
or
related
to
stop
rather
than
power
failure.
CANopen
card)
must
be
installed. • 2:
AI1
(0‒10
V
voltage
input)
– If
a
PROFIBUS-DP
card
is
selected
and
PZD1
data
is
valid,
commands
are
given
• 3:
AI2
(0‒10
V
voltage
input
or
4‒20
mA
current
input,
determined
by
jumper
J8)
by
means
of
PZD1
data.
• 4:
AI3
(0‒10
V
voltage
input)
– If
a
user
programmable
card
is
selected,
commands
are
written
to
A7-08
by

means
of
the
programmable
card. The
frequency
is
set
by
analog
input.
The
E4
control
board
provides
two
analog

– If
any
other
card
is
selected,
commands
are
written
by
means
of
the
input
(AI)
terminals
(AI1,
AI2).
Another
AI
terminal
(AI3)
is
provided
by
the
I/O
extension

communication
address
0x2000.
card.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default The
E4
provides
five
curves
indicating
the
mapping
relationship
between
the
input

voltage
of
AI1,
AI2
and
AI3
and
the
target
frequency,
three
of
which
are
linear
(point-
0:
Digital
setting
(non-retentive
at
power

point)
correspondence
and
two
of
which
are
four-point
correspondence
curves.
You
can

failure)
set
the
curves
by
using
function
codes
F4-13
to
F4-27
and
function
codes
in
group
A6,

1:
Digital
setting
(retentive
at
power
failure) and
select
curves
for
AI1,
AI2
and
AI3
in
F4-33.
2:
AI1
When
AI
is
used
as
the
frequency
setting
source,
the
corresponding
value
100%
of
the

3:
AI2
voltage/current
input
corresponds
to
the
value
of
F0-10
(Maximum
frequency).
Main
frequency
4:
AI3
F0-03 0
source
X
selection • 5:
Pulse
setting
(DI5)
5:
Pulse
setting
(DI5)
6:
Multi-reference The
frequency
is
set
by
DI5
(high-speed
pulse).
The
signal
specification
of
pulse
setting

is
9‒30
V
(voltage
range)
and
0‒100
kHz
(frequency
range).
The
corresponding
value

7:
Simple
PLC 100%
of
pulse
setting
corresponds
to
the
value
of
F0-10
(Maximum
frequency).
8:
PID
• 6:
Multi-reference
9:
Communication
setting
In
multi-reference
mode,
combinations
of
different
DI
terminal
states
correspond
to

different
set
frequencies.
The
E4
supports
a
maximum
of
16
speeds
implemented

by
16
state
combinations
of
four
DI
terminals
(allocated
with
functions
12
to
15)

in
Group
FC.
The
multiple
references
indicate
percentages
of
the
value
of
F0-10

(Maximum
frequency).
- 80 - - 81 -
 Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

If
a
DI
terminal
is
used
for
the
multi-reference
function,
you
need
to
perform
related
0:
Digital
setting
(non-retentive
at
power

setting
in
group
F4. failure)
•
7:
Simple
PLC 1:
Digital
setting
(retentive
at
power
failure)
2:
AI1
When
the
simple
programmable
logic
controller
(PLC)
mode
is
used
as
the
frequency

source,
the
running
frequency
of
the
AC
drive
can
be
switched
over
among
the
16
3:
AI2
Auxiliary

frequency
references.
You
can
set
the
holding
time
and
acceleration/deceleration
time
F0-04 frequency
source
4:
AI3 0
of
the
16
frequency
references.
For
details,
refer
to
the
descriptions
of
Group
FC.
Y
selection 5:
Pulse
setting
(DI5)
•
8:
PID 6:
Multi-reference
7:
Simple
PLC
The
output
of
PID
control
is
used
as
the
running
frequency.
PID
control
is
generally

used
in
on-site
closed-loop
control,
such
as
constant
pressure
closed-loop
control
and
8:
PID
constant
tension
closed-loop
control.
9:
Communication
setting

When
applying
PID
as
the
frequency
source,
you
need
to
set
parameters
of
PID
When
used
as
an
independent
frequency
input
channel
(frequency
source
switched

function
in
group
FA. over
from
X
to
Y),
the
auxiliary
frequency
source
Y
is
used
in
the
same
way
as
the
main

•
9:
Communication
setting frequency
source
X
(refer
to
F0-03).

The
frequency
is
set
by
means
of
communication. When
the
auxiliary
frequency
source
is
used
for
operation
(frequency
source
is
"X
and
Y

operation"),
pay
attention
to
the
following
aspects:
If
the
AC
drive
is
a
slave
in
point-point
communication
and
receives
data
as
the

frequency
source,
data
transmitted
by
the
master
is
used
as
the
set
frequency.
For
1)
If
the
auxiliary
frequency
source
Y
is
digital
setting,
the
preset
frequency
(F0-08)
does

details,
see
the
description
of
group
A8. not
take
effect.
You
can
directly
adjust
the
set
main
frequency
by
pressing
keys

If
PROFIBUS-DP
communication
is
valid
and
PZD1
is
used
for
frequency
setting,

data
transmitted
by
PDZ1
is
directly
used
as
the
frequency
source.
The
data
format
is
and

on
the
operation
panel
(or
using
the
UP/DOWN
function
of
input
terminals).
-100.00%
to
100.00%.
100%
corresponds
to
the
value
of
F0-10
(Maximum
frequency).
2) If
the
auxiliary
frequency
source
is
analog
input
(AI1,
AI2
and
AI3)
or
pulse
setting,

In
other
conditions,
data
is
given
by
the
host
computer
through
the
communication
100%
of
the
input
corresponds
to
the
range
of
the
auxiliary
frequency
Y
(set
in
F0-05

address
0x1000.
The
data
format
is
-100.00%
to
100.00%.
100.00%
corresponds
to
the
and
F0-06).
value
of
F0-10
(Maximum
frequency).
3) If
the
auxiliary
frequency
source
is
pulse
setting,
it
is
similar
to
analog
input.
The
E4
supports
four
host
computer
communication
protocols:
Modbus,

PROFIBUS-DP,
CANopen
and
CANlink.
They
cannot
be
used
simultaneously. Note

If
the
communication
mode
is
used,
a
communication
card
must
be
installed.
The
The
main
frequency
source
X
and
auxiliary
frequency
source
Y
must
not
use
the
same
channel.

E4
provides
four
optional
communication
cards
and
you
can
select
one
based
That
is,
F0-03
and
F0-04
cannot
be
set
to
the
same
value.
on
actual
requirements.
If
the
communication
protocol
is
Modbus,
PROFIBUS-DP

or
CANopen,
the
corresponding
serial
communication
protocol
needs
to
be
selected

based
on
the
setting
of
F0-28. Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting Range Default
0:
Relative
to
maximum

The
CANlink
protocol
is
always
valid. Range
of
auxiliary
frequency
frequency
F0-05 0
Y
for
X
and
Y
operation
1:
Relative
to
main
frequency
X
Range
of
auxiliary
frequency

F0-06 0%‒150% 0
Y
for
X
and
Y
operation

If
X
and
Y
operation
is
used,
F0-05
and
F0-06
are
used
to
set
the
adjustment
range
of
the

auxiliary
frequency
source.
You
can
set
the
auxiliary
frequency
to
be
relative
to
either
maximum
frequency
or
main

frequency
X.
If
relative
to
main
frequency
X,
the
setting
range
of
the
auxiliary
frequency
Y

varies
according
to
the
main
frequency
X.
- 82 - - 83 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

Unit's
digit
(Frequency
source
selection) 0.00
to
maximum
frequency
(valid
when

F0-08 Preset
frequency 50
Hz
frequency
source
is
digital
setting)
0:
Main
frequency
source
X
1:
X
and
Y
operation If
the
frequency
source
is
digital
setting
or
terminal
UP/DOWN,
the
value
of
this
parameter

(operation
relationship
determined
by
ten's
is
the
initial
frequency
of
the
AC
drive
(digital
setting).
digit)
2:
Switchover
between
X
and
Y Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
3:
Switchover
between
X
and
"X
and
Y
0:
Same
direction
Frequency
source
operation" F0-09 Rotation
direction 0
F0-07 0 1:
Reverse
direction
selection
4:
Switchover
between
Y
and
"X
and
Y

operation" You
can
change
the
rotation
direction
of
the
motor
just
by
modifying
this
parameter
without

Ten's
digit
(X
and
Y
operation
relationship) changing
the
motor
wiring.
Modifying
this
parameter
is
equivalent
to
exchanging
any
two
of

the
motor's
U,
V,
W
wires.
0:
X+Y
1:
X-Y Note
2:
Maximum
3:
Minimum The
motor
will
resume
running
in
the
original
direction
after
parameter
initialization.
Do
not
use

this
function
in
applications
where
changing
the
rotating
direction
of
the
motor
is
prohibited
after

It
is
used
to
select
the
frequency
setting
channel.
If
the
frequency
source
involves
X
and
system
commissioning
is
complete.
Y
operation,
you
can
set
the
frequency
offset
in
F0-21
for
superposition
to
the
X
and
Y

operation
result,
flexibly
satisfying
various
requirements.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Figure
5-1
Frequency
setting
based
on
main
frequency
source
X
and
auxiliary
frequency
F0-10 Maximum
frequency 50.00‒320.00
Hz 50.00
Hz
source
Y
When
the
frequency
source
is
AI,
pulse
setting
(DI5),
or
multi-reference,
100%
of
the
input

Frequency
Frequency
source
X
and
Setting
of
operation
Target
running

source
selection Y
operation
selection frequency corresponds
to
the
value
of
this
parameter.
conditions
The
output
frequency
of
the
E4
can
reach
up
to
3200
Hz.
To
take
both
frequency

F0-07
unit's

digit reference
resolution
and
frequency
input
range
into
consideration,
you
can
set
the
number

Main
of
decimal
places
for
frequency
reference
in
F0-22.
frequency

source
X •
If
F0-22
is
set
to
1,
the
frequency
reference
resolution
is
0.1
Hz.
In
this
case,
the

setting
range
of
F0-10
is
50.0
to
3200.0
Hz.
Set
frequency
•
If
F0-22
is
set
to
2,
the
frequency
reference
resolution
is
0.01
Hz.
In
this
case,
the

F0-07
ten's
setting
range
of
F0-10
is
50.00
to
320.00
Hz.
digit

Note
Auxiliary

frequency
After
the
value
of
F0-22
is
modified,
the
frequency
resolution
of
all
frequency
related
function

source
Y Frequency

switchover
codes
change
accordingly.
Amplitude

F4-00
to
F4-09
limit
=
18

DI1
to
DI10

- 84 - - 85 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Adjusting
the
carrier
frequency
will
exert
influences
on
the
aspects
listed
in
the
following

0:
Set
by
F0-12 table.
1:
AI1 Table
6-1
Influences
of
carrier
frequency
adjustment
2:
AI2
F0-11 Source
of
frequency
upper
limit 3:
AI3 0 Carrier
frequency Low High
4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5) Motor
noise Large Small
5:
Communication
Output
current
waveform Bad Good
setting Motor
temperature
rise High Low
It
is
used
to
set
the
source
of
the
frequency
upper
limit,
including
digital
setting
(F0-12),
AI,
AC
drive
temperature
rise Low High
pulse
setting
or
communication
setting.
If
the
frequency
upper
limit
is
set
by
means
of
AI1,
Leakage
current Small Large
AI2,
AI3,
DI5
or
communication,
the
setting
is
similar
to
that
of
the
main
frequency
source
X.

External
radiation

For
details,
see
the
description
of
F0-03. Small Large
interference
For
example,
to
avoid
runaway
in
torque
control
mode
in
winding
application,
you
can
set

the
frequency
upper
limit
by
means
of
analog
input.
When
the
AC
drive
reaches
the
upper
The
factory
setting
of
carrier
frequency
varies
with
the
AC
drive
power.
If
you
need
to
modify

limit,
it
will
continue
to
run
at
this
speed. the
carrier
frequency,
note
that
if
the
set
carrier
frequency
is
higher
than
factory
setting,
it

will
lead
to
an
increase
in
temperature
rise
of
the
AC
drive's
heatsink.
In
this
case,
you
need

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default to
de-rate
the
AC
drive.
Otherwise,
the
AC
drive
may
overheat
and
alarm.
Frequency
lower
limit
(F0-14)
to

F0-12 Frequency
upper
limit 50.00
Hz Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
maximum
frequency
(F0-10)
Carrier frequency adjustment with 0: No
F0-16 1
This
parameter
is
used
to
set
the
frequency
upper
limit. temperature 1: Yes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default It
is
used
to
set
whether
the
carrier
frequency
is
adjusted
based
on
the
temperature.
The

Frequency
upper
limit
0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency
AC
drive
automatically
reduces
the
carrier
frequency
when
detecting
that
the
heatsink

F0-13 0.00
Hz
offset (F0-10) temperature
is
high.
The
AC
drive
resumes
the
carrier
frequency
to
the
set
value
when
the

heatsink
temperature
becomes
normal.
This
function
reduces
the
overheat
alarms.
If
the
source
of
the
frequency
upper
limit
is
analog
input
or
pulse
setting,
the
final
frequency

upper
limit
is
obtained
by
adding
the
offset
in
this
parameter
to
the
frequency
upper
limit
set
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
in
F0-11. 0.00–650.00s (F0-19 = 2)
Model
F0-17 Acceleration time 1 0.0–6500.0s (F0-19 = 1)
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default dependent
0–65000s (F0-19 = 0)
F0-14 Frequency
lower
limit 0.00
Hz
to
frequency
upper
limit
(F0-12) 0.00
Hz
0.00–650.00s (F0-19 = 2)
Model
If
the
frequency
reference
is
lower
than
the
value
of
this
parameter,
the
AC
drive
can
stop,
F0-18 Deceleration time 1 0.0–6500.0s (F0-19 = 1)
dependent
run
at
the
frequency
lower
limit,
or
run
at
zero
speed,
determined
by
F8-14. 0–65000s (F0-19 = 0)

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Acceleration
time
indicates
the
time
required
by
the
AC
drive
to
accelerate
from
0
Hz
to

F0-15 Carrier
frequency 0.5‒16.0
kHz Model
dependent "Acceleration/Deceleration
base
frequency"
(F0-25),
that
is,
t1
in
Figure
5-2.

Deceleration
time
indicates
the
time
required
by
the
AC
drive
to
decelerate
from

It
is
used
to
adjust
the
carrier
frequency
of
the
AC
drive,
helping
to
reduce
the
motor
noise,
"Acceleration/Deceleration
base
frequency"
(F0-25)
to
0
Hz,
that
is,
t2
in
Figure
5-2.
avoiding
the
resonance
of
the
mechanical
system,
and
reducing
the
leakage
current
to
the

earth
and
interference
generated
by
the
AC
drive.
If
the
carrier
frequency
is
low,
output
current
has
high
harmonics,
and
the
power
loss
and

temperature
rise
of
the
motor
increase.
If
the
carrier
frequency
is
high,
power
loss
and
temperature
rise
of
the
motor
declines.

However,
the
AC
drive
has
an
increase
in
power
loss,
temperature
rise
and
interference.

- 86 - - 87 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Figure
5-2
Acceleration/Deceleration
time Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

1:
0.1
Hz
Output
frequency
F0-22 Frequency
reference
resolution 2
(Hz) 2:
0.01
Hz

Acceleration/Deceleration
It
is
used
to
set
the
resolution
of
all
frequency-related
parameters.
base
frequency
Set
frequency If
the
resolution
is
0.1
Hz,
the
E4
can
output
up
to
3200
Hz.
If
the
resolution
is
0.01
Hz,

the
E4
can
output
up
to
600.00
Hz.

Note
Time
(t)
•
Modifying
this
parameter
will
make
the
decimal
places
of
all
frequency-related
parameters

Actual
acceleration
time Actual
deceleration
time change
and
corresponding
frequency
values
change.
•
This
parameter
is
not
resumed
when
factory
setting
is
resumed.
t1 t2
Set
acceleration
time Set
deceleration
time
The
E4
provides
totally
four
groups
of
acceleration/deceleration
time
for
selection.
You
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
can
perform
switchover
by
using
a
DI
terminal.

Retentive
of
digital
setting
0:
Not
retentive
• Group
1:
F0-17,
F0-18 F0-23 0
frequency
upon
power
failure 1:
Retentive
• Group
2:
F8-03,
F8-04
• Group
3:
F8-05,
F8-06 This
parameter
is
valid
only
when
the
frequency
source
is
digital
setting.

• Group
4:
F8-07,
F8-08 If
F0-23
is
set
to
0,
the
digital
setting
frequency
value
resumes
to
the
value
of
F0-08
(Preset

frequency)
after
the
AC
drive
stops.
The
modification
by
using
keys

and

or
the

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
terminal
UP/DOWN
function
is
cleared.
0:1s
F0-19 Acceleration/Deceleration
time
unit 1:
0.1s 1 If
F0-23
is
set
to
1,
the
digital
setting
frequency
value
is
the
set
frequency
at
the
moment

2:
0.01s when
the
AC
drive
stops.
The
modification
by
using
keys

and

or
the
terminal
UP/
DOWN
function
remains
effective.
To
satisfy
requirements
of
different
applications,
the
E4

provides
three
acceleration/
deceleration
time
units,
1s,
0.1s
and
0.01s. Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting Range Default
Note 0:
Motor
parameter
group
1
Motor
parameter
group
1:
Motor
parameter
group
2
Modifying
this
parameter
will
make
the
displayed
decimal
places
change
and
corresponding
F0-24 0
acceleration/deceleration
time
also
change. selection 2:
Motor
parameter
group
3
3:
Motor
parameter
group
4

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default The
E4

can
drive
four
motors
at
different
time.
You
can
set
the
motor
nameplate

parameters
respectively,
independent
motor
auto-tuning,
different
control
modes,
and

Frequency
offset
of
auxiliary
frequency
0.00
Hz
to
maximum
parameters
related
to
running
performance
respectively
for
the
four
motors.
F0-21 0.00
Hz
source
for
X
and
Y
operation frequency
(F0-10)
Motor
parameter
group
1
corresponds
to
groups
F1
and
F2.
Motor
parameter
groups
2,
3

and
4
correspond
to
groups
A2,
A3
and
A4
respectively.
This
parameter
is
valid
only
when
the
frequency
source
is
set
to
"X
and
Y
operation".
The

final
frequency
is
obtained
by
adding
the
frequency
offset
set
in
this
parameter
to
the
X
and
You
can
select
the
current
motor
parameter
group
by
using
F0-24
or
perform
switchover

Y
operation
result. between
the
motor
parameter
groups
by
means
of
a
DI
terminal.
If
motor
parameters

selected
by
means
of
F0-24
conflict
with
those
selected
by
means
of
DI
terminal,
the

selection
by
DI
is
preferred.

- 88 - - 89 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

If
a
command
source
has
a
bound
frequency
source,
the
frequency
source
set
in
F0-03
to

F0-07
no
longer
takes
effect
when
the
command
source
is
effective.
0:
Maximum
frequency
(F0-10)
Acceleration/Deceleration

F0-25 1:
Set
frequency 0 Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
time
base
frequency
2:
100
Hz 0:
Modbus
protocol

The
acceleration/deceleration
time
indicates
the
time
for
the
AC
drive
to
increase
from
0
F0-28 Serial
communication
protocol 1:
PROFIBUS-DP
bridge 0

Hz
to
the
frequency
set
in
F0-25.
If
this
parameter
is
set
to
1,
the
acceleration/deceleration
2:
CANopen
bridge
time
is
related
to
the
set
frequency.
If
the
set
frequency
changes
frequently,
the
motor's

acceleration/deceleration
also
changes. The
E4
supports
Modbus,
PROFIBUS-DP
bridge
and
CANopen
bridge.
Select
a
proper

protocol
based
on
the
actual
requirements.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Base
frequency
for
UP/DOWN
0:
Running
frequency Group F1: Motor 1 Parameters
F0-26 0
modification
during
running 1:
Set
frequency
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
This
parameter
is
valid
only
when
the
frequency
source
is
digital
setting. 0:
Common
asynchronous
motor
Motor
type

F1-00 1:
Variable
frequency
asynchronous
motor 1
It
is
used
to
set
the
base
frequency
to
be
modified
by
using
keys

and

or
the
selection
2:
Permanent
magnetic
synchronous
motor
terminal
UP/DOWN
function.
If
the
running
frequency
and
set
frequency
are
different,
there

will
be
a
large
difference
between
the
AC
drive's
performance
during
the
acceleration/ Rated
motor
Model

F1-01 0.1‒1000.0
kW
deceleration
process. power dependent
Rated
motor
Model

F1-02 1‒2000
V
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default voltage dependent
Unit's
digit
(Binding
operation
panel
Rated
motor
0.01‒655.35
A
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW) Model

command
to
frequency
source) F1-03
current 0.1‒6553.5
A
(AC
drive
power
>
55
kW) dependent
0:
No
binding Rated
motor
Model

F1-04 0.01
Hz
to
maximum
frequency
1:
Frequency
source
by
digital
setting frequency dependent
2:
AI1 Rated
motor
Model

F1-05 1‒65535
RPM
3:
AI2 rotational
speed dependent
4:
AI3
Set
the
parameters
according
to
the
motor
nameplate
no
matter
whether
V/F
control
or

5:
Pulse
setting
(DI5)
vector
control
is
adopted.
Binding
command
6:
Multi-reference
F0-27 source
to
000 To
achieve
better
V/F
or
vector
control
performance,
motor
auto-tuning
is
required.
The

frequency
source 7:
Simple
PLC
motor
auto-tuning
accuracy
depends
on
the
correct
setting
of
motor
nameplate
parameters.
8:
PID
9:
Communication
setting Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Ten's
digit
(Binding
terminal
command
to
0.001–65.535 Ω (AC drive power ≤ 55 kW)
Stator resistance Model
frequency
source) F1-06
(asynchronous motor) 0.0001–6.5535 Ω (AC drive power > 55 kW) dependent
0‒9,
same
as
unit's
digit
Hundred's
digit
(Binding
communication
Rotor resistance 0.001–65.535 Ω (AC drive power ≤ 55 kW) Model
F1-07
command
to
frequency
source) (asynchronous motor) 0.0001–6.5535 Ω (AC drive power > 55 kW) dependent
0‒9,
same
as
unit's
digit)
Leakage inductive
0.01–655.35 mH (AC drive power ≤ 55 kW) Model
F1-08 reactance
It
is
used
to
bind
the
three
running
command
sources
with
the
nine
frequency
sources,
0.001–65.535 mH (AC drive power > 55 kW) dependent
(asynchronous motor)
facilitating
to
implement
synchronous
switchover.
For
details
on
the
frequency
sources,
see
the
description
of
F0-03
(Main
frequency
source
X

selection).
Different
running
command
sources
can
be
bound
to
the
same
frequency
source.

- 90 - - 91 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

Mutual
inductive
0:
ABZ
incremental
encoder
0.1‒6553.5
mH
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW) Model

F1-09 reactance 1:
UVW
incremental
encoder
0.01‒-655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power
>
55
kW) dependent
(asynchronous
motor) F1-28 Encoder
type 2:
Resolver 0
No-load
current 0.01
to
F1-03
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW) Model
3:
SIN/COS
encoder
F1-10
(asynchronous
motor) 0.1
to
F1-03
(AC
drive
power
>
55
kW) dependent 4:
Wire-saving
UVW
encoder

The
parameters
in
F1-06
to
F-10
are
asynchronous
motor
parameters.
These
parameters
The
E4
supports
multiple
types
of
encoder.
Different
PG
cards
are
required
for
different

are
unavailable
on
the
motor
nameplate
and
are
obtained
by
means
of
motor
auto-tuning.
types
of
encoder.
Select
the
appropriate
PG
card
for
the
encoder
used.
Any
of
the
five

Only
F1-06
to
F1-08
can
be
obtained
through
static
motor
auto-tuning.
Through
complete
encoder
types
is
applicable
to
synchronous
motor.
Only
ABZ
incremental
encoder
and

motor
auto-tuning,
encoder
phase
sequence
and
current
loop
PI
can
be
obtained
besides
resolver
are
applicable
to
asynchronous
motor.
the
parameters
in
F1-06
to
F1-10. After
installation
of
the
PG
card
is
complete,
set
this
parameter
properly
based
on
the
actual

Each
time
"Rated
motor
power"
(F1-01)
or
"Rated
motor
voltage"
(F1-02)
is
changed,
the
condition.
Otherwise,
the
AC
drive
cannot
run
properly.
AC
drive
automatically
restores
values
of
F1-06
to
F1-10
to
the
parameter
setting
for
the

common
standard
Y
series
asynchronous
motor. Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
A/B
phase
sequence
of
ABZ
0:
Forward
If
it
is
impossible
to
perform
motor
auto-tuning
onsite,
manually
input
the
values
of
these
F1-30 0
incremental
encoder 1:
Reserve
parameters
according
to
data
provided
by
the
motor
manufacturer.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default This
parameter
is
valid
only
for
ABZ
incremental
encoder
(F1-28
=
0)
and
is
used
to
set
the

A/B
phase
sequence
of
the
ABZ
incremental
encoder.
Stator
resistance
0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW) Model

F1-16 It
is
valid
for
both
asynchronous
motor
and
synchronous
motor.
The
A/B
phase
sequence

(synchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
power
>
55
kW) dependent
can
be
obtained
through
"Asynchronous
motor
complete
auto-tuning"
or
"Synchronous

Shaft
D
inductance 0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW) Model
motor
no-load
auto-tuning".
F1-17
(synchronous
motor) 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
power
>
55
kW) dependent
Shaft
Q
inductance 0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW) Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Model

F1-18
(synchronous
motor) 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
power
>
55
kW) dependent F1-31 Encoder
installation
angle 0.0°‒359.9° 0.0°
Back
EMF
Model

F1-20 0.1‒6553.5
V This
parameter
is
applicable
only
to
synchronous
motor.
It
is
valid
for
ABZ
incremental

(synchronous
motor) dependent
encoder,
UVW
incremental
encoder,
resolver
and
wire-saving
UVW
encoder,
but
invalid
for

SIN/COS
encoder.
F1-16
to
F-20
are
synchronous
motor
parameters.
These
parameters
are
unavailable
on
the

nameplate
of
most
synchronous
motors
and
can
be
obtained
by
means
of
"Synchronous
It
can
be
obtained
through
synchronous
motor
no-load
auto-turning
or
with-load
auto-tuning.

motor
no-load
auto-tuning".
Through
"Synchronous
motor
with-load
auto-tuning",
only
the
After
installation
of
the
synchronous
motor
is
complete,
the
value
of
this
parameter
must
be

encoder
phase
sequence
and
installation
angle
can
be
obtained. obtained
by
motor
auto-tuning.
Otherwise,
the
motor
cannot
run
properly.
Each
time
"Rated
motor
power"
(F1-01)
or
"Rated
motor
voltage"
(F1-02)
is
changed,
the

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
AC
drive
automatically
modifies
the
values
of
F1-16
to
F1-20.
U,
V,
W
phase
sequence
of
UVW
0:
Forward
You
can
also
directly
set
the
parameters
based
on
the
data
provided
by
the
synchronous
F1-32 0
encoder 1:
Reverse
motor
manufacturer.
F1-33 UVW
encoder
angle
offset 0.0°‒359.9° 0.0°
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
These
two
parameters
are
valid
only
when
the
UVW
encoder
is
applied
to
a
synchronous

F1-27 Encoder
pulses
per
revolution 1‒65535 1024
motor.
They
can
be
obtained
by
synchronous
motor
no-load
auto-tuning
or
with-load
auto-
tuning.
After
installation
of
the
synchronous
motor
is
complete,
the
values
of
these
two

This
parameter
is
used
to
set
the
pulses
per
revolution
(PPR)
of
ABZ
or
UVW
incremental

parameters
must
be
obtained
by
motor
auto-tuning.
Otherwise,
the
motor
cannot
run

encoder.
In
CLVC
mode,
the
motor
cannot
run
properly
if
this
parameter
is
set
incorrectly.
properly.

- 92 - - 93 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Set
this
parameter
to
2,
and
press
.
Then,
the
AC
drive
starts
complete
auto-

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F1-34 Number
of
pole
pairs
of
resolver 1‒65535 1 tuning.

• 11:
Synchronous
motor
with-load
auto-tuning
If
a
resolver
is
applied,
set
the
number
of
pole
pairs
properly.
It
is
applicable
to
scenarios
where
the
synchronous
motor
cannot
be
disconnected
from

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default the
load.
During
with-load
auto-tuning,
the
motor
rotates
at
the
speed
of
10
PRM.

Encoder
wire-break
fault
detection
0.0s:
No
action Before
performing
with-load
auto-tuning,
properly
set
the
motor
type
and
motor

F1-36 0.0s
time 0.1‒10.0s nameplate
parameters
of
F1-00
to
F1-05
first.

By
with-load
auto-tuning,
the
AC
drive
obtains
the
initial
position
angle
of
the

This
parameter
is
used
to
set
the
time
that
a
wire-break
fault
lasts.
If
it
is
set
to
0.0s,
the
AC
synchronous
motor,
which
is
a
necessary
prerequisite
of
the
motor's
normal
running.

drive
does
not
detect
the
encoder
wire-break
fault.
If
the
duration
of
the
encoder
wire-break
Before
the
first
use
of
the
synchronous
motor
after
installation,
motor
auto-tuning
must

fault
detected
by
the
AC
drive
exceeds
the
time
set
in
this
parameter,
the
AC
drive
reports
be
performed.
Err20.
Set
this
parameter
to
11,
and
press
.
Then,
the
AC
drive
starts
with-load
auto-tuning.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
0:
No
auto-tuning • 12:
Synchronous
motor
no-load
auto-tuning
1:
Asynchronous
motor
static
auto-tuning
Auto-tuning
If
the
synchronous
motor
can
be
disconnected
from
the
load,
no-load
auto-tuning
is

F1-37 2:
Asynchronous
motor
complete
auto-tuning 0 recommended,
which
will
achieve
better
running
performance
compared
with
with-load

selection
11:
Synchronous
motor
with-load
auto-tuning auto-tuning.
12:
Synchronous
motor
no-load
auto-tuning
During
the
process
of
no-load
auto-tuning,
the
AC
drive
performs
with-load
auto-tuning

first
and
then
accelerates
to
80%
of
the
rated
motor
frequency
within
the
acceleration

•
0:
No
auto-tuning time
set
in
F0-17.
The
AC
drive
keeps
running
for
a
certain
period
and
then
decelerates

Auto-tuning
is
prohibited. to
stop
within
the
deceleration
time
set
in
F0-18.

•
1:
Asynchronous
motor
static
auto-tuning Before
performing
no-load
auto-tuning,
properly
set
the
motor
type,
motor
nameplate

parameters
of
F1-00
to
F1-05,
"Encoder
type"
(F1-28)
and
"Encoder
pulses
per

It
is
applicable
to
scenarios
where
complete
auto-tuning
cannot
be
performed
because
revolution"
(F1-27)
and
"Number
of
pole
pairs
of
resolver"
(F1-34)
first.
the
asynchronous
motor
cannot
be
disconnected
from
the
load.
The
AC
drive
will
obtain
motor
parameters
of
F1-16
to
F1-20,
encoder
related

Before
performing
static
auto-tuning,
properly
set
the
motor
type
and
motor
nameplate
parameters
of
F1-30
to
F1-33
and
vector
control
current
loop
PI
parameters
of
F2-13
to

parameters
of
F1-00
to
F1-05
first.
The
AC
drive
will
obtain
parameters
of
F1-06
to
F1- F2-16
by
no-load
auto-tuning.
08
by
static
auto-tuning.
Set
this
parameter
to
12,
and
press
.
Then,
the
AC
drive
starts
no-load
auto- tuning.
Set
this
parameter
to
1,
and
press
.
Then,
the
AC
drive
starts
static
auto-tuning.
Note

• 2:
Asynchronous
motor
complete
auto-tuning Motor
auto-tuning
can
be
performed
only
in
operation
panel
mode.

To
perform
this
type
of
auto-tuning,
ensure
that
the
motor
is
disconnected
from
the
load.

During
the
process
of
complete
auto-tuning,
the
AC
drive
performs
static
auto-tuning
Group
F2:
Vector
Control
Parameters
first
and
then
accelerates
to
80%
of
the
rated
motor
frequency
within
the
acceleration

time
set
in
F0-17.
The
AC
drive
keeps
running
for
a
certain
period
and
then
decelerates
Group
F2
is
valid
for
vector
control,
and
invalid
for
V/F
control.
to
stop
within
deceleration
time
set
in
F0-18.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Before
performing
complete
auto-tuning,
properly
set
the
motor
type,
motor
nameplate

parameters
of
F1-00
to
F1-05,
"Encoder
type"
(F1-28)
and
"Encoder
pulses
per
F2-00 Speed
loop
proportional
gain
1 0‒100 30
revolution"
(F1-27)
first. F2-01 Speed
loop
integral
time
1 0.01‒10.00s 0.50s
The
AC
drive
will
obtain
motor
parameters
of
F1-06
to
F1-10,
"A/B
phase
sequence
of
F2-02 Switchover
frequency
1 0.00
to
F2-05 5.00
Hz
ABZ
incremental
encoder"
(F1-30)
and
vector
control
current
loop
PI
parameters
of
F2- F2-03 Speed
loop
proportional
gain
2 0‒100 20
13
to
F2-16
by
complete
auto-tuning.
- 94 - - 95 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

For
CLVC,

it
is
used
to
adjust
the
output
current
of
the
AC
drive
with
same
load.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F2-04 Speed
loop
integral
time
2 0.01‒10.00s 1.00s Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F2-02
to
maximum
F2-07 Time
constant
of
speed
loop
filter 0.000‒0.100s 0.000s
F2-05 Switchover
frequency
2 10.00
Hz
output
frequency
In
the
vector
control
mode,
the
output
of
the
speed
loop
regulator
is
torque
current

Speed
loop
PI
parameters
vary
with
running
frequencies
of
the
AC
drive. reference.
This
parameter
is
used
to
filter
the
torque
references.
It
need
not
be
adjusted

•
If
the
running
frequency
is
less
than
or
equal
to
"Switchover
frequency
1"
(F2-02),
the
generally
and
can
be
increased
in
the
case
of
large
speed
fluctuation.
In
the
case
of
motor

speed
loop
PI
parameters
are
F2-00
and
F2-01. oscillation,
decrease
the
value
of
this
parameter
properly.

•
If
the
running
frequency
is
equal
to
or
greater
than
"Switchover
frequency
2"
(F2-05),
If
the
value
of
this
parameter
is
small,
the
output
torque
of
the
AC
drive
may
fluctuate

the
speed
loop
PI
parameters
are
F2-03
and
F2-04. greatly,
but
the
response
is
quick.

•
If
the
running
frequency
is
between
F2-02
and
F2-05,
the
speed
loop
PI
parameters
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
are
obtained
from
the
linear
switchover
between
the
two
groups
of
PI
parameters,
as
F2-08 Vector
control
over-excitation
gain 0‒200 64
shown
in
Figure
6-3.
Figure
5-3
Relationship
between
running
frequencies
and
PI
parameters During
deceleration
of
the
AC
drive,
over-excitation
control
can
restrain
rise
of
the
bus

voltage
to
avoid
the
overvoltage
fault.
The
larger
the
over-excitation
gain
is,
the
better
the

PI

parameters
restraining
effect
is.
Increase
the
over-excitation
gain
if
the
AC
drive
is
liable
to
overvoltage
error
during

deceleration.
Too
large
over-excitation
gain,
however,
may
lead
to
an
increase
in
output

F2-00
current.
Therefore,
set
this
parameter
to
a
proper
value
in
actual
applications.
F2-01
Set
the
over-excitation
gain
to
0
in
applications
of
small
inertia
(the
bus
voltage
will
not
rise

F2-03 during
deceleration)
or
where
there
is
a
braking
resistor.
F2-04
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Frequency
0:
F2-10
F2-02 F2-05 reference
1:
AI1
The
speed
dynamic
response
characteristics
in
vector
control
can
be
adjusted
by
setting
the
Torque
upper
limit
source
in
2:
AI2
proportional
gain
and
integral
time
of
the
speed
regulator. F2-09 0
speed
control
mode 3:
AI3
To
achieve
a
faster
system
response,
increase
the
proportional
gain
and
reduce
the
integral

4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5)
time.
Be
aware
that
this
may
lead
to
system
oscillation.
5:
Communication
setting
The
recommended
adjustment
method
is
as
follows: Digital
setting
of
torque
upper

F2-10 0.0%‒200.0% 150.0%
If
the
factory
setting
cannot
meet
the
requirements,
make
proper
adjustment.
Increase
the
limit
in
speed
control
mode
proportional
gain
first
to
ensure
that
the
system
does
not
oscillate,
and
then
reduce
the

integral
time
to
ensure
that
the
system
has
quick
response
and
small
overshoot. In
the
speed
control
mode,
the
maximum
output
torque
of
the
AC
drive
is
restricted
by
F2-
09.
If
the
torque
upper
limit
is
analog,
pulse
or
communication
setting,
100%
of
the
setting

Note corresponds
to
the
value
of
F2-10,
and
100%
of
the
value
of
F2-10
corresponds
to
the
AC

drive
rated
torque.
Improper
PI
parameter
setting
may
cause
too
large
speed
overshoot,
and
overvoltage
fault
may

even
occur
when
the
overshoot
drops. For
details
on
the
AI1,
AI2
and
AI3
setting,
see
the
description
of
the
AI
curves
in
group
F4.
For
details
on
the
pulse
setting,
see
the
description
of
F4-28
to
F4-32.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default When
the
AC
drive
is
in
communication
with
the
master,
if
F2-09
is
set
to
5
“communication

F2-06 Vector
control
slip
gain 50%‒200% 100% setting”,
F2-10
“Digital
setting
of
torque
upper
limit
in
speed
control
mode”
can
be
set
via

communication
from
the
master.
For
SFVC,
it
is
used
to
adjust
speed
stability
accuracy
of
the
motor.
When
the
motor
with
In
other
conditions,
the
host
computer
writes
data
-100.00%
to
100.00%
by
the

load
runs
at
a
very
low
speed,
increase
the
value
of
this
parameter;
when
the
motor
with
communication
address
0x1000,
where
100.0%
corresponds
to
the
value
of
F2-10.
The

load
runs
at
a
very
large
speed,
decrease
the
value
of
this
parameter. communication
protocol
can
be
Modbus,
CANopen,
CANlink
or
PROFIBUS-DP.

- 96 - - 97 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Group
F3:
V/F
Control
Parameters

F2-13 Excitation
adjustment
proportional
gain 0‒20000 2000
Group
F3
is
valid
only
for
V/F
control.
F2-14 Excitation
adjustment
integral
gain 0‒20000 1300
F2-15 Torque
adjustment
proportional
gain 0‒20000 2000 The
V/F
control
mode
is
applicable
to
low
load
applications
(fan
or
pump)
or
applications

F2-16 Torque
adjustment
integral
gain 0‒20000 1300 where
one
AC
drive
operates
multiple
motors
or
there
is
a
large
difference
between
the
AC

drive
power
and
the
motor
power.
These
are
current
loop
PI
parameters
for
vector
control.
These
parameters
are
automatically

obtained
through
"Asynchronous
motor
complete
auto-tuning"
or
"Synchronous
motor
no- Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
load
auto-tuning",
and
need
not
be
modified. 0:
Linear
V/F
The
dimension
of
the
current
loop
integral
regulator
is
integral
gain
rather
than
integral
time. 1:
Multi-point
V/F
2:
Square
V/F
Note
that
too
large
current
loop
PI
gain
may
lead
to
oscillation
of
the
entire
control
loop.

3:
1.2-power
V/F
Therefore,
when
current
oscillation
or
torque
fluctuation
is
great,
manually
decrease
the

proportional
gain
or
integral
gain
here. 4:
1.4-power
V/F
F3-00 V/F
curve
setting 0
6:
1.6-power
V/F
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
8:
1.8-power
V/F
0:
No
field
weakening 9:
Reserved
Field
weakening
mode
of

F2-18 1:
Direct
calculation 1 10:
V/F
complete
separation
synchronous
motor
2:
Automatic
adjustment 11:
V/F
half
separation
Field
weakening
depth
of

F2-19 50%‒500% 100% •
0:
Linear
V/F
synchronous
motor
F2-20 Maximum
field
weakening
current 1%‒300% 50% It
is
applicable
to
common
constant
torque
load.
Field
weakening
automatic

F2-21 10%‒500% 100% •
1:
Multi-point
V/F
adjustment
gain
F2-22 Field
weakening
integral
multiple 2‒10 2 It
is
applicable
to
special
load
such
as
dehydrator
and
centrifuge.
Any
such
V/F
curve

can
be
obtained
by
setting
parameters
of
F3-03
to
F3-08.
These
parameters
are
used
to
set
field
weakening
control
for
the
synchronous
motor.
•
2:
Square
V/F
If
F2-18
is
set
to
0,
field
weakening
control
on
the
synchronous
motor
is
disabled.
In
this

case,
the
maximum
rotational
speed
is
related
to
the
AC
drive
bus
voltage.
If
the
motor's
It
is
applicable
to
centrifugal
loads
such
as
fan
and
pump.
maximum
rotational
speed
cannot
meet
the
requirements,
enable
the
field
weakening
•
3
to
8:
V/F
curve
between
linear
V/F
and
square
V/F
function
to
increase
the
speed.
•
10:
V/F
complete
separation
The
E4
provides
two
field
weakening
modes:
direct
calculation
and
automatic

adjustment. In
this
mode,
the
output
frequency
and
output
voltage
of
the
AC
drive
are
independent.

The
output
frequency
is
determined
by
the
frequency
source,
and
the
output
voltage
is

•
In
direct
calculation
mode,
directly
calculate
the
demagnetized
current
and
manually
determined
by
"Voltage
source
for
V/F
separation"
(F3-13).
adjust
the
demagnetized
current
by
means
of
F2-19.
The
smaller
the
demagnetized

current
is,
the
smaller
the
total
output
current
is.
However,
the
desired
field
weakening
It
is
applicable
to
induction
heating,
inverse
power
supply
and
torque
motor
control.
effect
may
not
be
achieved. •
11:
V/F
half
separation
•
In
automatic
adjustment
mode,
the
best
demagnetized
current
is
selected
automatically.
In
this
mode,
V
and
F
are
proportional
and
the
proportional
relationship
can
be
set
in

This
may
influence
the
system
dynamic
performance
or
cause
instability. F3-13.
The
relationship
between
V
and
F
are
also
related
to
the
rated
motor
voltage

The
adjustment
speed
of
the
field
weakening
current
can
be
changed
by
modifying
the
and
rated
motor
frequency
in
Group
F1.
values
of
F2-21
and
F2-22.
A
very
quick
adjustment
may
cause
instability.
Therefore,
Assume
that
the
voltage
source
input
is
X
(0
to
100%),
the
relationship
between
V
and

generally
do
not
modify
them
manually. F
is:
V/F
=
2
x
X
x
(Rated
motor
voltage)/(Rated
motor
frequency)

- 98 - - 99 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

These
six
parameters
are
used
to
define
the
multi-point
V/F
curve.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Model
The
multi-point
V/F
curve
is
set
based
on
the
motor's
load
characteristic.
The
relationship

F3-01 Torque
boost 0.0%‒30% between
voltages
and
frequencies
is:
dependent
Cut-off
frequency
of
0.00
Hz
to
maximum
output
V1
<
V2
<
V3,
F1
<
F2
<
F3
F3-02 50.00
Hz
torque
boost frequency
At
low
frequency,
higher
voltage
may
cause
overheat
or
even
burnt
out
of
the
motor
and

overcurrent
stall
or
overcurrent
protection
of
the
AC
drive.
To
compensate
the
low
frequency
torque
characteristics
of
V/F
control,
you
can
boost
the

output
voltage
of
the
AC
drive
at
low
frequency
by
modifying
F3-01. Figure
5-5
Setting
of
multi-point
V/F
curve
If
the
torque
boost
is
set
to
too
large,
the
motor
may
overheat,
and
the
AC
drive
may
suffer
Voltage

overcurrent.
%
Vb
If
the
load
is
large
and
the
motor
startup
torque
is
insufficient,
increase
the
value
of
F3-01.

If
the
load
is
small,
decrease
the
value
of
F3-01.
If
it
is
set
to
0.0,
the
AC
drive
performs

automatic
torque
boost.
In
this
case,
the
AC
drive
automatically
calculates
the
torque
boost
V3
value
based
on
motor
parameters
including
the
stator
resistance.
V2
F3-02
specifies
the
frequency
under
which
torque
boost
is
valid.
Torque
boost
becomes

invalid
when
this
frequency
is
exceeded,
as
shown
in
the
following
figure.
Figure
5-4
Manual
torque
boost V1

Output

voltage F1 F2 F3 Fb Frequency
%
Vb Vb:
Maximum
V1-V3:
1st,
2nd
and
3rd
voltage
F1-F3:
1st,
2nd
and
3rd
frequency

output
voltage percentages
of
multi-point
V/F
percentages
of
multi-point
V/F

Vb:
Rated
motor
voltage Fb:
Rated
motor
running
frequency

V1:
Voltage
of
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

V1 manual
torque
boost
F3-09 V/F
slip
compensation
gain 0%‒200.0% 0.0%

This
parameter
is
valid
only
for
the
asynchronous
motor.
f1 fb Output

frequency It
can
compensate
the
rotational
speed
slip
of
the
asynchronous
motor
when
the
load
of
the

f1:
Cutoff
frequency
of
fb:
Rated
running
motor
increases,
stabilizing
the
motor
speed
in
case
of
load
change.
If
this
parameter
is
set

manual
torque
boost frequency
to
100%,
it
indicates
that
the
compensation
when
the
motor
bears
rated
load
is
the
rated

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default motor
slip.
The
rated
motor
slip
is
automatically
obtained
by
the
AC
drive
through
calculation

based
on
the
rated
motor
frequency
and
rated
motor
rotational
speed
in
group
F1.
F3-03 Multi-point
V/F
frequency
1
(F1) 0.00
Hz
to
F3-05 0.00
Hz
Generally,
if
the
motor
rotational
speed
is
different
from
the
target
speed,
slightly
adjust
this

F3-04 Multi-point
V/F
voltage
1
(V1) 0.0%‒100.0% 0.0%
parameter.
F3-05 Multi-point
V/F
frequency
2
(F2) F3-03
to
F3-07 0.00
Hz
F3-06 Multi-point
V/F
voltage
2
(V2) 0.0%‒100.0% 0.0% Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F3-05
to
rated
motor
F3-10 V/F
over-excitation
gain 0‒200 64
frequency
(F1-04)
During
deceleration
of
the
AC
drive,
over-excitation
can
restrain
rise
of
the
bus
voltage,

F3-07 Multi-point
V/F
frequency
3
(F3) Note:
The
rated
frequencies
0.00
Hz preventing
the
overvoltage
fault.
The
larger
the
over-excitation
is,
the
better
the
restraining

of
motors
2,
3,
and
4
are

respectively
set
in
A2-04,
A3- result
is.
04,
and
A4-04.
Increase
the
over-excitation
gain
if
the
AC
drive
is
liable
to
overvoltage
error
during

F3-08 Multi-point
V/F
voltage
3
(V3) 0.0%‒100.0% 0.0% deceleration.
However,
too
large
over-excitation
gain
may
lead
to
an
increase
in
the
output

current.
Set
F3-09
to
a
proper
value
in
actual
applications.

- 100 - - 101 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Set
the
over-excitation
gain
to
0
in
the
applications
where
the
inertia
is
small
and
the
bus
Pulse
setting
specification:
voltage
range
9‒30
V,
frequency
range
0‒100
kHz

voltage
will
not
rise
during
motor
deceleration
or
where
there
is
a
braking
resistor.
•
5:
Multi-reference
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default If
the
voltage
source
is
multi-reference,
parameters
in
group
F4
and
FC
must
be
set
to

F3-11 V/F
oscillation
suppression
gain 0‒100 Model
dependent determine
the
corresponding
relationship
between
setting
signal
and
setting
voltage.

100.0%
of
the
multi-reference
setting
in
group
FC
corresponds
to
the
rated
motor

Set
this
parameter
to
a
value
as
small
as
possible
in
the
prerequisite
of
efficient
oscillation
voltage.
suppression
to
avoid
influence
on
V/F
control.
•
6:
Simple
PLC
Set
this
parameter
to
0
if
the
motor
has
no
oscillation.
Increase
the
value
properly
only

If
the
voltage
source
is
simple
PLC
mode,
parameters
in
group
FC
must
be
set
to

when
the
motor
has
obvious
oscillation.
The
larger
the
value
is,
the
better
the
oscillation

determine
the
setting
output
voltage.
suppression
result
will
be.
•
7:
PID
When
the
oscillation
suppression
function
is
enabled,
the
rated
motor
current
and
no-
load
current
must
be
correct.
Otherwise,
the
V/F
oscillation
suppression
effect
will
not
be
The
output
voltage
is
generated
based
on
PID
closed
loop.
For
details,
see
the

satisfactory. description
of
PID
in
group
FA.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default •
8:
Communication
setting

0:
Digital
setting
(F3-14) The
output
voltage
is
set
by
the
host
computer
by
means
of
communication.
1:
AI1 The
voltage
source
for
V/F
separation
is
set
in
the
same
way
as
the
frequency
source.
For

2:
AI2 details,
see
F0-03.
100.0%
of
the
setting
in
each
mode
corresponds
to
the
rated
motor

3:
AI3 voltage.
If
the
corresponding
value
is
negative,
its
absolute
value
is
used.
4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5)
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Voltage
source
for
V/F
5:
Multi-reference
F3-13 0
separation F3-15 Voltage
rise
time
of
V/F
separation 0.0‒1000.0s 0.0s
6:
Simple
PLC
7:
PID F3-16 Voltage
decline
time
of
V/F
separation 0.0‒1000.0s 0.0s
8:
Communication
setting F3-15
indicates
the
time
required
for
the
output
voltage
to
rise
from
0
V
to
the
rated
motor

100.0%
corresponds
to
the
rated
voltage
shown
as
t1
in
the
following
figure.
motor
voltage
(F1-02,
A4-02,
A5- F3-16
indicates
the
time
required
for
the
output
voltage
to
decline
from
the
rated
motor

02,
A6-02). voltage
to
0
V,
shown
as
t2
in
the
following
figure.
Voltage
digital
setting

F3-14 0
V
to
rated
motor
voltage 0
V Figure
6-6
Voltage
of
V/F
separation
for
V/F
separation
Output
voltage
V/F
separation
is
generally
applicable
to
scenarios
such
as
induction
heating,
inverse
power

supply
and
motor
torque
control.
If
V/F
separated
control
is
enabled,
the
output
voltage
can
be
set
in
F3-14
or
by
means
of

analog,
multi-reference,
simple
PLC,
PID
or
communication.
If
you
set
the
output
voltage
by

means
of
non-digital
setting,
100%
of
the
setting
corresponds
to
the
rated
motor
voltage.
If
a
Rated
motor
voltage
negative
percentage
is
set,
its
absolute
value
is
used
as
the
effective
value.
Target
voltage
•
0:
Digital
setting
(F3-14)
The
output
voltage
is
set
directly
in
F3-14.
•
1:
AI1;
2:
AI2;
3:
AI3
The
output
voltage
is
set
by
AI
terminals. Actual
voltage
Actual
voltage

rising
time declining
time
•
4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5) t1 t2
Set
voltage
rising
time Set
voltage
declining
time
The
output
voltage
is
set
by
pulses
of
the
terminal
DI5.

- 102 - - 103 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Group
F4:
Input
Terminals
Value Function Description
The
E4
provides
five
DI
terminals
(DI5
can
be
used
for
high-speed
pulse
input)
and
two
The
AC
drive
decelerates
to
stop,
but
the
running

analog
input
(AI)
terminals.
The
optional
extension
card
provides
another
five
DI
terminals
parameters
are
all
memorized,
such
as
PLC,
swing

10 RUN
pause
(DI6
to
DI10)
and
an
AI
terminal
(AI3). frequency
and
PID
parameters.
After
this
function
is

disabled,
the
AC
drive
resumes
its
status
before
stop.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Default Remark If
this
terminal
becomes
ON,
the
AC
drive
reports
Err15

Normally
open
(NO)
input

F4-00 DI1
function
selection 1:
Forward


RUN
(FWD) Standard
11 and
performs
the
fault
protection
action.
For
more

of
external
fault
details,
see
the
description
of
F9-47.
F4-01 DI2
function
selection 4:
Forward
JOG
(FJOG) Standard
12 Multi-reference
terminal
1
F4-02 DI3
function
selection 9:
Fault
reset
(RESET) Standard
13 Multi-reference
terminal
2 The
setting
of
16
speeds
or
16
other
references
can
be

F4-03 DI4
function
selection 12:
Multi-reference
terminal
1 Standard implemented
through
combinations
of
16
states
of
these

14 Multi-reference
terminal
3 four
terminals.
F4-04 DI5
function
selection 13:
Multi-reference
terminal
2 Standard
15 Multi-reference
terminal
4
F4-05 DI6
function
selection 0 Extended
Terminal
1
for
acceleration/
F4-06 DI7
function
selection 0 Extended 16
deceleration
time
selection Totally
four
groups
of
acceleration/deceleration
time
can

F4-07 DI8
function
selection 0 Extended be
selected
through
combinations
of
two
states
of
these

Terminal
2
for
acceleration/ two
terminals.
17
F4-08 DI9
function
selection 0 Extended deceleration
time
selection
F4-09 DI10
function
selection 0 Extended Frequency
source
The
terminal
is
used
to
perform
switchover
between
two

18
switchover frequency
sources
according
to
the
setting
in
F0-07.
The
following
table
lists
the
functions
available
for
the
DI
terminals.
If
the
frequency
source
is
digital
setting,
the
terminal

Table
5-1
Functions
of
DI
terminals UP
and
DOWN
setting
is
used
to
clear
the
modification
by
using
the
UP/
19 clear
(terminal,
operation
DOWN
function
or
the
increment/decrement
key
on
the

Value Function Description panel) operation
panel,
returning
the
set
frequency
to
the
value

of
F0-08.
0 No
function Set
0
for
reserved
terminals
to
avoid
malfunction.
If
the
command
source
is
set
to
terminal
control
(F0-02

1 Forward
RUN
(FWD) The
terminal
is
used
to
control
forward
or
reverse
RUN
=
1),
this
terminal
is
used
to
perform
switchover
between

2 Reverse
RUN
(REV) of
the
AC
drive. terminal
control
and
operation
panel
control.
Command
source

The
terminal
determines
three-line
control
of
the
AC
20 If
the
command
source
is
set
to
communication
control

3 Three-line
control switchover
terminal
drive.
For
details,
see
the
description
of
F4-11. (F0-02
=
2),
this
terminal
is
used
to
perform
switchover

between
communication
control
and
operation
panel

FJOG
indicates
forward
JOG
running,
while
RJOG

control.
indicates
reverse
JOG
running.
The
JOG
frequency,

4 Forward
JOG
(FJOG) It
enables
the
AC
drive
to
maintain
the
current
frequency

acceleration
time
and
deceleration
time
are
described
Acceleration/Deceleration

respectively
in
F8-00,
F8-01
and
F8-02. 21 output
without
being
affected
by
external
signals
(except

prohibited
the
STOP
command).
5 Reverse
JOG
(RJOG)
PID
is
invalid
temporarily.
The
AC
drive
maintains

6 Terminal
UP If
the
frequency
is
determined
by
external
terminals,
the

22 PID
pause the
current
frequency
output
without
supporting
PID

terminals
with
the
two
functions
are
used
as
increment

adjustment
of
frequency
source.
and
decrement
commands
for
frequency
modification.
7 Terminal
DOWN The
terminal
is
used
to
restore
the
original
status
of

When
the
frequency
source
is
digital
setting,
they
are

23 PLC
status
reset PLC
control
for
the
AC
drive
when
PLC
control
is
started

used
to
adjust
the
frequency.
again
after
a
pause.
The
AC
drive
blocks
its
output,
the
motor
coasts
to
rest

The
AC
drive
outputs
the
central
frequency,
and
the

8 Coast
to
stop and
is
not
controlled
by
the
AC
drive.
It
is
the
same
as
24 Swing
pause
swing
frequency
function
pauses.
coast
to
stop
described
in
F6-10.
25 Counter
input This
terminal
is
used
to
count
pulses.
The
terminal
is
used
for
fault
reset
function,
the
same

9 Fault
reset
(RESET) as
the
function
of
RESET
key
on
the
operation
panel.
26 Counter
reset This
terminal
is
used
to
clear
the
counter
status.
Remote
fault
reset
is
implemented
by
this
function. 27 Length
count
input This
terminal
is
used
to
count
the
length.
28 Length
reset This
terminal
is
used
to
clear
the
length.

- 104 - - 105 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Value Function Description Value Function Description

The
AC
drive
is
prohibited
from
torque
control
and
When
this
terminal
becomes
ON,
the
AC
drive
stops

29 Torque
control
prohibited
enters
the
speed
control
mode. within
the
shortest
time.
During
the
stop
process,
the

Pulse
input
(enabled
only
47 Emergency
stop current
remains
at
the
set
current
upper
limit.
This

30 DI5
is
used
for
pulse
input. function
is
used
to
satisfy
the
requirement
of
stopping

for
DI5)
the
AC
drive
in
emergency
state.
31 Reserved Reserved.
In
any
control
mode
(operation
panel,
terminal
or

After
this
terminal
becomes
ON,
the
AC
drive
directly
communication),
it
can
be
used
to
make
the
AC
drive

32 Immediate
DC
braking 48 External
STOP
terminal
2
switches
over
to
the
DC
braking
state. decelerate
to
stop.
In
this
case,
the
deceleration
time
is

Normally
closed
(NC)
input
After
this
terminal
becomes
ON,
the
AC
drive
reports
deceleration
time
4.
33
of
external
fault Err15
and
stops. When
this
terminal
becomes
ON,
the
AC
drive

Frequency
modification
After
this
terminal
becomes
ON,
the
AC
drive
does
not
49 Deceleration
DC
braking decelerates
to
the
initial
frequency
of
stop
DC
braking

34 and
then
switches
over
to
DC
braking
state.
forbidden respond
to
any
frequency
modification.
Reverse
PID
action
After
this
terminal
becomes
ON,
the
PID
action
direction
When
this
terminal
becomes
ON,
the
AC
drive's
current

35 Clear
the
current
running

direction is
reversed
to
the
direction
set
in
FA-03. 50 running
time
is
cleared.
This
function
must
be
supported

time
by
F8-42
and
F8-53.
In
operation
panel
mode,
this
terminal
can
be
used
to

36 External
STOP
terminal
1 stop
the
AC
drive,
equivalent
to
the
function
of
the
STOP
It
is
used
to
perform
switchover
between
two-line
control

Switchover
between
two-
key
on
the
operation
panel. and
three-line
control.
If
F4
-11
is
set
to
Two-line
mode

51 line
mode
and
three-line

1,
the
system
switches
over
to
three-line
mode
1
when

It
is
used
to
perform
switchover
between
terminal
mode
the
DI
allocated
with
this
function
becomes
ON
Command
source
control
and
communication
control.
If
the
command

37
switchover
terminal
2 source
is
terminal
control,
the
system
will
switch
over
to

communication
control
after
this
terminal
becomes
ON. The
four
multi-reference
terminals
have
16
state
combinations,
corresponding
to
16

reference
values,
as
listed
in
the
following
table.
After
this
terminal
becomes
ON,
the
integral
adjustment

38 PID
integral
pause function
pauses.
However,
the
proportional
and
Table
5-2
State
combinations
of
the
four
multi-reference
terminals
differentiation
adjustment
functions
are
still
valid.
Switchover
between
main
Corresponding

After
this
terminal
becomes
ON,
the
frequency
source
X
K4 K3 K2 K1 Reference
Setting
39 frequency
source
X
and
Parameter
is
replaced
by
the
preset
frequency
set
in
F0-08.
preset
frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF Reference
0 FC-00
Switchover
between
OFF OFF OFF ON Reference
1 FC-01
After
this
terminal
is
enabled,
the
frequency
source
Y
is

40 auxiliary
frequency
source

replaced
by
the
preset
frequency
set
in
F0-08. OFF OFF ON OFF Reference
2 FC-02
Y
and
preset
frequency
OFF OFF ON ON Reference
3 FC-03
41 Motor
selection
terminal
1 Switchover
among
the
four
groups
of
motor
parameters

can
be
implemented
through
the
four
state
combinations
OFF ON OFF OFF Reference
4 FC-04
42 Motor
selection
terminal
2 of
these
two
terminals. OFF ON OFF ON Reference
5 FC-05
If
the
PID
parameters
switchover
performed
by
means
OFF ON ON OFF Reference
6 FC-06
of
DI
terminal
(FA-18
=
1),
the
PID
parameters
are
FA-
43 PID
parameter
switchover 05
to
FA-07
when
the
terminal
becomes
OFF;
the
PID
OFF ON ON ON Reference
7 FC-07
parameters
are
FA-15
to
FA-17
when
this
terminal
ON OFF OFF OFF Reference
8 FC-08
becomes
ON.
ON OFF OFF ON Reference
9 FC-09

44 User-defined
fault
1 If
these
two
terminals
become
ON,
the
AC
drive
reports
ON OFF ON OFF Reference
10 FC-10

Err27
and
Err28
respectively,
and
performs
fault
ON OFF ON ON Reference
11 FC-11
protection
actions
based
on
the
setting
in
F9-49.
45 User-defined
fault
2 ON ON OFF OFF Reference
12 FC-12
This
terminal
enables
the
AC
drive
to
switch
over
ON ON OFF ON Reference
13 FC-13
between
speed
control
and
torque
control.
When
this

Speed
control/Torque
ON ON ON OFF Reference
14 FC-14
46 terminal
becomes
OFF,
the
AC
drive
runs
in
the
mode

control
switchover
set
in
A0-00.
When
this
terminal
becomes
ON,
the
AC
ON ON ON ON Reference
15 FC-15
drive
switches
over
to
the
other
control
mode.

- 106 - - 107 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

If
the
frequency
source
is
multi-reference,
the
value
100%
of
FC-00
to
FC-15
corresponds
to
•
0:
Two-line
mode
1
the
value
of
F0-10
(Maximum
frequency). It
is
the
most
commonly
used
two-line
mode,
in
which
the
forward/reverse
rotation
of

Besides
the
multi-speed
function,
the
multi-reference
can
be
also
used
as
the
PID
setting
the
motor
is
decided
by
DI1
and
DI2.
The
parameters
are
set
as
below:

source
or
the
voltage
source
for
V/F
separation,
satisfying
the
requirement
on
switchover
of

different
setting
values. Function
Code Parameter
Name Value Function
Description
F4-11 Terminal
command
mode 0 Two-line
1
Two
terminals
for
acceleration/deceleration
time
selection
have
four
state
combinations,
as

listed
in
the
following
table. F4-00 DI1
function
selection 1 Forward
RUN
(FWD)

Table
5-3
State
combinations
of
two
terminals
for
acceleration/deceleration
time
selection F4-01 DI2
function
selection 2 Reverse
RUN
(REV)

Acceleration/Deceleration
Time
Corresponding
Figure
5-7
Setting
of
two-line
mode
1

Terminal
2 Terminal
1
Selection Parameters
K1 K2 RUN

OFF OFF Acceleration/Deceleration
time
1 F0-17,
F0-18 command
E4
K1
OFF ON Acceleration/Deceleration
time
2 F8-03,
F8-04 1 0 Forward

RUN DI1 Forward
RUN
(FWD)
ON OFF Acceleration/Deceleration
time
3 F8-05,
F8-06 K2
0 1 Reverse

RUN DI2 Reverse
RUN
(REV)
ON ON Acceleration/Deceleration
time
4 F8-07,
F8-08
1 1 Stop COM Digital
common
Two
motor
selection
terminals
have
four
state
combinations,
corresponding
to
four
motors,

as
listed
in
the
following
table. 0 0 Stop

Table
5-4
State
combinations
of
two
motor
selection
terminals
As
shown
in
the
preceding
figure,
when
only
K1
is
ON,
the
AC
drive
instructs
forward

Terminal
2 Terminal
1 Selected
Motor Corresponding
Parameters rotation.
When
only
K2
is
ON,
the
AC
drive
instructs
reverse
rotation.
When
K1
and
K2

OFF OFF Motor
1 Group
F1,
Group
F2 are
ON
or
OFF
simultaneously,
the
AC
drive
stops.
OFF ON Motor
2 Group
A2 • 1:
Two-line
mode
2
ON OFF Motor
3 Group
A3
In
this
mode,
DI1
is
RUN
enabled
terminal,
and
DI2
determines
the
running
direction.

ON ON Motor
4 Group
A4 The
parameters
are
set
as
below:

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Function
Code Parameter
Name Value Function
Description

F4-10 DI
filter
time 0.000‒1.000s 0.010s F4-11 Terminal
command
mode 1 Two-line
2

F4-00 DI1
function
selection 1 RUN
enabled
It
is
used
to
set
the
software
filter
time
of
DI
terminal
status.
If
DI
terminals
are
liable
to

F4-01 DI2
function
selection 2 Forward
or
reverse
direction
interference
and
may
cause
malfunction,
increase
the
value
of
this
parameter
to
enhance

the
anti-interference
capability.
However,
increase
of
DI
filter
time
will
reduce
the
response

Figure
5-8
Setting
of
two-line
mode
2
of
DI
terminals.

K1 K2 RUN

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default command
K1
E4
0:
Two-line
mode
1 Forward

1 0 RUN
1:
Two-line
mode
2 DI1 RUN
enabled
F4-11 Terminal
command
mode 0 Reverse
K2
2:
Three-line
mode
1 1 1 RUN Forward
or
reverse

DI2 direction
3:
Three-line
mode
2
0 0 Stop COM Digital
common
This
parameter
is
used
to
set
the
mode
in
which
the
AC
drive
is
controlled
by
external

terminals.
The
following
uses
DI1,
DI2
and
DI3
among
DI1
to
DI10
as
an
example,
with
0 1 Stop
allocating
functions
of
DI1,
DI2
and
DI3
by
setting
F4-00
to
F4-02.

- 108- - 109 -
 Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

As
shown
in
the
preceding
figure,
if
K1
is
ON,
the
AC
drive
instructs
forward
rotation
Figure
5-10
Setting
of
three-line
mode
2

when
K2
is
OFF,
and
instructs
reverse
rotation
when
K2
is
ON.
If
K1
is
OFF,
the
AC

drive
stops. RUN
E4
buttonSB2
•
2:
Three-line
mode
1 DI1 RUN
command
Running
Stop

In
this
mode,
DI3
is
RUN
enabled
terminal,
and
the
direction
is
decided
by
DI1
and
DI2.
K direction buttonSB1
DI3 Stop
running
The
parameters
are
set
as
below:
0 Forward K
Function
Code Parameter
Name Value Function
Description DI2 Running
direction
F4-11 Terminal
command
mode 2 Three-line
1 1 Reverse
F4-00 DI1
function
selection 1 Forward
RUN
(FWD) COM Digital
common

F4-01 DI2
function
selection 2 Reverse
RUN
(REV)

F4-02 DI3
function
selection 3 Three-line
control As
shown
in
the
preceding
figure,
if
SB1
is
ON,
the
AC
drive
starts
running
when
SB2
is

pressed
to
be
ON;
the
AC
drive
instructs
forward
rotation
when
K
is
OFF
and
instructs

Figure
5-9
Setting
of
three-line
mode
1 reverse
rotation
when
K
is
ON.
The
AC
drive
stops
immediately
after
SB1
becomes

OFF.
During
normal
startup
and
running,
SB1
must
remain
ON.
The
AC
drive's
running

E4 state
is
determined
by
the
final
actions
of
SB1,
SB2
and
K.
Forward
SB2
button DI1 Forward
RUN
(FWD)
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Stop
SB1
button DI3 RUN
enabled F4-12 Terminal
UP/DOWN
rate 0.01‒65.535
Hz/s 1.00
Hz/s
Reverse
SB3
button DI2 Reverse
RUN
(REV) It
is
used
to
adjust
the
rate
of
change
of
frequency
when
the
frequency
is
adjusted
by
means

of
terminal
UP/DOWN.
COMDigital
common
•
If
F0-22
(Frequency
reference
resolution)
is
2,
the
setting
range
is
0.001‒65.535
Hz/s.
•
If
F0-22
(Frequency
reference
resolution)
is
1,
the
setting
range
is
0.01‒655.35
Hz/s.
As
shown
in
the
preceding
figure,
if
SB1
is
ON,
the
AC
drive
instructs
forward
rotation

when
SB2
is
pressed
to
be
ON
and
instructs
reverse
rotation
when
SB3
is
pressed
to
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
be
ON.
The
AC
drive
stops
immediately
after
SB1
becomes
OFF.
During
normal
startup
F4-13 AI
curve
1
minimum
input 0.00
V
to
F4-15 0.00
V
and
running,
SB1
must
remain
ON.
The
AC
drive's
running
state
is
determined
by
the

final
actions
on
SB1,
SB2
and
SB3. Corresponding
setting
of
AI

F4-14 -100.00%‒100.0% 0.0%
curve
1
minimum
input
•
3:
Three-line
mode
2
F4-15 AI
curve
1
maximum
input F4-13
to
10.00
V 10.00
V
In
this
mode,
DI3
is
RUN
enabled
terminal.
The
RUN
command
is
given
by
DI1
and
the
Corresponding
setting
of
AI

direction
is
decided
by
DI2.
The
parameters
are
set
as
below: F4-16 -100.00%‒100.0% 100.0%
curve
1
maximum
input
F4-17 AI1
filter
time 0.00‒10.00s 0.10s
Function
Code Parameter
Name Value Function
Description
F4-11 Terminal
command
mode 3 Three-line
2 These
parameters
are
used
to
define
the
relationship
between
the
analog
input
voltage
and

F4-00 DI1
function
selection 1 RUN
enabled the
corresponding
setting.
When
the
analog
input
voltage
exceeds
the
maximum
value
(F4-
15),
the
maximum
value
is
used.
When
the
analog
input
voltage
is
less
than
the
minimum

F4-01 DI2
function
selection 2 Forward
or
reverse
direction
value
(F4-13),
the
value
set
in
F4-34
(Setting
for
AI
less
than
minimum
input)
is
used.
F4-02 DI3
function
selection 3 Three-line
control
When
the
analog
input
is
current
input,
1
mA
current
corresponds
to
0.5
V
voltage.
F4-17
(AI1
filter
time)
is
used
to
set
the
software
filter
time
of
AI1.
If
the
analog
input
is
liable

to
interference,
increase
the
value
of
this
parameter
to
stabilize
the
detected
analog
input.

However,
increase
of
the
AI
filter
time
will
slow
the
response
of
analog
detection.
Set
this

parameter
properly
based
on
actual
conditions.

- 110 - - 111 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

In
different
applications,
100%
of
analog
input
corresponds
to
different
nominal
values.
For
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

details,
refer
to
the
description
of
different
applications.
F4-28 Pulse
minimum
input 0.00
kHz
to
F4-30 0.00
kHz
Two
typical
setting
examples
are
shown
in
the
following
figure.
Corresponding
setting
of

F4-29 -100.00%‒100.0% 0.0%
Figure
5-11
Corresponding
relationship
between
analog
input
and
set
values pulse
minimum
input
F4-30 Pulse
maximum
input F4-28
to
50.00
kHz 50.00
kHz
Corresponding
set
value
Corresponding
setting
of

(frequency,
torque) F4-31 -100.00%‒100.0% 100.0%
pulse
maximum
input
100.0%
F4-32 Pulse
filter
time 0.00‒10.00s 0.10s
These
parameters
are
used
to
set
the
relationship
between
DI5
pulse
input
and

corresponding
settings.
The
pulses
can
only
be
input
by
DI5.
The
method
of
setting
this

function
is
similar
to
that
of
setting
AI1
function.
0
V
(0
mA) AI
10
V
(20
mA) Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting Range Default
Unit's
digit
(AI1
curve
selection)
Corresponding
set
value
(frequency,
torque) Curve
1
(2
points,
see
F4-13
to
F4-16)
100.0% Curve
2
(2
points,
see
F4-18
to
F4-21)
Curve
3
(2
points,
see
F4-23
to
F4-26)
Curve
4
(4
points,
see
A6-00
to
A6-07)
F4-33 AI
curve
selection Curve
5
(4
points,
see
A6-08
to
A6-15) 321
0
V
(0
mA) AI
10
V
(20
mA)
Ten's
digit
(AI2
curve
selection)
Curve
1
to
curve
5
(same
as
AI1)
-100.0% Hundred's
digit
(AI3
curve
selection)
Curve
1
to
curve
5
(same
as
AI1)

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default The
unit's
digit,
ten's
digit
and
hundred's
digit
of
this
parameter
are
respectively
used
to

F4-18 AI
curve
2
minimum
input 0.00
V
to
F4-20 0.00
V select
the
corresponding
curve
of
AI1,
AI2
and
AI3.
Any
of
the
five
curves
can
be
selected

for
AI1,
AI2
and
AI3.
Corresponding
setting
of
AI

F4-19 -100.00%‒100.0% 0.0%
curve
2
minimum
input Curve
1,
curve
2
and
curve
3
are
all
2-point
curves,
set
in
group
F4.
Curve
4
and
curve
5

F4-20 AI
curve
2
maximum
input F4-18
to
10.00
V 10.00
V are
both
4-point
curves,
set
in
group
A6.

Corresponding
setting
of
AI
The
E4
provides
two
AI
terminals
as
standard.
AI3
is
provided
by
an
optional
extension

F4-21 -100.00%‒100.0% 100.0%
curve
2
maximum
input
card.
F4-22 AI2
filter
time 0.00‒10.00s 0.10s Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Unit's
digit
(Setting
for
AI1
less
than

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default minimum
input)
F4-23 AI
curve
3
minimum
input 0.00
V
to
F4-25 0.00
V 0:
Minimum
value
Corresponding
setting
of
AI
1:
0.0%
F4-24 -100.00%‒100.0% 0.0%
curve
3
minimum
input
Setting
for
AI
less
Ten's
digit
(Setting
for
AI2
less
than

F4-25 AI
curve
3
maximum
input F4-23
to
10.00
V 10.00
V F4-34 000
than
minimum
input
minimum
input)
Corresponding
setting
of
AI
0,
1
(same
as
AI1)
F4-26 -100.00%‒100.0% 100.0%
curve
3
maximum
input

Hundred's
digit
(Setting
for
AI3
less

F4-27 AI3
filter
time 0.00‒10.00s 0.10s than
minimum
input)

The
method
of
setting
AI2
and
AI3
functions
is
similar
to
that
of
setting
AI1
function. 0,
1
(same
as
AI1)

- 112 - - 113 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

This
parameter
is
used
to
determine
the
corresponding
setting
when
the
analog
input
These
parameters
are
used
to
set
the
valid
mode
of
DI
terminals.
voltage
is
less
than
the
minimum
value.
The
unit's
digit,
ten's
digit
and
hundred's
digit
of
this

parameter
respectively
correspond
to
the
setting
for
AI2,
AI2
and
AI3. •
0:
High
level
valid

If
the
value
of
a
certain
digit
is
0,
when
analog
input
voltage
is
less
than
the
minimum
input,
The
DI
terminal
is
valid
when
being
connected
with
COM,
and
invalid
when
being

the
corresponding
setting
of
the
minimum
input
(F4-14,
F4-19,
F4-24)
is
used. disconnected
from
COM.

If
the
value
of
a
certain
digit
is
1,
when
analog
input
voltage
is
less
than
the
minimum
input,
•
1:
Low
level
valid
the
corresponding
value
of
this
analog
input
is
0.0%.
The
DI
terminal
is
invalid
when
being
connected
with
COM,
and
invalid
when
being

disconnected
from
COM.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F4-35 DI1
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F4-36 DI2
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s 0:
Voltage
signal
F4-40 AI2
input
signal
selection 0
F4-37 DI3
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s 1:
Current
signal

AI2
supports
voltage/current
output,
which
is
determined
by
jumper.
After
setting
the
jumper,

These
parameters
are
used
to
set
the
delay
time
of
the
AC
drive
when
the
status
of
DI
perform
corresponding
setting
in
F4-40.
terminals
changes.
Currently,
only
DI1,
DI2
and
DI3
support
the
delay
time
function. Group
F5:
Output
Terminals
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
The
E4
provides
an
analog
output
(AO)
terminal,
a
digital
output
(DO)
terminal,
a
relay

Unit's
digit
(DI1
valid
mode) terminal
and
a
FM
terminal
(used
for
high-speed
pulse
output
or
open-collector
switch
signal

0:
High
level
valid output)
as
standard.
If
these
output
terminals
cannot
satisfy
requirements,
use
an
optional

1:
Low
level
valid I/O
extension
card
that
provides
an
AO
terminal
(AO2),
a
relay
terminal
(relay
2)
and
a
DO

terminal
(DO2).
Ten's
digit
(DI2
valid
mode)
0,
1
(same
as
DI1) Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
DI
valid
mode

F4-38 Hundred's
digit
(DI3
valid
mode) 00000 0:
Pulse
output
(FMP)
selection
1 F5-00 FM
terminal
output
mode 0
0,
1
(same
as
DI1) 1:
Switch
signal
output
(FMR)
Thousand's
digit
(DI4
valid
mode)
The
FM
terminal
is
programmable
multiplexing
terminal.
It
can
be
used
for
high-speed
pulse

0,
1
(same
as
DI1) output
(FMP),
with
maximum
frequency
of
50
kHz.
Refer
to
F5-06
for
relevant
functions
of

Ten
thousand's
digit
(DI5
valid
mode) FMP.
It
can
also
be
used
as
open
collector
switch
signal
output
(FMR).

0,
1
(same
as
DI1)
Function
Code Parameter
Name Default
Unit's
digit
(DI6
valid
mode)
F5-01 FMR
function
(open-collector
output
terminal) 0
0,
1
(same
as
DI1)
F5-02 Relay
function
(T/A-T/B-T/C) 2
Ten's
digit
(DI7
valid
mode)
F5-03 Extension
card
relay
function
(P/A-P/B-P/C) 0
0,
1
(same
as
DI1)
Hundred's
digit
(DI8
state) F5-04 DO1
function
selection
(open-collector
output
terminal) 1
DI
valid
mode

F4-39 0,
1
(same
as
DI1) 00000 F5-05 Extension
card
DO2
function 4
selection
2
Thousand's
digit
(DI9
valid
mode)
These
five
parameters
are
used
to
select
the
functions
of
the
five
digital
output
terminals.

0,
1
(same
as
DI1)
T/A-T/B-T/C
and
P/A-P/B-P/C
are
respectively
the
relays
on
the
control
board
and
the

Ten
thousand's
digit
(DI10
valid
extension
card.
mode)
The
functions
of
the
output
terminals
are
described
in
the
following
table.
0,
1
(same
as
DI1)

- 114 - - 115 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Table
5-5
Functions
of
output
terminals
Value Function Description Value Function Description
0 No
output The
terminal
has
no
function. Undervoltage
state
If
the
AC
drive
is
in
undervoltage
state,
the
terminal

19
When
the
AC
drive
is
running
and
has
output
frequency
output becomes
ON.
1 AC
drive
running
(can
be
zero),
the
terminal
becomes
ON. Communication

20 Refer
to
the
communication
protocol.
When
the
AC
drive
stops
due
to
a
fault,
the
terminal
setting
2 Fault
output
(stop)
becomes
ON. 21 Reserved Reserved.
Frequency-level 22 Reserved Reserved.
3 Refer
to
the
descriptions
of
F8-19
and
F8-20.
detection
FDT1
output Zero-speed
running
2
If
the
output
frequency
of
the
AC
drive
is
0,
the
terminal

23
4 Frequency
reached Refer
to
the
descriptions
of
F8-21. (having
output
at
stop) becomes
ON.
In
the
state
of
stop,
the
signal
is
still
ON.
If
the
AC
drive
runs
with
the
output
frequency
of
0,
the
Accumulative
power- If
the
AC
drive
accumulative
power-on
time
(F7-13)

Zero-speed
running
24
5 terminal
becomes
ON.
If
the
AC
drive
is
in
the
stop
state,
on
time
reached exceeds
the
value
set
in
F8-16,
the
terminal
becomes
ON.
(no
output
at
stop)
the
terminal
becomes
OFF. Frequency
level

25 Refer
to
the
descriptions
of
F8-28
and
F8-29.
The
AC
drive
judges
whether
the
motor
load
exceeds
the
detection
FDT2
output
Motor
overload overload
pre-warning
threshold
before
performing
the
26 Frequency
1
reached Refer
to
the
descriptions
of
F8-30
and
F8-31.
6 protection
action.
If
the
pre-warning
threshold
is
exceeded,

pre-warning the
terminal
becomes
ON.
For
motor
overload
parameters,
27 Frequency
2
reached Refer
to
the
descriptions
of
F8-32
and
F8-33.
see
the
descriptions
of
F9-00
to
F9-02. 28 Current
1
reached Refer
to
the
descriptions
of
F8-38
and
F8-39.
AC
drive
overload
pre- The
terminal
becomes
ON
10s
before
the
AC
drive
overload
29 Current
2
reached Refer
to
the
descriptions
of
F8-40
and
F8-41.
7
warning protection
action
is
performed.
If
the
timing
function
(F8-42)
is
valid,
the
terminal
becomes

Set
count
value
The
terminal
becomes
ON
when
the
count
value
reaches
30 Timing
reached ON
after
the
current
running
time
of
the
AC
drive
reaches

8
reached the
value
set
in
FB-08. the
set
time.
Designated
count
The
terminal
becomes
ON
when
the
count
value
reaches
If
AI1
input
is
larger
than
the
value
of
F8-46
(AI1
input

9 AI1
input
limit

value
reached the
value
set
in
FB-09. 31 voltage
upper
limit)
or
lower
than
the
value
of
F8-45
(AI1

exceeded
The
terminal
becomes
ON
when
the
detected
actual
length
input
voltage
lower
limit),
the
terminal
becomes
ON.
10 Length
reached
exceeds
the
value
set
in
FB-05. 32 Load
becoming
0 If
the
load
becomes
0,
the
terminal
becomes
ON.
When
simple
PLC
completes
one
cycle,
the
terminal
If
the
AC
drive
is
in
the
reverse
running
state,
the
terminal

11 PLC
cycle
complete 33 Reverse
running
outputs
a
pulse
signal
with
width
of
250
ms. becomes
ON.
Accumulative
running
If
the
accumulative
running
time
of
the
AC
drive
exceeds
34 Zero
current
state Refer
to
the
descriptions
of
F8-28
and
F8-29.
12
time
reached the
time
set
in
F8-17,
the
terminal
becomes
ON.
If
the
heatsink
temperature
of
the
inverter
module
(F7-07)

If
the
set
frequency
exceeds
the
frequency
upper
limit
or
Module
temperature

35 reaches
the
set
module
temperature
threshold
(F8-47),
the

13 Frequency
limited lower
limit
and
the
output
frequency
of
the
AC
drive
reaches
reached
terminal
becomes
ON.
the
upper
limit
or
lower
limit,
the
terminal
becomes
ON.
Software
current
limit

In
speed
control
mode,
if
the
output
torque
reaches
the
36 Refer
to
the
descriptions
of
F8-36
and
F8-37.
exceeded
14 Torque
limited torque
limit,
the
AC
drive
enters
the
stall
protection
state

and
meanwhile
the
terminal
becomes
ON. Frequency
lower

If
the
running
frequency
reaches
the
lower
limit,
the
terminal

37 limit
reached
(having

If
the
AC
drive
main
circuit
and
control
circuit
become
becomes
ON.
In
the
stop
state,
the
signal
is
still
ON.
output
at
stop)
15 Ready
for
RUN stable,
and
the
AC
drive
detects
no
fault
and
is
ready
for

RUN,
the
terminal
becomes
ON. If
a
fault
occurs
on
the
AC
drive
and
the
AC
drive
continues

38 Alarm
output
to
run,
the
terminal
outputs
the
alarm
signal.
When
the
input
of
AI1
is
larger
than
the
input
of
AI2,
the

16 AI1
larger
than
AI2 If
the
motor
temperature
reaches
the
temperature
set
in

terminal
becomes
ON.
Motor
overheat
F9-58
(Motor
overheat
warning
threshold),
the
terminal

Frequency
upper
limit
If
the
running
frequency
reaches
the
upper
limit,
the
39
17 warning becomes
ON.
You
can
view
the
motor
temperature
by
using

reached terminal
becomes
ON. U0-34.
Frequency
lower
limit
Current
running
time
If
the
current
running
time
of
AC
drive
exceeds
the
value
of

If
the
running
frequency
reaches
the
lower
limit,
the
terminal
40
18 reached
(no
output
at
reached F8-53,
the
terminal
becomes
ON.
becomes
ON.
In
the
stop
state,
the
terminal
becomes
OFF.
stop)

- 116 - - 117 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Default Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

F5-06 FMP
function
selection 0 F5-10 AO1
offset
coefficient -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0%

F5-07 AO1
function
selection 0 F5-11 AO1
gain -10.00‒10.00 1.00

F5-08 AO2
function
selection 1 F5-12 AO2
offset
coefficient -100.0%‒100.0% 0.00%

F5-13 AO2
gain -10.00‒10.00 1.00

The
output
pulse
frequency
of
the
FMP
terminal
ranges
from
0.01
kHz
to
"Maximum
FMP

output
frequency"
(F5-09).
The
value
of
F5-09
is
between
0.01
kHz
and
100.00
kHz. These
parameters
are
used
to
correct
the
zero
drift
of
analog
output
and
the
output

The
output
range
of
AO1
and
AO2
is
0‒10
V
or
0‒20
mA.
The
relationship
between
pulse
amplitude
deviation.
They
can
also
be
used
to
define
the
desired
AO
curve.
and
analog
output
ranges
and
corresponding
functions
is
listed
in
the
following
table. If
"b"
represents
zero
offset,
"k"
represents
gain,
"Y"
represents
actual
output,
and
"X"

Table
6-6
Relationship
between
pulse
and
analog
output
ranges
and
corresponding
represents
standard
output,
the
actual
output
is:
Y
=
kX
+
b.
functions The
zero
offset
coefficient
100%
of
AO1
and
AO2
corresponds
to
10
V
(or
20
mA).
The

standard
output
refers
to
the
value
corresponding
to
the
analog
output
of
0
to
10
V
(or
0
to

Range
(Corresponding
to
Pulse
or
Analog
20
mA)
with
no
zero
offset
or
gain
adjustment.
Value Function
Output
Range
0.0%‒100.0%)
For
example,
if
the
analog
output
is
used
as
the
running
frequency,
and
it
is
expected
that

0 Running
frequency 0
to
maximum
output
frequency
the
output
is
8
V
when
the
frequency
is
0
and
3
V
at
the
maximum
frequency,
the
gain
shall

1 Set
frequency 0
to
maximum
output
frequency be
set
to
-0.50,
and
the
zero
offset
shall
be
set
to
80%.
2 Output
current 0
to
2
times
of
rated
motor
current
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
3 Output
torque
(absolute
value) 0
to
2
times
of
rated
motor
torque
F5-17 FMR
output
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s
4 Output
power 0
to
2
times
of
rated
power
F5-18 Relay
1
output
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s
5 Output
voltage 0
to
1.2
times
of
rated
AC
drive
voltage
6 Pulse
input 0.01‒100.00
kHz F5-19 Relay
2
output
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s

7 AI1 0‒10
V F5-20 DO1
output
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s

8 AI2 0‒10
V
(or
0‒20
mA) F5-21 DO2
output
delay
time 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s
9 AI3 0‒0
V
These
parameters
are
used
to
set
the
delay
time
of
output
terminals
FMR,
relay
1,
relay
2,

10 Length 0
to
maximum
set
length
DO1
and
DO2
from
status
change
to
actual
output.
11 Count
value 0
to
maximum
count
value
12 Communication
setting 0.0%‒100.0% Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

0
to
rotational
speed
corresponding
to
Unit's
digit
(FMR
valid
mode)
13 Motor
rotational
speed
maximum
output
frequency 0:
Positive
logic
14 Output
current 0.0‒1000.0
A 1:
Negative
logic
15 Output
voltage 0.0‒000.0
V Ten's
digit
(Relay
1
valid
mode)
-2
times
of
rated
motor
torque
to
2
times
of
0,
1
(same
as
FMR)
16 Output
torque
(actual
value)
rated
motor
torque DO
valid
mode

F5-22 Hundred's
digit
(Relay
2
valid
mode) 00000
selection
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default 0,
1
(same
as
FMR)

F5-09 Maximum
FMP
output
frequency 0.01‒100.00
kHz 50.00
kHz Thousand's
digit
(DO1
valid
mode)

0,
1
(same
as
FMR)
If
the
FM
terminal
is
used
for
pulse
output,
this
parameter
is
used
to
set
the
maximum

frequency
of
pulse
output. Ten
thousand's
digit
(DO2
valid
mode)
0,
1
(same
as
FMR)

- 118 - - 119 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

•
0:
From
frequency
at
stop
It
is
used
to
set
the
logic
of
output
terminals
FMR,
relay
1,
relay
2,
DO1
and
DO2.
It
is
the
commonly
selected
mode.
•
0:
Positive
logic
•
1:
From
zero
frequency
The
output
terminal
is
valid
when
being
connected
with
COM,
and
invalid
when
being

disconnected
from
COM. It
is
applicable
to
restart
after
a
long
time
of
power
failure.
•
1:
Positive
logic •
2:
From
the
maximum
frequency
The
output
terminal
is
invalid
when
being
connected
with
COM,
and
valid
when
being
It
is
applicable
to
the
power-generating
load.
disconnected
from
COM.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F6-02 Rotational
speed
tracking
speed 1‒100 20
Group
F6:
Start/Stop
Control
In
the
rotational
speed
tracking
restart
mode,
select
the
rotational
speed
tracking
speed.
The

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default larger
the
value
is,
the
faster
the
tracking
is.
However,
too
large
value
may
cause
unreliable

0:
Direct
start tracking.
F6-00 Start
mode 1:
Rotational
speed
tracking
restart 0
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
2:
Pre-excited
start
(asynchronous
motor)
F6-03 Startup
frequency 0.00‒10.00
Hz 0.00
Hz
•
0:
Direct
start
F6-04 Startup
frequency
holding
time 0.0‒100.0s 0.0s
‒
If
the
DC
braking
time
is
set
to
0,
the
AC
drive
starts
to
run
at
the
startup

To
ensure
the
motor
torque
at
AC
drive
startup,
set
a
proper
startup
frequency.
In
addition,

frequency.
to
build
excitation
when
the
motor
starts
up,
the
startup
frequency
must
be
held
for
a
certain

‒
If
the
DC
braking
time
is
not
0,
the
AC
drive
performs
DC
braking
first
and
period.
then
starts
to
run
at
the
startup
frequency.
It
is
applicable
to
small-inertia
load

application
where
the
motor
is
likely
to
rotate
at
startup. The
startup
frequency
(F6-03)
is
not
restricted
by
the
frequency
lower
limit.
If
the
set
target

•
1:
Rotational
speed
tracking
restart frequency
is
lower
than
the
startup
frequency,
the
AC
drive
will
not
start
and
stays
in
the

standby
state.
The
AC
drive
judges
the
rotational
speed
and
direction
of
the
motor
first
and
then
starts

at
the
tracked
frequency.
Such
smooth
start
has
no
impact
on
the
rotating
motor.
It
During
switchover
between
forward
rotation
and
reverse
rotation,
the
startup
frequency

is
applicable
to
the
restart
upon
instantaneous
power
failure
of
large-inertia
load.
To
holding
time
is
disabled.
The
holding
time
is
not
included
in
the
acceleration
time
but
in
the

ensure
the
performance
of
rotational
speed
tracking
restart,
set
the
motor
parameters
running
time
of
simple
PLC.
in
group
F1
correctly. Example
1:
•
2:
Pre-excited
start
(asynchronous
motor)
F0-03
=
0 The
frequency
source
is
digital
setting.
It
is
valid
only
for
asynchronous
motor
and
used
for
building
the
magnetic
field
before

F0-08
=
2.00
Hz The
digital
setting
frequency
is
2.00
Hz.
the
motor
runs.
For
pre-excited
current
and
pre-excited
time,
see
parameters
of
F6-05

and
F6-06. F6-03
=
5.00
Hz The
startup
frequency
is
5.00
Hz.

‒
If
the
pre-excited
time
is
0,
the
AC
drive
cancels
pre-excitation
and
starts
to
run
at
F6-04
=
2.0s The
startup
frequency
holding
time
is
2.0s.

startup
frequency. In
this
example,
the
AC
drive
stays
in
the
standby
state
and
the
output
frequency
is
0.00
Hz.
‒
If
the
pre-excited
time
is
not
0,
the
AC
drive
pre-excites
first
before
startup,
Example
2:
improving
the
dynamic
response
of
the
motor.
F0-03
=
0 The
frequency
source
is
digital
setting.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F0-08
=
10.0
0
Hz The
digital
setting
frequency
is
10.00
Hz.
0:
From
frequency
at
stop
Rotational
speed
F6-03
=
5.00
Hz The
startup
frequency
is
5.00
Hz.
F6-01 1:
From
zero
speed 0
tracking
mode
2:
From
maximum
frequency F6-04
=
2.0s The
startup
frequency
holding
time
is
2.0s.

To
complete
the
rotational
speed
tracking
process
within
the
shortest
time,
select
the
proper
In
this
example,
the
AC
drive
accelerates
to
5.00
Hz,
and
then
accelerates
to
the
set

mode
in
which
the
AC
drive
tracks
the
motor
rotational
speed. frequency
10.00
Hz
after
2s.

- 120 - - 121 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes
When
the
set
frequency
is
higher
than
the
rated
frequency,
the
acceleration/
deceleration
time
is:
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default f 2
t ( 4 ( )  5 ) T
F6-05 Startup
DC
braking
current/Pre-excited
current 0%‒100% 0% 9 fb 9
F6-06 Startup
DC
braking
time/Pre-excited
time 0.0‒100.0s 0.0s
In
the
formula,
f
is
the
set
frequency, fb
is
the
rated
motor
frequency
and
T
is
the

Startup
DC
braking
is
generally
used
during
restart
of
the
AC
drive
after
the
rotating
motor

stops.
Pre-excitation
is
used
to
make
the
AC
drive
build
magnetic
field
for
the
asynchronous
acceleration
time
from
0
Hz
to
fb .
motor
before
startup
to
improve
the
responsiveness.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Startup
DC
braking
is
valid
only
for
direct
start
(F6-00
=
0).
In
this
case,
the
AC
drive

Time
proportion
of
S-curve

performs
DC
braking
at
the
set
startup
DC
braking
current.
After
the
startup
DC
braking
F6-08 0.0%
to
(100.0%
‒
F6-09) 30.0%
start
segment
time,
the
AC
drive
starts
to
run.
If
the
startup
DC
braking
time
is
0,
the
AC
drive
starts

directly
without
DC
braking.
The
larger
the
startup
DC
braking
current
is,
the
larger
the
Time
proportion
of
S-curve

F6-09 0.0%
to
(100.0%
‒
F6-08) 30.0%
braking
force
is. end
segment

If
the
startup
mode
is
pre-excited
start
(F6-00
=
3),
the
AC
drive
builds
magnetic
field
based
These
two
parameters
respectively
define
the
time
proportions
of
the
start
segment
and
the

on
the
set
pre-excited
current.
After
the
pre-excited
time,
the
AC
drive
starts
to
run.
If
the
end
segment
of
S-curve
acceleration/deceleration.
They
must
satisfy
the
requirement:
F6-08

pre-excited
time
is
0,
the
AC
drive
starts
directly
without
pre-excitation. +
F6-09
≤
100.0%.
The
startup
DC
braking
current
or
pre-excited
current
is
a
percentage
relative
to
the
base
In
Figure
5-12,
t1
is
the
time
defined
in
F6-08,
within
which
the
slope
of
the
output
frequency

value. change
increases
gradually.
t2
is
the
time
defined
in
F6-09,
within
which
the
slope
of
the

output
frequency
change
gradually
decreases
to
0.
Within
the
time
between
t1
and
t2,

•
If
the
rated
motor
current
is
less
than
or
equal
to
80%
of
the
rated
AC
drive
current,
the
the
slope
of
the
output
frequency
change
remains
unchanged,
that
is,
linear
acceleration/
base
value
is
the
rated
motor
current. deceleration.
•
If
the
rated
motor
current
is
greater
than
80%
of
the
rated
AC
drive
current,
the
base
Figure
5-12
S-curve
acceleration/deceleration
A
value
is
80%
of
the
rated
AC
drive
current.
Output

frequency
(Hz)
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
0:
Linear
acceleration/deceleration Set
frequency
(f)
Acceleration/
F6-07 1:
S-curve
acceleration/deceleration
A 0
Deceleration
mode
2:
S-curve
acceleration/deceleration
B

It
is
used
to
set
the
frequency
change
mode
during
the
AC
drive
start
and
stop
process.
•
0:
Linear
acceleration/deceleration
Time
(t)
The
output
frequency
increases
or
decreases
in
linear
mode.
The
E4
provides
four

t1 t2 t1 t2
group
of
acceleration/deceleration
time,
which
can
be
selected
by
using
F4-00
to
F4-08.
•
1:
S-curve
acceleration/deceleration
A Figure
5-13
S-curve
acceleration/deceleration
B
The
output
frequency
increases
or
decreases
along
the
S
curve.
This
mode
is
generally
Output

frequency
(Hz)
used
in
the
applications
where
start
and
stop
processes
are
relatively
smooth,
such
as

elevator
and
conveyor
belt.
F6-08
and
F6-09
respectively
define
the
time
proportions
of
Set
frequency
(f)
the
start
segment
and
the
end
segment.
•
2:
S-curve
acceleration/deceleration
B
Rated
frequency
(fb)

In
this
curve,
the
rated
motor
frequency fb
is
always
the
inflexion
point.
This
mode
is

Time
(t)
usually
used
in
applications
where
acceleration/deceleration
is
required
at
the
speed
T
higher
than
the
rated
frequency.

- 122 - - 123 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default •
F5-14
(Stop
DC
braking
time)

0:
Decelerate
to
stop This
parameter
specifies
the
holding
time
of
DC
braking.
If
it
is
set
to
0,
DC
braking
is

F6-10 Stop
mode 0 cancelled.
1:
Coast
to
stop
The
stop
DC
braking
process
is
shown
in
the
following
figure.
•
0:
Decelerate
to
stop
Figure
5-14
Stop
DC
braking
process
After
the
stop
command
is
enabled,
the
AC
drive
decreases
the
output
frequency

according
to
the
deceleration
time
and
stops
when
the
frequency
decreases
to
zero.
Output

frequency
(Hz)
•
1:
Coast
to
stop
After
the
stop
command
is
enabled,
the
AC
drive
immediately
stops
the
output.
The

motor
will
coast
to
stop
based
on
the
mechanical
inertia.
Initialfrequencyof
stopDC
braking
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Initial
frequency
of
stop
DC
0.00
Hz
to
maximum
Time
(t)
F6-11 0.00
Hz
braking frequency
Effective
value
of

output
voltage
F6-12 Waiting
time
of
stop
DC
braking 0.0‒36.0s 0.0s

F6-13 Stop
DC
braking
current 0%‒100% 0% Waiting
timeof

stopDC
braking

F6-14 Stop
DC
braking
time 0.0‒36.0s 0.0s
Stop
DC
braking
•
F6-11
(Initial
frequency
of
stop
DC
braking)
During
the
process
of
decelerating
to
stop,
the
AC
drive
starts
DC
braking
when
the
Time
t

running
frequency
is
lower
than
the
value
set
in
F6-11. Stop
DC

RUN
braking
time
command
•
F6-12
(Waiting
time
of
stop
DC
braking)
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
When
the
running
frequency
decreases
to
the
initial
frequency
of
stop
DC
braking,
the

AC
drive
stops
output
for
a
certain
period
and
then
starts
DC
braking.
This
prevents
F6-15 Brake
use
ratio 0%‒100% 100%
faults
such
as
overcurrent
caused
due
to
DC
braking
at
high
speed.
It
is
valid
only
for
the
AC
drive
with
internal
braking
unit
and
used
to
adjust
the
duty
ratio
of

•
F6-13
(Stop
DC
braking
current) the
braking
unit.
The
larger
the
value
of
this
parameter
is,
the
better
the
braking
result
will

be.
However,
too
larger
value
causes
great
fluctuation
of
the
AC
drive
bus
voltage
during
the

This
parameter
specifies
the
output
current
at
DC
braking
and
is
a
percentage
relative

braking
process.
to
the
base
value.
‒
If
the
rated
motor
current
is
less
than
or
equal
to
80%
of
the
rated
AC
drive

current,
the
base
value
is
the
rated
motor
current.
‒
If
the
rated
motor
current
is
greater
than
80%
of
the
rated
AC
drive
current,
the

base
value
is
80%
of
the
rated
AC
drive
current.

- 124 - - 125 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Group
F7:
Operation
Panel
and
Display Function
Parameter

Setting
Range Default
Code Name
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
0000‒FFFF
0:
MF.K
key
disabled
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1:
Switchover
between
operation
panel

control
and
remote
command
control

Running
frequency1


(Hz)
MF.K
Key
function
(terminal
or
communication)
F7-01 0 Set
frequency
(Hz)
selection 2:
Switchover
between
forward
rotation
Bus
voltage
(V)
and
reverse
rotation Output
voltage
(V)
Output
current
(A)
3:
Forward
JOG
Output
power
(kW)
4:
Reverse
JOG Output
torque
(%)
DI
input
status
(V)
MF.K
key
refers
to
multifunctional
key.
You
can
set
the
function
of
the
MF.K
key
by
using
this
LED
display
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
parameter.
You
can
perform
switchover
by
using
this
key
both
in
stop
or
running
state. F7-03 running

parameters
1 1F
•
0:
MF.K
key
disabled DO
output
status

This
key
is
disabled. AI1
voltage
(V)
AI2
voltage
(V)
•
1:
Switchover
between
operation
panel
control
and
remote
command
control
(terminal
AI3
voltage
(V)
or
communication) Count
value
Length
value
You
can
perform
switchover
from
the
current
command
source
to
the
operation
panel
Load
speed
display
control
(local
operation).
If
the
current
command
source
is
operation
panel
control,
this
PID
setting
key
is
invalid.
If
a
parameter
needs
to
be
displayed
during
the
running,

•
2:
Switchover
between
forward
rotation
and
reverse
rotation set
the
corresponding
bit
to
1,
and
set
F7-03
to
the

hexadecimal
equivalent
of
this
binary
number.
You
can
change
the
direction
of
the
frequency
reference
by
using
the
MF.K
key.
It
is

valid
only
when
the
current
command
source
is
operation
panel
control.
•
3:
Forward
JOG
You
can
perform
forward
JOG
(FJOG)
by
using
the
MF.K
key.
•
4:
Reverse
JOG
You
can
perform
reverse
JOG
(FJOG)
by
using
the
MF.K
key.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

0:
STOP/RESET
key
enabled
only
in

STOP/RESET
key
operation
panel
control
F7-02 1
function 1:
STOP/RESET
key
enabled
in
any

operation
mode

- 126 - - 127 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Parameter
Function
Parameter

Setting
Range Default Setting
Range Default
Code Name Code Name

0000‒FFFF 0000‒FFFF

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PID
feedback
Set
frequency
(Hz)
PLC
stage
Pulse
setting
frequency
(kHz) Bus
voltage
(V)
Running
frequency2
DI
input
status
Remaining
running
time DO
output
status
AI1
voltage
before
correction AI1
voltage
(V)
AI2
voltage
before
correction
AI2
voltage
(V)
AI3
voltage
before
correction
AI3
voltage
(V)
LED
display

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Count
value
F7-04 running
0 LED

parameters
2 F7-05 display
stop
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 0
Linear
speed parameters
Current
power-on
time
(Hour)
Current
running
time
(Minute) Length
value
Pulse
setting
frequency
(Hz) PLC
stage
Communication
setting
value Load
speed
Encoder
feedback
speed
(Hz) PID
setting
Main
frequency
X
display
(Hz) Pulse
setting
frequency
(kHz)
Auxiliary

frequency
Y
display
(Hz) Reserved
If
a
parameter
needs
to
be
displayed
during
the
running,
Reserved
set
the
corresponding
bit
to
1,
and
set
F7-03
to
the
Reserved
hexadecimal
equivalent
of
this
binary
number.
If
a
parameter
needs
to
be
displayed
during
the
running,

These
two
parameters
are
used
to
set
the
parameters
that
can
be
viewed
when
the
AC
set
the
corresponding
bit
to
1,
and
set
F7-05
to
the

hexadecimal
equivalent
of
this
binary
number.
drive
is
in
the
running
state.
You
can
view
a
maximum
of
32
running
state
parameters
that

are
displayed
from
the
lowest
bit
of
F7-03. Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F7-06 Load
speed
display
coefficient 0.0001‒6.5000 1.0000

This
parameter
is
used
to
adjust
the
relationship
between
the
output
frequency
of
the
AC

drive
and
the
load
speed.
For
details,
see
the
description
of
F7-12.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

F7-07 Heatsink
temperature
of
inverter
module 0.0‒100.0°C -

It
is
used
to
display
the
insulated
gate
bipolar
transistor
(IGBT)
temperature
of
the
inverter

module,
and
the
IGBT
overheat
protection
value
of
the
inverter
module
depends
on
the

model.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

F7-08 Temporary
software
version 0.0‒100.0°C -

IIt
is
used
to
display
the
temporary
software
version
of
the
control
board.

- 128 - - 129 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F8-03 Acceleration
time
2 0.0‒6500.0s Model
dependent
F7-09 Accumulative
running
time 0‒65535
h -
It
is
used
to
display
the
accumulative
running
time
of
the
AC
drive.
After
the
accumulative
F8-04 Deceleration
time
2 0.0‒6500.0s Model
dependent
running
time
reaches
the
value
set
in
F8-17,
the
terminal
with
the
digital
output
function
12
F8-05 Acceleration
time
3 0.0‒6500.0s Model
dependent
becomes
ON.
F8-06 Deceleration
time
3 0.0‒6500.0s Model
dependent
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F8-07 Acceleration
time
4 0.0‒500.0s Model
dependent
F7-10 Product
number AC
drive
product
number -
F8-08 Deceleration
time
4 0.0‒6500.0s Model
dependent
F7-11 Software
version Software
version
of
control
board -
0:
0
decimal
place The
E4
provides
a
total
of
four
groups
of
acceleration/deceleration
time,
that
is,

Number
of
decimal
1:
1
decimal
place the
preceding
three
groups
and
the
group
defined
by
F0-17
and
F0-18.
Definitions
of

F7-12 places
for
load
speed
1 four
groups
are
completely
the
same.
You
can
switch
over
between
the
four
groups
of

display 2:
2
decimal
places
acceleration/deceleration
time
through
different
state
combinations
of
DI
terminals.
For
more

3:
3
decimal
places details,
see
the
descriptions
of
F4-01
to
F4-05.
F7-12
is
used
to
set
the
number
of
decimal
places
for
load
speed
display.
The
following

gives
an
example
to
explain
how
to
calculate
the
load
speed: Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

Assume
that
F7-06
(Load
speed
display
coefficient)
is
2.000
and
F7-12
is
2
(2
decimal
F8-09 Jump
frequency
1 0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency 0.00
Hz
places).
When
the
running
frequency
of
the
AC
drive
is
40.00
Hz,
the
load
speed
is
40.00
x
F8-10 Jump
frequency
2 0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency 0.00
Hz
2.000
=
80.00
(display
of
2
decimal
places).
F8-11 Frequency
jump
amplitude 0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency 0.00
Hz
If
the
AC
drive
is
in
the
stop
state,
the
load
speed
is
the
speed
corresponding
to
the
set

frequency,
namely,
"set
load
speed".
If
the
set
frequency
is
50.00
Hz,
the
load
speed
in
the
If
the
set
frequency
is
within
the
frequency
jump
range,
the
actual
running
frequency
is
the

stop
state
is
50.00
x
2.000
=
100.00
(display
of
2
decimal
places). jump
frequency
close
to
the
set
frequency.
Setting
the
jump
frequency
helps
to
avoid
the

mechanical
resonance
point
of
the
load.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F7-13 Accumulative
power-on
time 0‒65535
h 0
h
The
E4
supports
two
jump
frequencies.
If
both
are
set
to
0,
the
frequency
jump
function

is
disabled.
The
principle
of
the
jump
frequencies
and
jump
amplitude
is
shown
in
the

It
is
used
to
display
the
accumulative
power-on
time
of
the
AC
drive
since
the
delivery.
If
the
following
figure.
time
reaches
the
set
power-on
time
(F8-17),
the
terminal
with
the
digital
output
function
24

Figure
5-15
Principle
of
the
jump
frequencies
and
jump
amplitude
becomes
ON.
Output

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default frequency
(Hz)
F7-14 Accumulative
power
consumption 0‒65535
kWh /

It
is
used
to
display
the
accumulative
power
consumption
of
the
AC
drive
until
now.

Group
F8:
Auxiliary
Functions Jump
Frequency
jump
amplitude

frequency
2
Frequency
jump
amplitude
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F8-00 JOG
running
frequency 0.00
Hz
to
maximum
frequency 2.00
Hz
Jump
Frequency
jump
amplitude
F8-01 JOG
acceleration
time 0.0‒6500.0s 20.0s frequency
1
Frequency
jump
amplitude
F8-02 JOG
deceleration
time 0.0‒6500.0s 20.0s

These
parameters
are
used
to
define
the
set
frequency
and
acceleration/deceleration
time

of
the
AC
drive
when
jogging.
The
startup
mode
is
"Direct
start"
(F6-00
=
0)
and
the
stop
Time
(t)

mode
is
"Decelerate
to
stop"
(F6-10
=
0)
during
jogging.
- 130 - - 131 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

If
the
accumulative
power-on
time
(F7-13)
reaches
the
value
set
in
this
parameter,
the

F8-12 Forward/Reverse
rotation
dead-zone
time 0.0‒3000.0s 0.0s corresponding
DO
terminal
becomes
ON.

It
is
used
to
set
the
time
when
the
output
is
0
Hz
at
transition
of
the
AC
drive
forward
rotation
For
example,
combining
virtual
DI/DO
functions,
to
implement
the
function
that
the
AC
drive

and
reverse
rotation,
as
shown
in
the
following
figure. reports
an
alarm
when
the
actual
accumulative
power-on
time
reaches
the
threshold
of
100

hours,
perform
the
setting
as
follows:
Figure
5-16
Forward/Reverse
rotation
dead-zone
time
1)
Set
virtual
DI1
to
user-defined
fault
1:
A1-00
=
44.
Output

frequency 2)
Set
that
the
valid
state
of
virtual
DI1
is
from
virtual
DO1:
A1-05
=
0000.
(Hz)
3)
Set
virtual
DO1
to
power-on
time
reached:
A1-11=
24.
Forward

rotation 4)
Set
the
accumulative
power-on
time
threshold
to
100
h:
F8-16
=
100
h.
Then,
the
AC
drive
reports
Err27
when
the
accumulative
power-on
time
reaches
100
hours.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

F8-17 Accumulative
running
time
threshold 0‒65000
h 0
h

It
is
used
to
set
the
accumulative
running
time
threshold
of
the
AC
drive.
If
the
accumulative

Reverse

rotation
running
time
(F7-09)
reaches
the
value
set
in
this
parameter,
the
corresponding
DO
terminal

Dead -zone

time becomes
ON.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

0:
Enabled 0:
No
F8-13 Reverse
control 0 F8-18 Startup
protection 0
1:
Disabled 1:
Yes

It
is
used
to
set
whether
the
AC
drive
allows
reverse
rotation.
In
the
applications
where
This
parameter
is
used
to
set
whether
to
enable
the
safety
protection.
If
it
is
set
to
1,
the
AC

reverse
rotation
is
prohibited,
set
this
parameter
to
1. drive
does
not
respond
to
the
run
command
valid
upon
AC
drive
power-on
(for
example,
an

input
terminal
is
ON
before
power-on).
The
AC
drive
responds
only
after
the
run
command

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default is
cancelled
and
becomes
valid
again.

Running mode when set 0: Run at frequency lower limit In
addition,
the
AC
drive
does
not
respond
to
the
run
command
valid
upon
fault
reset
of
the

F8-14 frequency lower than 1: Stop 0 AC
drive.
The
run
protection
can
be
disabled
only
after
the
run
command
is
cancelled.
frequency lower limit 2: Run at zero speed In
this
way,
the
motor
can
be
protected
from
responding
to
run
commands
upon
power-on
or

fault
reset
in
unexpected
conditions.
It
is
used
to
set
the
AC
drive
running
mode
when
the
set
frequency
is
lower
than
the

frequency
lower
limit.
The
E4
provides
three
running
modes
to
satisfy
requirements
of

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
various
applications.
Frequency
detection
value
0.00
Hz
to
maximum

F8-19 50.00
Hz
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default (FDT1) frequency

F8-15 Droop control 0.00–10.00 Hz 0.00 Hz Frequency
detection

F8-20 0.0%‒100.0%
(FDT1
level) 5.0%
hysteresis
(FDT
hysteresis
1)
This
function
is
used
for
balancing
the
workload
allocation
when
multiple
motors
are
used

to
drive
the
same
load.
The
output
frequency
of
the
AC
drives
decreases
as
the
load
If
the
running
frequency
is
higher
than
the
value
of
F8-19,
the
corresponding
DO
terminal

increases.
You
can
reduce
the
workload
of
the
motor
under
load
by
decreasing
the
output
becomes
ON.
If
the
running
frequency
is
lower
than
value
of
F8-19,
the
DO
terminal
goes

frequency
for
this
motor,
implementing
workload
balancing
between
multiple
motors. OFF

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

F8-16 Accumulative
power-on
time
threshold 0‒65000
h 0
h

- 132 - - 133 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

These
two
parameters
are
respectively
used
to
set
the
detection
value
of
output
frequency
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

and
hysteresis
value
upon
cancellation
of
the
output.
The
value
of
F8-20
is
a
percentage
of

the
hysteresis
frequency
to
the
frequency
detection
value
(F8-19). Jump
frequency
during
0:
Disabled
F8-22 0
acceleration/deceleration 1:
Enabled
The
FDT
function
is
shown
in
the
following
figure.
Figure
5-17
FDT
level It
is
used
to
set
whether
the
jump
frequencies
are
valid
during
acceleration/deceleration.
When
the
jump
frequencies
are
valid
during
acceleration/deceleration,
and
the
running

Output
frequency
(Hz)
frequency
is
within
the
frequency
jump
range,
the
actual
running
frequency
will
jump
over

FDT
level FDT
hysteresis the
set
frequency
jump
amplitude
(rise
directly
from
the
lowest
jump
frequency
to
the
highest

=
F8-19
x
F8-20 jump
frequency).
The
following
figure
shows
the
diagram
when
the
jump
frequencies
are

valid
during
acceleration/deceleration.
Figure
5-19
Diagram
when
the
jump
frequencies
are
valid
during
acceleration/deceleration
Frequency
reached
Time
(t) Output

detection
signal
frequency
(Hz)
(DO,
relay)

ON

Jump Frequency
jump
amplitude
Time
(t) frequency
2 Frequency
jump
amplitude

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

Detection
range
of
frequency
0.00‒100%
(maximum
Jump
Frequency
jump
amplitude
F8-21 0.0% frequency
1
reached frequency) Frequency
jump
amplitude

If
the
AC
drive
running
frequency
is
within
the
certain
range
of
the
set
frequency,
the

corresponding
DO
terminal
becomes
ON. Frequency jump amplitude Time
(t)
Frequency jump amplitude
This
parameter
is
used
to
set
the
range
within
which
the
output
frequency
is
detected

to
reach
the
set
frequency.
The
value
of
this
parameter
is
a
percentage
relative
to
the
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
maximum
frequency.
The
detection
range
of
frequency
reached
is
shown
in
the
following

Frequency
switchover
point
between
0.00
Hz
to
maximum

figure. F8-25 0.00
Hz
acceleration
time
1
and
acceleration
time
2 frequency
Figure
5-18
Detection
range
of
frequency
reached Frequency
switchover
point
between
0.00
to
maximum

F8-26 0.00
Hz
deceleration
time
1
and
deceleration
time
2 frequency
Output
frequency
(Hz)
This
function
is
valid
when
motor
1
is
selected
and
acceleration/deceleration
time
switchover

Set
frequency Detection
is
not
performed
by
means
of
DI
terminal.
It
is
used
to
select
different
groups
of
acceleration/
range
deceleration
time
based
on
the
running
frequency
range
rather
than
DI
terminal
during
the

running
process
of
the
AC
drive.

Frequency
reached
Time
(t)
detection
signal

ON ON

- 134 - - 135 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Figure
5-20
Acceleration/deceleration
time
switchover
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Output

frequency
(Hz) Any
frequency
reaching
0.0%‒100.0%
(maximum

F8-33 0.0%
detection
amplitude
2 frequency)

Set
frequency
If
the
output
frequency
of
the
AC
drive
is
within
the
positive
and
negative
amplitudes
of
the

any
frequency
reaching
detection
value,
the
corresponding
DO
becomes
ON.
F8-25
The
E4
provides
two
groups
of
any
frequency
reaching
detection
parameters,
including

F8-26
frequency
detection
value
and
detection
amplitude,
as
shown
in
the
following
figure.
Time
(t)
Figure
5-21
Any
frequency
reaching
detection
Running
frequency
Acceleration
Deceleration

time
2 time
2

Acceleration
Deceleration
Frequency
reaching

Any
frequency
detection
amplitude
time
1 time
1
reaching Frequency
reaching

During
acceleration,
if
the
running
frequency
is
smaller
than
the
value
of
F8-25,
acceleration
detection
amplitude
time
2
is
selected.
If
the
running
frequency
is
larger
than
the
value
of
F8-25,
acceleration

time
1
is
selected.
Time
During
deceleration,
if
the
running
frequency
is
larger
than
the
value
of
F8-26,
deceleration

time
1
is
selected.
If
the
running
frequency
is
smaller
than
the
value
of
F8-26,
deceleration
ON ON
time
2
is
selected. Any
frequency
reaching
OFF OFF OFF
detection
signal
DO
or
relay
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
0:
Disabled
F8-27 Terminal
JOG
preferred 0 0.0%‒300.0%
(rated

1:
Enabled F8-34 Zero
current
detection
level 5.0%
motor
current)
It
is
used
to
set
whether
terminal
JOG
is
preferred. F8-35 Zero
current
detection
delay
time 0.00‒600.00s 0.10s
If
terminal
JOG
is
preferred,
the
AC
drive
switches
to
terminal
JOG
running
state
when
there
If
the
output
current
of
the
AC
drive
is
equal
to
or
less
than
the
zero
current
detection
level

is
a
terminal
JOG
command
during
the
running
process
of
the
AC
drive. and
the
duration
exceeds
the
zero
current
detection
delay
time,
the
corresponding
DO

becomes
ON.
The
zero
current
detection
is
shown
in
the
following
figure.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
0.00
to
maximum
50.00
Hz Figure
5-22
Zero
current
detection
F8-28 Frequency
detection
value
(FDT2)
frequency
Output
current
Frequency
detection
hysteresis
0.0%‒100.0%
(FDT2
5.0%
F8-29
(FDT hysteresis 2) level)

The
frequency
detection
function
is
the
same
as
FDT1
function.
For
details,
refer
to
the
Zero
current

detection
level
descriptions
of
F8-19
and
F8-20. F8-34 Time

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

Zero
current

Any
frequency
reaching
0.00
Hz
to
maximum
detection
signal
F8-30 50.00
Hz
detection
value
1 frequency
Any
frequency
reaching
0.0%‒100.0%
(maximum
Time
F8-31 0.0%
detection
amplitude
1 frequency)
Any
frequency
reaching
0.00
Hz
to
maximum
Zero
current

F8-32 50.00
Hz detection
delay
time

detection
value
2 frequency F8-35

- 136 - - 137 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Figure
5-24
Any
current
reaching
detection

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

Output

0.0%
(no
detection) current
Any
current
reaching
amplitude
F8-36 Output
overcurrent
threshold 0.1%‒300.0%
(rated
200.0%
Any
current
Any
current
reaching
amplitude
motor
current) reaching

Output
overcurrent
detection

F8-37 0.00‒600.00s 0.00s
delay
time

If
the
output
current
of
the
AC
drive
is
equal
to
or
higher
than
the
overcurrent
threshold
and

ON ON ON
the
duration
exceeds
the
detection
delay
time,
the
corresponding
DO
becomes
ON.
The


Any
current
reaching
OFF OFF OFF
output
overcurrent
detection
function
is
shown
in
the
following
figure. detection
signal
DO
or
relay
Figure
5-23
Output
overcurrent
detection
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Output
0:
Disabled
current F8-42 Timing
function 0
1:
Enabled
Output
overcurrent

0:
F8-44
threshold

F8-36 1:
AI1
2:
AI2
F8-43 Timing
duration
source 0
3:
AI3
(100%
of
analog
input
corresponds

Time to
the
value
of
F8-44)

Output
overcurrent
F8-44 Timing
duration 0.0‒6500.0
min 0.0
min

detection
signal
These
parameters
are
used
to
implement
the
AC
drive
timing
function.
If
F8-42
is
set
to
1,
the
AC
drive
starts
to
time
at
startup.
When
the
set
timing
duration
is

Time reached,
the
AC
drive
stops
automatically
and
meanwhile
the
corresponding
DO
becomes

ON.
Output
overcurrent

detection
delay
time
F8-37
The
AC
drive
starts
timing
from
0
each
time
it
starts
up
and
the
remaining
timing
duration

can
be
queried
by
U0-20.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default The
timing
duration
is
set
in
F8-43
and
F8-44,
in
unit
of
minute.
F8-38 Any
current
reaching
1 0.0%‒300.0%
(rated
motor
current) 100.0%
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Any
current
reaching
1

F8-39 0.0%‒300.0%
(rated
motor
current) 0.0% F8-45 AI1
input
voltage
lower
limit 0.00
V
to
F8-46 3.10
V
amplitude
F8-46 AI1
input
voltage
upper
limit F8-45
to
10.00
V 6.80
V
F8-40 Any
current
reaching
2 0.0%‒300.0%
(rated
motor
current) 100.0%
Any
current
reaching
2
These
two
parameters
are
used
to
set
the
limits
of
the
input
voltage
to
provide
protection
on

F8-41 0.0%‒300.0%
(rated
motor
current) 0.0% the
AC
drive.
When
the
AI1
input
is
larger
than
the
value
of
F8-46
or
smaller
than
the
value

amplitude
of
F8-45,
the
corresponding
DO
becomes
ON,
indicating
that
AI1
input
exceeds
the
limit.
If
the
output
current
of
the
AC
drive
is
within
the
positive
and
negative
amplitudes
of
any

current
reaching
detection
value,
the
corresponding
DO
becomes
ON. Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F8-47 Module
temperature
threshold 0‒75
°C 75
°C
The
E4
provides
two
groups
of
any
current
reaching
detection
parameters,
including

current
detection
value
and
detection
amplitudes,
as
shown
in
the
following
figure. When
the
heatsink
temperature
of
the
AC
drive
reaches
the
value
of
this
parameter,
the

corresponding
DO
becomes
ON,
indicating
that
the
module
temperature
reaches
the

threshold.

- 138 - - 139 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Group
F9:
Fault
and
Protection

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

0:
Fan
working
during
running 0:
Disabled
F8-48 Cooling
fan
control 0 F9-00 Motor
overload
protection
selection 1
1:
Fan
working
continuously 1:
Enabled

It
is
used
to
set
the
working
mode
of
the
cooling
fan.
If
this
parameter
is
set
to
0,
the
fan
F9-01 Motor
overload
protection
gain 0.20‒10.00 1.00

works
when
the
AC
drive
is
in
running
state.
When
the
AC
drive
stops,
the
cooling
fan

works
if
the
heatsink
temperature
is
higher
than
40°C,
and
stops
working
if
the
heatsink
•
F9-00
=
0
temperature
is
lower
than
40°C. The
motor
overload
protective
function
is
disabled.
The
motor
is
exposed
to
potential

If
this
parameter
is
set
to
1,
the
cooling
fan
keeps
working
after
power-on. damage
due
to
overheating.
A
thermal
relay
is
suggested
to
be
installed
between
the

AC
drive
and
the
motor.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default •
F9-00
=
1
Dormant
frequency
(F8-51)
to

F8-49 Wakeup
frequency 0.00
Hz The
AC
drive
judges
whether
the
motor
is
overloaded
according
to
the
inverse
time-lag

maximum
frequency
(F0-10)
curve
of
the
motor
overload
protection.
F8-50 Wakeup
delay
time 0.0‒6500.0s 0.0s
F8-51 Dormant
frequency 0.00
Hz
to
wakeup
frequency
(F8-49) 0.00
Hz The
inverse
time-lag
curve
of
the
motor
overload
protection
is:
F8-52 Dormant
delay
time 0.0‒6500.0s 0.0s 220%
x
F9-01
x
rated
motor
current
(if
the
load
remains
at
this
value
for
one
minute,

the
AC
drive
reports
motor
overload
fault),
or

These
parameters
are
used
to
implement
the
dormant
and
wakeup
functions
in
the
water

supply
application. 150%
x
F9-01
x
rated
motor
current
(if
the
load
remains
at
this
value
for
60
minutes,

the
AC
drive
reports
motor
overload
fault)
When
the
AC
drive
is
in
running
state,
the
AC
drive
enters
the
dormant
state
and
stops

automatically
after
the
dormant
delay
time
(F8-52)
if
the
set
frequency
is
lower
than
or
equal
Set
F9-01
properly
based
on
the
actual
overload
capacity.
If
the
value
of
F9-01
is
set
too

to
the
dormant
frequency
(F8-51). large,
damage
to
the
motor
may
result
because
the
motor
overheats
but
the
AC
drive
does

not
report
the
alarm.
When
the
AC
drive
is
in
dormant
state
and
the
current
running
command
is
effective,
the
AC

drives
starts
up
after
the
wakeup
delay
time
(F8-50)
if
the
set
frequency
is
higher
than
or

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
equal
to
the
wakeup
frequency
(F8-49).
F9-02 Motor
overload
warning
coefficient 50%‒100% 80%
Generally,
set
the
wakeup
frequency
equal
to
or
higher
than
the
dormant
frequency.
If
the

wakeup
frequency
and
dormant
frequency
are
set
to
0,
the
dormant
and
wakeup
functions
This
function
is
used
to
give
a
warning
signal
to
the
control
system
via
DO
before
motor

are
disabled. overload
protection.
This
parameter
is
used
to
determine
the
percentage,
at
which
pre-
warning
is
performed
before
motor
overload.
The
larger
the
value
is,
the
less
advanced
the

When
the
dormant
function
is
enabled,
if
the
frequency
source
is
PID,
whether
PID
pre-warning
will
be.
operation
is
performed
in
the
dormant
state
is
determined
by
FA-28.
In
this
case,
select
PID

operation
enabled
in
the
stop
state
(FA-28
=
1). When
the
accumulative
output
current
of
the
AC
drive
is
greater
than
the
value
of
the

overload
inverse
time-lag
curve
multiplied
by
F9-02,
the
DO
terminal
on
the
AC
drive

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default allocated
with
function
6
(Motor
overload
pre-warning)
becomes
ON.
F8-53 Current
running
time
reached 0.0‒6500.0
min 0.0
min
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
If
the
current
running
time
reaches
the
value
set
in
this
parameter,
the
corresponding
DO
F9-03 Overvoltage
stall
gain 0
(no
stall
overvoltage)‒100 0
becomes
ON,
indicating
that
the
current
running
time
is
reached.
F9-04 Overvoltage
stall
protective
voltage 120%‒150% 130%
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default When
the
DC
bus
voltage
exceeds
the
value
of
F9-04
(Overvoltage
stall
protective
voltage)

F8-54 Output
power
correction
coefficient 0.00%‒200
.0% 100.0% during
deceleration
of
the
AC
drive,
the
AC
drive
stops
deceleration
and
keeps
the
present

running
frequency.
After
the
bus
voltage
declines,
the
AC
drive
continues
to
decelerate.
When
the
output
power
(U0-05)
is
not
equal
to
the
required
value,
you
can
perform
linear

correction
on
output
power
by
using
this
parameter. F9-03
(Overvoltage
stall
gain)
is
used
to
adjust
the
overvoltage
suppression
capacity
of
the

AC
drive.
The
larger
the
value
is,
the
greater
the
overvoltage
suppression
capacity
will
be.

- 140 - - 141 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

In
the
prerequisite
of
no
overvoltage
occurrence,
set
F9-03
to
a
small
value. Figure
5-25
Diagram
of
the
overcurrent
stall
protection
function
For
small-inertia
load,
the
value
should
be
small.
Otherwise,
the
system
dynamic
response
Output

will
be
slow.
For
large-inertia
load,
the
value
should
be
large.
Otherwise,
the
suppression
current

result
will
be
poor
and
an
overvoltage
fault
may
occur.
If
the
overvoltage
stall
gain
is
set
to
0,
the
overvoltage
stall
function
is
disabled.
The
Overcurrent
stall

protective
current
overvoltage
stall
protective
voltage
setting
100%
corresponds
to
the
base
values
in
the

following
table:
Table
5-7
Overvoltage
stall
protective
voltage
setting
100%
corresponds
to
base
values Time
(t)
Output

Voltage
Class Corresponding
Base
Value frequency
(Hz)
Single-phase
220
V 290
V
Three-phase
220
V 290
V
Set

Three-phase
380
V 530
V frequency

Three-phase
480
V 620
V
Three-phase
690
V 880
V
Time
(t)

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Acceleration
Constant- Deceleration

process speed
process process
F9-05 Overcurrent
stall
gain 0‒100 20
F9-06 Overcurrent
stall
protective
current 100%‒200% 150% Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Short-circuit
to
ground
upon
power- 0:
Disabled
When
the
output
current
exceeds
the
overcurrent
stall
protective
current
during
acceleration/ F9-07 1
on 1:
Enabled
deceleration
of
the
AC
drive,
the
AC
drive
stops
acceleration/deceleration
and
keeps
the

present
running
frequency.
After
the
output
current
declines,
the
AC
drive
continues
to
It
is
used
to
determine
whether
to
check
the
motor
is
short-circuited
to
ground
at
power-on

accelerate/decelerate. of
the
AC
drive.
If
this
function
is
enabled,
the
AC
drive's
UVW
will
have
voltage
output
a

F9-05
(Overcurrent
stall
gain)
is
used
to
adjust
the
overcurrent
suppression
capacity
of
the
while
after
power-on.
AC
drive.
The
larger
the
value
is,
the
greater
the
overcurrent
suppression
capacity
will
be.
In

the
prerequisite
of
no
overcurrent
occurrence,
set
tF9-05
to
a
small
value. Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F9-09 Fault auto reset times 0–20 0
For
small-inertia
load,
the
value
should
be
small.
Otherwise,
the
system
dynamic
response

will
be
slow.
For
large-inertia
load,
the
value
should
be
large.
Otherwise,
the
suppression

It
is
used
to
set
the
times
of
fault
auto
resets
if
this
function
is
used.
After
the
value
is

result
will
be
poor
and
overcurrent
fault
may
occur.
exceeded,
the
AC
drive
will
remain
in
the
fault
state.
If
the
overcurrent
stall
gain
is
set
to
0,
the
overcurrent
stall
function
is
disabled.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
0:
Not
act
F9-10 DO
action
during
fault
auto
reset 0
1:
Act

It
is
used
to
decide
whether
the
DO
acts
during
the
fault
auto
reset
if
the
fault
auto
reset

function
is
selected.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

F9-11 Time
interval
of
fault
auto
reset 0.1s‒100.0s 1.0s

It
is
used
to
set
the
waiting
time
from
the
alarm
of
the
AC
drive
to
fault
auto
reset.

- 142 - - 143 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes
Function
Code Parameter
Name Description
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
It
displays
the
status
of
all
DI
terminals
when

Unit's
digit:
Input
phase
loss
protection
the
latest
fault
occurs.
Input
phase
loss
Ten's
digit:
Contactor
energizing
The
sequence
is
as
follows:
protection/contactor
protection
F9-12 11
energizing
protection

selection 0:
Disabled F9-20 DI
status
upon
3rd
fault BIT9 BIT8 BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
1:
Enabled X
0 X
9 X
8 X
7 X
6 X
5 X
4 X
3 X2 X
1

It
is
used
to
determine
whether
to
perform
input
phase
loss
or
contactor
energizing
If
a
DI
is
ON,
the
setting
is
1.
If
the
DI
is
OFF,

protection. the
setting
is
0.
The
value
is
the
equivalent

decimal
number
converted
from
the
DI
status..
The
E4
models
that
provide
this
function
are
listed
in
the
following
table. It
displays
the
status
of
all
output
terminals

Table
5-8
E4
models
providing
the
input
phase
loss
or
contactor
energizing
protection
when
the
latest
fault
occurs.
function The
sequence
is
as
follows:

BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0

Voltage
Class Models Output
terminal
status

F9-21
upon
3rd
fault Y
2
Y
1 REL2 REL1 FMP
Single-phase
220
V None
If
an
output
terminal
is
ON,
the
setting
is
1.

Three-phase
220
V 11
kW
G
model If
the
output
terminal
is
OFF,
the
setting
is
0.

Three-phase
380
V 18.5
kW
G
model The
value
is
the
equivalent
decimal
number

converted
from
the
DI
statuses.
Three-phase
690
V 18.5
kW
G
model
AC
drive
status
upon
3rd

F9-22 Reserved
fault
For
every
voltage
class,
the
E4
AC
drives
of
powers
equal
to
or
greater
than
those

listed
in
the
preceding
table
provide
the
function
of
input
phase
loss
or
contactor
energizing
Power-on
time
upon
3rd
It
displays
the
present
power-on
time
when
the

F9-23
protection.
The
E4
AC
drives
below
the
power
listed
in
the
table
do
not
have
the
fault latest
fault
occurs.
function
no
matter
whether
F9-12
is
set
to
0
or
1. Running
time
upon
3rd
It
displays
the
present
running
time
when
the

F9-24
fault latest
fault
occurs.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default F9-27 Frequency
upon
2nd
fault
0:
Disabled F9-28 Current
upon
2nd
fault
F9-13 Output
phase
loss
protection
selection 1
1:
Enabled F9-29 Bus
voltage
upon
2nd
fault
It is used to determine whether to perform output phase loss protection. F9-30 DI
status
upon
2nd
fault
Output
terminal
status
Same
as
F9-17‒F9-24.
F9-31
Function
Code Name Setting
Range upon
2nd
fault
F9-14 1st
fault
type F9-32 Frequency
upon
2nd
fault

F9-15 2nd
fault
type 0‒99 F9-33 Current
upon
2nd
fault

F9-34 Bus
voltage
upon
2nd
fault
F9-16 3rd
(latest)
fault
type
F9-37 DI
status
upon
1st
fault
It
is
used
to
record
the
types
of
the
most
recent
three
faults
of
the
AC
drive.
0
indicates
no
Output
terminal
status

fault.
For
possible
causes
and
solution
of
each
fault,
refer
to
Chapter
8. F9-38
upon
1st
fault

Function
Code Parameter
Name Description F9-39 Frequency
upon
1st
fault

It
displays
the
frequency
when
the
latest
fault
F9-40 Current
upon
1st
fault

F9-17 Frequency
upon
3rd
fault Same
as
F9-17‒F9-24.
occurs. F9-41 Bus
voltage
upon
3rd
fault
It
displays
the
current
when
the
latest
fault
F9-42 DI
status
upon
1st
fault
F9-18 Current
upon
3rd
fault
occurs. Output
terminal
status

F9-43
It
displays
the
bus
voltage
when
the
latest
fault
upon
1st
fault
F9-19 Bus
voltage
upon
3rd
fault
occurs. F9-44 Frequency
upon
1st

fault

- 144 - - 145 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Unit's
digit
(User-defined
fault
1,
Err27)
Unit's
digit
(Motor
overload,
Err11) Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47
0:
Coast
to
stop Ten's
digit
(User-defined
fault
2,
Err28)
1:
Stop
according
to
the
stop
mode Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47
2:
Continue
to
run Hundred's
digit
(Accumulative
power-on
time

Ten's
digit
(Power
input
phase
loss,
Err12) reached,
Err29)

Fault
protection
Same
as
unit's
digit Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47

F9-47 00000 Fault
protection

action
selection
1 Hundred's
digit
(Power
output
phase
loss,
Err13) F9-49 Thousand's
digit
(Load
becoming
0,
Err30) 00000
action
selection
3
Same
as
unit's
digit 0:
Coast
to
stop
Thousand's
digit
(External
equipment
fault,
Err15) 1:
Stop
according
to
the
stop
mode
Same
as
unit's
digit 2:
Continue
to
run
at
7%
of
rated
motor
frequency

and
resume
to
the
set
frequency
if
the
load

Ten
thousand's
digit
(Communication
fault,
Err16) recovers
Same
as
unit's
digit Ten
thousand's
digit
(PID
feedback
lost
during

Unit's
digit
(Encoder
fault,
Err20) running,
Err31)
0:
Coast
to
stop Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47
1:
Switch
over
to
V/F
control,
stop
according
to
the
Unit's
digit
(Too
large
speed
deviation,
Err42)
stop
mode
Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47
2:
Switch
over
to
V/F
control,
continue
to
run
Ten's
digit
(Motor
over-speed,
Err43)
Ten's
digit
(EEPROM
read-write
fault,
Err21)
Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47
Fault
protection
0:
Coast
to
stop F9-50
Fault
protection

00000
F9-48 00000 Hundred's
digit
(Initial
position
fault,
Err51)
action
selection
2 1:
Stop
according
to
the
stop
mode action
selection
4
Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47
Hundred's
digit:
reserved
Thousand's
digit
(Speed
feedback
fault,
Err52)
Thousand's
digit
(Motor
overheat,
Err25)
Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47
Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47
Ten
thousand's
digit:
Reserved
Ten
thousand's
digit
(Accumulative
running
time

reached)
If
"Coast
to
stop"
is
selected,
the
AC
drive
displays
Err**
and
directly
stops.
Same
as
unit's
digit
in
F9-47
•
If
"Stop
according
to
the
stop
mode"
is
selected,
the
AC
drive
displays
A**
and
stops

according
to
the
stop
mode.
After
stop,
the
AC
drive
displays
Err**.
•
If
"Continue
to
run"
is
selected,
the
AC
drive
continues
to
run
and
displays
A**.
The

running
frequency
is
set
in
F9-54.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

0:
Current
running
frequency
Frequency
selection
1:
Set
frequency
F9-54 for
continuing
to
run
2:
Frequency
upper
limit 0
upon
fault 3:
Frequency
lower
limit
4:
Backup
frequency
upon
abnormality
Backup
frequency

F9-55 0.0%‒100.0%
(maximum
frequency) 100.0%
upon
abnormality

- 146 - - 147 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes
Figure
5-26
AC
drive
action
diagram
upon
instantaneous
power
failure
If
a
fault
occurs
during
the
running
of
the
AC
drive
and
the
handling
of
fault
is
set
to
"Continue

Voltage
rally
judging
time
at

to
run",
the
AC
drive
displays
A**
and
continues
to
run
at
the
frequency
set
in
F9-54. instantaneous
power
failure
F9-61
The
setting
of
F9-55
is
a
percentage
relative
to
the
maximum
frequency.
Bus
voltage
Action
judging
voltage
at

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
instantaneous
power
failure
0: No temperature sensor F9-62

F9-56 Type of motor temperature sensor 1: PT100 0 Running

frequency
2: PT1000
Action
pause
judging

F9-57 Motor overheat protection threshold 0–200°C 110°C voltage
at
instantaneous
F9-59
=
1:
Decelerate
power
failure
F9-60
F9-58 Motor overheat warning threshold 0–200°C 90°C

The
signal
of
the
motor
temperature
sensor
needs
to
be
connected
to
the
optional
I/O

extension
card.
AI3
on
the
extension
card
can
be
used
for
the
temperature
signal
input.
Running

Deceler
-ation

Deceler Acceler
-ation
ation

The
motor
temperature
sensor
is
connected
to
AI3
and
PGND
of
the
extension
card.
The
frequency time
3 time
4 time

AI
3
terminal
of
the
E4
supports
both
PT100
and
PT1000.
Set
the
sensor
type
correctly

Action
pause
judging

during
the
use.
You
can
view
the
motor
temperature
via
U0-34. voltage
at
instantaneous

power
failure
F9-60
If
the
motor
temperature
exceeds
the
value
set
in
F9-57,
the
AC
drive
reports
an
alarm
and

acts
according
to
the
selected
fault
protection
action.
Deceler- Deceler-
If
the
motor
temperature
exceeds
the
value
set
in
F9-58,
the
DO
terminal
on
the
AC
drive
ation
time
ation
time

3 4
allocated
with
function
39
(Motor
overheat
warning)
becomes
ON.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

0:
Disabled
0:
Invalid F9-63 Protection
upon
load
becoming
0 0
Action
selection
at
instantaneous
1:
Enabled
F9-59 1:
Decelerate 0
power
failure 0.0%‒100.0%
(rated

2:
Decelerate
to
stop F9-64 Detection
level
of
load
becoming
0 10.0%
motor
current)
Action
pause
judging
voltage
at
F9-65 Detection
time
of
load
becoming
0 0.0‒60.0s 1.0s
F9-60 80.0%‒100.0% 90.0%
instantaneous
power
failure
Voltage
rally
judging
time
at
If
protection
upon
load
becoming
0
is
enabled,
when
the
output
current
of
the
AC
drive

F9-61 0.00‒100.00s 0.50s
instantaneous
power
failure is
lower
than
the
detection
level
(F9-64)
and
the
lasting
time
exceeds
the
detection
time

(F9-65),
the
output
frequency
of
the
AC
drive
automatically
declines
to
7%
of
the
rated

Action
judging
voltage
at
60.0%‒100.0%

F9-62 80.0% frequency.
During
the
protection,
the
AC
drive
automatically
accelerates
to
the
set
frequency

instantaneous
power
failure (standard
bus
voltage)
if
the
load
resumes
to
normal.
Upon
instantaneous
power
failure
or
sudden
voltage
dip,
the
DC
bus
voltage
of
the
AC
drive

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
reduces.
This
function
enables
the
AC
drive
to
compensate
the
DC
bus
voltage
reduction

with
the
load
feedback
energy
by
reducing
the
output
frequency
so
as
to
keep
the
AC
drive
F9-67 Over-speed
detection
value 0.0%‒50.0%
(maximum
frequency) 20.0%
running
continuously. F9-68 Over-speed
detection
time 0.0‒60.0s 1.0s
•
If
F9-59
=
1,
upon
instantaneous
power
failure
or
sudden
voltage
dip,
the
AC
drive

decelerates.
Once
the
bus
voltage
resumes
to
normal,
the
AC
drive
accelerates
to
the
This
function
is
valid
only
when
the
AC
drive
runs
in
the
CLVC
mode.
set
frequency.
If
the
bus
voltage
remains
normal
for
the
time
exceeding
the
value
set
in
If
the
actual
motor
rotational
speed
detected
by
the
AC
drive
exceeds
the
maximum

F9-61,
it
is
considered
that
the
bus
voltage
resumes
to
normal. frequency
and
the
excessive
value
is
greater
than
the
value
of
F9-67
and
the
lasting
time

•
If
F9-59
=
2,
upon
instantaneous
power
failure
or
sudden
voltage
dip,
the
AC
drive
exceeds
the
value
of
F9-68,
the
AC
drive
reports
Err43
and
acts
according
to
the
selected

decelerates
to
stop. fault
protection
action.
If
the
over-speed
detection
time
is
0.0s,
the
over-speed
detection
function
is
disabled.

- 148 - - 149 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

Detection
value
of
too
large
0.0%‒50.0%
(maximum
0:
AI1
F9-69 20.0%
speed
deviation frequency) 1:
AI2
Detection
time
of
too
large
speed
2:
AI3
F9-70 0.0‒60.0s 5.0s
deviation
3:
AI1
‒
AI2

This
function
is
valid
only
when
the
AC
drive
runs
in
the
CLVC
mode. FA-02 PID
feedback
source 4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5) 0

5:
Communication
setting
If
the
AC
drive
detects
the
deviation
between
the
actual
motor
rotational
speed
detected
by

6:
AI1
+
AI2
the
AC
drive
and
the
set
frequency
is
greater
than
the
value
of
F9-69
and
the
lasting
time

exceeds
the
value
of
F9-70,
the
AC
drive
reports
Err42
and
according
to
the
selected
fault
7:
MAX
(|AI1|,
|AI2|)
protection
action. 8:
MIN
(|AI1|,
|AI2|)

If
F9-70
(Detection
time
of
too
large
speed
deviation)
is
0.0s,
this
function
is
disabled. This
parameter
is
used
to
select
the
feedback
signal
channel
of
process
PID.
The
PID
feedback
is
a
relative
value
and
ranges
from
0.0%
to
100.0%.
Group
FA:
Process
Control
PID
Function
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
PID
control
is
a
general
process
control
method.
By
performing
proportional,
integral
and

differential
operations
on
the
difference
between
the
feedback
signal
and
the
target
signal,
0:
Forward
action
FA-03 PID
action
direction 0
it
adjusts
the
output
frequency
and
constitutes
a
feedback
system
to
stabilize
the
controlled
1:
Reverse
action
counter
around
the
target
value.
•
0:
Forward
action
It
is
applied
to
process
control
such
as
flow
control,
pressure
control
and
temperature

control.
The
following
figure
shows
the
principle
block
diagram
of
PID
control. When
the
feedback
value
is
smaller
than
the
PID
setting,
the
AC
drive's
output

frequency
rises.
For
example,
the
winding
tension
control
requires
forward
PID
action.
Figure
5-27
Principle
block
diagram
of
PID
control
•
1:
Reverse
action
1 1
Ti S When
the
feedback
value
is
smaller
than
the
PID
setting,
the
AC
drive's
output

Target + PID
output frequency
reduces.
For
example,
the
unwinding
tension
control
requires
reverse
PID

Td
x
S
+1 P action.
- +

1 Note
that
this
function
is
influenced
by
the
DI
function
35
"Reverse
PID
action

direction".
Feedback
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default FA-04 PID
setting
feedback
range 0‒65535 1000
0:
FA-01
This
parameter
is
a
non-dimensional
unit.
It
is
used
for
PID
setting
display
(U0-15)
and
PID

1:
AI1
feedback
display
(U0-16).
2:
AI2
Relative
value
100%
of
PID
setting
feedback
corresponds
to
the
value
of
FA-04.
If
FA-04
is

FA-00 PID
setting
source 3:
AI3 0
set
to
2000
and
PID
setting
is
100.0%,
the
PID
setting
display
(U0-15)
is
2000.
4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5)
5:
Communication
setting Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
6:
Multi-reference FA-05 Proportional
gain
Kp1 0.0‒100.0 20.0
FA-01 PID
digital
setting 0.0%‒100.0% 50.0% FA-06 Integral
time
Ti1 0.01‒10.00s 2.00s
FA-07 Differential
time
Td1 0.00‒10.000 0.000s
FA-00
is
used
to
select
the
channel
of
target
process
PID
setting.
The
PID
setting
is
a

relative
value
and
ranges
from
0.0%
to
100.0%.
The
PID
feedback
is
also
a
relative
value.

The
purpose
of
PID
control
is
to
make
the
PID
setting
and
PID
feedback
equal.

- 150 - - 151 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

•
FA-05
(Proportional
gain
Kp1) Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

It
decides
the
regulating
intensity
of
the
PID
regulator.
The
higher
the
Kp1
is,
the
larger
FA-12 PID
feedback
filter
time 0.00‒60.00s 0.00s
the
regulating
intensity
is.
The
value
100.0
indicates
when
the
deviation
between
PID

FA-13 PID
output
filter
time 0.00‒60.00s 0.00s
feedback
and
PID
setting
is
100.0%,
the
adjustment
amplitude
of
the
PID
regulator
on

the
output
frequency
reference
is
the
maximum
frequency. FA-12
is
used
to
filter
the
PID
feedback,
helping
to
reduce
interference
on
the
feedback
but

•
FA-06
(Integral
time
Ti1) slowing
the
response
of
the
process
closed-loop
system.

It
decides
the
integral
regulating
intensity.
The
shorter
the
integral
time
is,
the
larger
FA-13
is
used
to
filter
the
PID
output
frequency,
helping
to
weaken
sudden
change
of
the
AC

the
regulating
intensity
is.
When
the
deviation
between
PID
feedback
and
PID
setting
drive
output
frequency
but
slowing
the
response
of
the
process
closed-loop
system.
is
100.0%,
the
integral
regulator
performs
continuous
adjustment
for
the
time
set
in
FA-
06.
Then
the
adjustment
amplitude
reaches
the
maximum
frequency. Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
FA-15 Proportional
gain
Kp2 0.0‒100.0 20.0
•
FA-07
(Differential
time
Td1)
FA-16 Integral
time
Ti2 0.01‒10.00s 2.00s
It
decides
the
regulating
intensity
of
the
PID
regulator
on
the
deviation
change.
The

FA-17 Differential
time
Td2 0.000‒10.000s 0.000s
longer
the
differential
time
is,
the
larger
the
regulating
intensity
is.
Differential
time
is
the

time
within
which
the
feedback
value
change
reaches
100.0%,
and
then
the
adjustment
0:
No
switchover
amplitude
reaches
the
maximum
frequency. PID
parameter
switchover
1:
Switchover
via
DI
FA-18 0
condition 2:
Automatic
switchover

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default based
on
deviation
Cut-off
frequency
of
PID
reverse
PID
parameter
switchover

FA-08 0.00
to
maximum
frequency 2.00
Hz FA-19 0.0%
to
FA-20 20.0%
rotation deviation
1

In
some
situations,
only
when
the
PID
output
frequency
is
a
negative
value
(AC
drive
PID
parameter
switchover

FA-20 FA-19
to
100.0% 80.0%
reverse
rotation),
PID
setting
and
PID
feedback
can
be
equal.
However,
too
high
reverse
deviation
2
rotation
frequency
is
prohibited
in
some
applications,
and
FA-08
is
used
to
determine
the
In
some
applications,
PID
parameters
switchover
is
required
when
one
group
of
PID

reverse
rotation
frequency
upper
limit. parameters
cannot
satisfy
the
requirement
of
the
whole
running
process.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default These
parameters
are
used
for
switchover
between
two
groups
of
PID
parameters.

FA-09 PID
deviation
limit 0.0%‒100.0% 0.0%
Regulator
parameters
FA-15
to
FA-17
are
set
in
the
same
way
as
FA-05
to
FA-07.
The
switchover
can
be
implemented
either
via
a
DI
terminal
or
automatically
implemented

If
the
deviation
between
PID
feedback
and
PID
setting
is
smaller
than
the
value
of
FA-09,
based
on
the
deviation.
PID
control
stops.
The
small
deviation
between
PID
feedback
and
PID
setting
will
make
the

output
frequency
stabilize,
effective
for
some
closed-loop
control
applications. If
you
select
switchover
via
a
DI
terminal,
the
DI
must
be
allocated
with
function
43
"PID

parameter
switchover".
If
the
DI
is
OFF,
group
1
(FA-05
to
FA-07)
is
selected.
If
the
DI
is

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default ON,
group
2
(FA-15
to
FA-17)
is
selected.
FA-10 PID
differential
limit 0.00%‒100.00% 0.10% If
you
select
automatic
switchover,
when
the
absolute
value
of
the
deviation
between
PID

feedback
and
PID
setting
is
smaller
than
the
value
of
FA-19,
group
1
is
selected.
When
the

It
is
used
to
set
the
PID
differential
output
range.
In
PID
control,
the
differential
operation
absolute
value
of
the
deviation
between
PID
feedback
and
PID
setting
is
higher
than
the

may
easily
cause
system
oscillation.
Thus,
the
PID
differential
regulation
is
restricted
to
a
value
of
FA-20,
group
2
is
selected.
When
the
deviation
is
between
FA-19
and
FA-20,
the

small
range. PID
parameters
are
the
linear
interpolated
value
of
the
two
groups
of
parameter
values.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

FA-11 PID
setting
change
time 0.00‒650.00s 0.00s

The
PID
setting
change
time
indicates
the
time
required
for
PID
setting
changing
from
0.0%

to
100.0%.
The
PID
setting
changes
linearly
according
to
the
change
time,
reducing
the

impact
caused
by
sudden
setting
change
on
the
system.

- 152 - - 153 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Figure
5-28
PID
parameters
switchover Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

PI
Unit's
digit
(Integral
separated)
parameters
0:
Invalid
1:
Valid
Group
1
of
PID
FA-25 PID
integral
property Ten's
digit
(Whether
to
stop
integral
00
parameters
FA-05,
FA-06,
FA-07 operation
when
the
output
reaches
the
limit)
0:
Continue
integral
operation
Group
2
of
PID
1:
Stop
integral
operation
parameters
FA-15,
FA-16,
FA-17
•
Integral
separated
FA-19 FA-20 PID
deviation If
it
is
set
to
valid,
,
the
PID
integral
operation
stops
when
the
DI
allocated
with
function

38
"PID
integral
pause"
is
ON
In
this
case,
only
proportional
and
differential
operations

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
take
effect.
FA-21 PID
initial
value 0.0%‒100.0% 0.0%
If
it
is
set
to
invalid,
integral
separated
remains
invalid
no
matter
whether
the
DI

FA-22 PID
initial
value
holding
time 0.00‒650.00s 0.00s
allocated
with
function
38
"PID
integral
pause"
is
ON
or
not.
When
the
AC
drive
starts
up,
the
PID
starts
closed-loop
algorithm
only
after
the
PID
output
•
Whether
to
stop
integral
operation
when
the
output
reaches
the
limit
is
fixed
to
the
PID
initial
value
(FA-21)
and
lasts
the
time
set
in
FA-22.
If
"Stop
integral
operation"
is
selected,
the
PID
integral
operation
stops,
which
may
help

Figure
6-29
PID
initial
value
function to
reduce
the
PID
overshoot.
Output

frequency
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Detection
value
of
PID
0.0%:
Not
judging
feedback
loss
FA-26 0.0%
PID
initial
value feedback
loss 0.1%‒100.0%
FA-21
Detection
time
of
PID

FA-27 0.0‒20.0s 0.0s
feedback
loss

Time These
parameters
are
used
to
judge
whether
PID
feedback
is
lost.
If
the
PID
feedback
is
smaller
than
the
value
of
FA-26
and
the
lasting
time
exceeds
the

PID
initial
value
value
of
FA-27,
the
AC
drive
reports
Err31
and
acts
according
to
the
selected
fault
protection

holding
time
FA -22 action.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

Maximum
deviation
between
two
PID
0:
No
PID
operation
at
stop
FA-23 0.00%‒100.00% 1.00% FA-28 PID
operation
at
stop 0
outputs
in
forward
direction 1:
PID
operation
at
stop
Maximum
deviation
between
two
PID

FA-24 0.00%‒100.00% 1.00%
outputs
in
reverse
direction It
is
used
to
select
whether
to
continue
PID
operation
in
the
state
of
stop.
Generally,
the
PID

operation
stops
when
the
AC
drive
stops.
This
function
is
used
to
limit
the
deviation
between
two
PID
outputs
(2
ms
per
PID
output)
to

suppress
the
rapid
change
of
PID
output
and
stabilize
the
running
of
the
AC
drive. Group
FB:
Swing
Frequency,
Fixed
Length
and
Count
FA-23
and
FA-24
respectively
correspond
to
the
maximum
absolute
value
of
the
output

deviation
in
forward
direction
and
in
reverse
direction. The
swing
frequency
function
is
applied
to
the
textile
and
chemical
fiber
fields
and
the

applications
where
traversing
and
winding
functions
are
required.
The
swing
frequency
function
indicates
that
the
output
frequency
of
the
AC
drive
swings
up

and
down
with
the
set
frequency
as
the
center.
The
trace
of
running
frequency
at
the
time

axis
is
shown
in
the
following
figure.

- 154 - - 155-
 Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes
The
swing
amplitude
is
set
in
FB-00
and
FB-01.
When
FB-01
is
set
to
0,
the
swing
amplitude

is
0
and
the
swing
frequency
does
not
take
effect.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Figure
5-30
Swing
frequency
control FB-03 Swing
frequency
cycle 0.0‒3000.0s 10.0s
Output
Swing
amplitude FB-04 Triangular
wave
rising
time
coefficient 0.0%‒100.0% 50.0%
frequency
(Hz)
Aw
=
Fset
x
FB-01
Swing
frequency
+Aw FB-03
specifies
the
time
of
a
complete
swing
frequency
cycle.
upper
limit
Set
frequency
Fset
FB-04
specifies
the
time
percentage
of
triangular
wave
rising
time
to
FB-03
(Swing

frequency
cycle).
Swing
frequency
-Aw
lower
limit •
Triangular
wave
rising
time
=
FB-03
(Swing
frequency
cycle)
x
FB-04
(Triangular
wave

Textile
kick
frequency

=
Aw
x
FB-02 rising
time
coefficient,
unit:
s)
•
Triangular
wave
falling
time
=
FB-03
(Swing
frequency
cycle)
x
(1
‒
FB-04
Triangular

Time
(t) wave
rising
time
coefficient
,unit:
s)
Accelerate
by
Swing
Triangular
Decelerate
by

acceleration
time cycle rising
timedeceleration
time Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
FB-05 Set
length 0‒65535
m 1000
m
RUN
FB-06 Actual
length 0‒65535
m 0
m
command
FB-07 Number
of
pulses
per
meter 0.1‒6553.5 100.0
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
The
preceding
parameters
are
used
for
fixed
length
control.
Swing
frequency
0:
Relative
to
the
central
frequency
FB-00 0
setting
mode 1:
Relative
to
the
maximum
frequency The
length
information
is
collected
by
DI
terminals.
FB-06
(Actual
length)
is
calculated
by

dividing
the
number
of
pulses
collected
by
the
DI
terminal
by
FB-07
(Number
of
pulses
each

This
parameter
is
used
to
select
the
base
value
of
the
swing
amplitude. meter).

•
0:
Relative
to
the
central
frequency
(F0-07
frequency
source
selection) When
the
actual
length
FB-06
exceeds
the
set
length
in
FB-05,
the
DO
terminal
allocated

with
function
10
(Length
reached)
becomes
ON.
It
is
variable
swing
amplitude
system.
The
swing
amplitude
varies
with
the
central

frequency
(set
frequency). During
the
fixed
length
control,
the
length
reset
operation
can
be
performed
via
the
DI

terminal
allocated
with
function
28.
For
details,
see
the
descriptions
of
F4-00
to
F4-09.
•
1:
Relative
to
the
maximum
frequency
(F0-10
maximum
output
frequency)
Allocate
corresponding
DI
terminal
with
function
27
(Length
count
input)
in
applications.
If

It
is
fixed
swing
amplitude
system.
The
swing
amplitude
is
fixed.
the
pulse
frequency
is
high,
DI5
must
be
used.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
FB-01 Swing
frequency
amplitude 0.0%‒100.0% 0.0% FB-08 Set
count
value 1‒65535 1000
FB-02 Jump
frequency
amplitude 0.0%‒50.0% 0.0% FB-09 Designated
count
value 1‒65535 1000
This
parameter
is
used
to
determine
the
swing
amplitude
and
jump
frequency
amplitude.
The
count
value
needs
to
be
collected
by
DI
terminal.
Allocate
the
corresponding
DI
terminal

The
swing
frequency
is
limited
by
the
frequency
upper
limit
and
frequency
lower
limit. with
function
25
(Counter
input)
in
applications.
If
the
pulse
frequency
is
high,
DI5
must
be

used.
•
If
relative
to
the
central
frequency
(FB-00
=
0),
the
actual
swing
amplitude
AW
is
the

calculation
result
of
F0-07
(Frequency
source
selection)
multiplied
by
FB-01. When
the
count
value
reaches
the
set
count
value
(FB-08),
the
DO
terminal
allocated
with

function
8
(Set
count
value
reached)
becomes
ON.
Then
the
counter
stops
counting.
•
If
relative
to
the
maximum
frequency
(FB-00
=
1),
the
actual
swing
amplitude
AW
is
the

calculation
result
of
F0-10
(Maximum
frequency)
multiplied
by
FB-01. When
the
counting
value
reaches
the
designated
counting
value
(FB-09),
the
DO
terminal

allocated
with
function
9
(Designated
count
value
reached)
becomes
ON.
Then
the
counter

Jump
frequency
=
Swing
amplitude
AW
x
FB-02
(Jump
frequency
amplitude).

continues
to
count
until
the
set
count
value
is
reached.
•
If
relative
to
the
central
frequency
(FB-00
=
0),
the
jump
frequency
is
a
variable
value.
FB-09
should
be
equal
to
or
smaller
than
FB-08.
•
If
relative
to
the
maximum
frequency
(FB-00
=
1),
the
jump
frequency
is
a
fixed
value.
The
swing
frequency
is
limited
by
the
frequency
upper
limit
and
frequency
lower
limit.
- 156 - - 157 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Figure
5-31
Reaching
the
set
count
value
and
designated
count
value
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Count
pulses
input U0-12:
Count
value 0:
Stop
after
the
AC
drive
runs
one
cycle
1 2 3 10 11 12 19 20 21 1 2
U0-12
=
0 Simple
PLC
1:
Keep
final
values
after
the
AC
drive
runs

Count
pulses
input FC-16 0
Fb-09
=
11 running
mode one
cycle
Designated
count
U0-12 = 11
value
reached
output 2:
Repeat
after
the
AC
drive
runs
one
cycle
Fb-08
=
20
Set
count
value
U0-12
=
20
reached
output
•
0:
Stop
after
the
AC
drive
runs
one
cycle
Group
FC:
Multi-Reference
and
Simple
PLC
Function The
AC
drive
stops
after
running
one
cycle,
and
will
not
start
up
until
receiving
another

command.
The
E4
multi-reference
has
many
functions.
Besides
multi-speed,
it
can
be
used
as
the

setting
source
of
the
V/F
separated
voltage
source
and
setting
source
of
process
PID.
In
•
1:
Keep
final
values
after
the
AC
drive
runs
one
cycle
addition,
the
multi-reference
is
relative
value. The
AC
drive
keeps
the
final
running
frequency
and
direction
after
running
one
cycle.
The
simple
PLC
function
is
different
from
the
E4
user
programmable
function.
Simple
•
2:
Repeat
after
the
AC
drive
runs
one
cycle
PLC
can
only
complete
simple
combination
of
multi-reference,
while
the
user
programmable

function
is
more
practical.
For
details,
see
the
descriptions
of
group
A7. The
AC
drive
automatically
starts
another
cycle
after
running
one
cycle,
and
will
not

stop
until
receiving
the
stop
command.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Simple
PLC
can
be
either
the
frequency
source
or
V/F
separated
voltage
source.
FC-00 Reference
0 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0%
When
simple
PLC
is
used
as
the
frequency
source,
whether
parameter
values
of
FC-00
to

FC-01 Reference
1 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% FC-15
are
positive
or
negative
determines
the
running
direction.
If
the
parameter
values
are

FC-02 Reference
2 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% negative,
it
indicates
that
the
AC
drive
runs
in
reverse
direction.
FC-03 Reference
3 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% Figure
5-32
Simple
PLC
when
used
as
frequency
source
FC-04 Reference
4 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0%
FC-19
FC-05 Reference
5 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0%
Running

FC-06 Reference
6 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% FC-21
direction
FC-07 Reference
7 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% FC-14
FC-02
FC-
FC-08 Reference
8 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% 00 FC-15

FC-09 Reference
9 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% Time
(t)

FC-10 Reference
10 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0%

FC-11 Reference
11 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0%
FC-01
FC-12 Reference
12 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0%
FC-18 FC-20 FC-23
FC-13 Reference
13 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0%
FC-14 Reference
14 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0%
FC-15 Reference
15 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0% DO
or
relay

output
Multi-reference
can
be
the
setting
source
of
frequency,
V/F
separated
voltage
and
process

PID.
The
multi-reference
is
relative
value
and
ranges
from
-100.0%
to
100.0%.
250
ms

pulses
As
frequency
source,
it
is
a
percentage
relative
to
the
maximum
frequency.
As
V/F

separated
voltage
source,
it
is
a
percentage
relative
to
the
rated
motor
voltage.
As
process

PID
setting
source,
it
does
not
require
conversion.
Multi-reference
can
be
switched
over
based
on
different
states
of
DI
terminals.
For
details,

see
the
descriptions
of
group
F4.

- 158 - - 159 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Unit's
digit
(Retentive
upon
power

failure) FC-34 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
8 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h)
0:
No Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple

FC-35 0‒3 0
Simple
PLC
1:
Yes PLC
reference
8
FC-17 00
retentive
selection FC-36 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
9 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h)
Ten's
digit
(Retentive
upon
stop)
0:
No Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple

FC-37 0‒3 0
PLC
reference
9
1:
Yes
FC-38 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
10 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h)
PLC
retentive
upon
power
failure
indicates
that
the
AC
drive
memorizes
the
PLC
running
Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple

moment
and
running
frequency
before
power
failure
and
will
continue
to
run
from
the
FC-39 0‒3 0
PLC
reference
10
memorized
moment
after
it
is
powered
on
again.
If
the
unit's
digit
is
set
to
0,
the
AC
drive

restarts
the
PLC
process
after
it
is
powered
on
again. FC-40 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
11 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h)
Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple

PLC
retentive
upon
stop
indicates
that
the
AC
drive
records
the
PLC
running
moment
and
FC-41 0‒3 0
PLC
reference
11
running
frequency
upon
stop
and
will
continue
to
run
from
the
recorded
moment
after
it

starts
up
again.
If
the
ten's
digit
is
set
to
0,
the
AC
drive
restarts
the
PLC
process
after
it
FC-42 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
12 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h)
starts
up
again. Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple

FC-43 0‒3 0
PLC
reference
12
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
FC-44 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
13 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h)
FC-18 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
0 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h)
Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple

FC-45 0‒3 0
Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
13
FC-19 0‒3 0
PLC
reference
0
FC-46 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
14 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h)
FC-20 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
1 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h)
Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple

FC-47 0‒3 0
Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
14
FC-21 0‒3 0
PLC
reference
1
FC-48 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
15 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h)
FC-22 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
2 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h)
Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple

FC-49 0‒3 0
Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
15
FC-23 0‒3 0
PLC
reference
2
0:
s
(second)
FC-24 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
3 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) FC-50 Time
unit
of
simple
PLC
running
0
1:
h
(hour)
Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple

FC-25 0‒3 0
PLC
reference
3 Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
FC-26 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
4 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) 0:
Set
by
FC-00
Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple
1:
AI1
FC-27 0‒3 0
PLC
reference
4 2:
AI2
FC-28 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
5 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) 3:
AI3
FC-51 Reference
0
source 0
Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple
4:
Pulse
setting
FC-29 0‒3 0
PLC
reference
5 5:
PID
FC-30 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
6 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) 6:
Set
by
preset
frequency
(F0-08),

modified
via
terminal
UP/DOWN
Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple

FC-31 0‒3 0
PLC
reference
6
It
determines
the
setting
channel
of
reference
0.
You
can
perform
convenient
switchover

FC-32 Running
time
of
simple
PLC
reference
7 0.0‒6553.5s
(h) 0.0s
(h) between
the
setting
channels.
When
multi-reference
or
simple
PLC
is
used
as
frequency

Acceleration/deceleration
time
of
simple
source,
the
switchover
between
two
frequency
sources
can
be
realized
easily.
FC-33 0‒3 0
PLC
reference
7

- 160 - - 161 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Group
FD:
User-defined
Parameters G roup
FE
provides
a
maximum
of
30
user-defined
parameters.
If
"FE-00"
is
displayed,

it
indicates
that
group
FE
is
null.
After
you
enter
user-defined
function
code
mode,
the

Group
FE:
User-Defined
Function
Codes displayed
parameters
are
defined
by
FE-00
to
FE-31
and
the
sequence
is
consistent
with

that
in
group
FE.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
F0-00
to
FP-xx,
A0-00
to
Group
FP:
User
Password
FE-00 User-defined
function
code
0 F0-00
Ax-xx,
U0-xx
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
FE-01 User-defined
function
code
1 Same
as
FE-00 F0-02
FE-02 User-defined
function
code
2 Same
as
FE-00 F0-03 FP-00 User
password 0‒65535 0

FE-03 User-defined
function
code
3 Same
as
FE-00 F0-07 If
it
is
set
to
any
non-zero
number,
the
password
protection
function
is
enabled.
After
a

FE-04 User-defined
function
code
4 Same
as
FE-00 F0-08 password
has
been
set
and
taken
effect,
you
must
enter
the
correct
password
in
order
to

enter
the
menu.
If
the
entered
password
is
incorrect
you
cannot
view
or
modify
parameters.
FE-05 User-defined
function
code
5 Same
as
FE-00 F0-17
If
FP-00
is
set
to
00000,
the
previously
set
user
password
is
cleared,
and
the
password

FE-06 User-defined
function
code
6 Same
as
FE-00 F0-18
protection
function
is
disabled.
FE-07 User-defined
function
code
7 Same
as
FE-00 F3-00
FE-08 User-defined
function
code
8 Same
as
FE-00 F3-01 Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting Range Default
FE-09 User-defined
function
code
9 Same
as
FE-00 F4-00 0:
No
operation
FE-10 User-defined
function
code
10 Same
as
FE-00 F4-01 1:
Restore
factory
settings
except
motor

Restore
default
parameters
FE-11 User-defined
function
code
11 Same
as
FE-00 F4-02 FP-01 0
settings 2:
Clear
records
FE-12 User-defined
function
code
12 Same
as
FE-00 F5-04 4:
Restore
user
backup
parameters
FE-13 User-defined
function
code
13 Same
as
FE-00 F5-07 501:
Back
up
current
user
parameters
FE-14 User-defined
function
code
14 Same
as
FE-00 F6-00
•
1:
Restore
default
settings
except
motor
parameters
FE-15 User-defined
function
code
15 Same
as
FE-00 F6-10
If
FP-01
is
set
to
1,
most
function
codes
are
restored
to
the
default
settings
except

FE-16 User-defined
function
code
16 Same
as
FE-00 F0-00
motor
parameters,
frequency
reference
resolution
(F0-22),
fault
records,
accumulative

FE-17 User-defined
function
code
17 Same
as
FE-00 F0-00 running
time
(F7-09),
accumulative
power-on
time
(F7-13)
and
accumulative
power

FE-18 User-defined
function
code
18 Same
as
FE-00 F0-00 consumption
(F7-14).

FE-19 User-defined
function
code
19 Same
as
FE-00 F0-00 •
2:
Clear
records

FE-20 User-defined
function
code
20 Same
as
FE-00 F0-00 If
FP-01
is
set
to
2,
the
fault
records,
accumulative
running
time
(F7-09),
accumulative

FE-21 User-defined
function
code
21 Same
as
FE-00 F0-00 power-on
time
(F7-13)
and
accumulative
power
consumption
(F7-14)
are
cleared.
FE-22 User-defined
function
code
22 Same
as
FE-00 F0-00 •
501:
Back
up
current
user
parameters
FE-23 User-defined
function
code
23 Same
as
FE-00 F0-00 If
FP-01
is
set
to
501,
the
current
parameter
settings
are
backed
up,
helping
you
to

FE-24 User-defined
function
code
24 Same
as
FE-00 F0-00 restore
the
setting
if
incorrect
parameter
setting
is
performed.
FE-25 User-defined
function
code
25 Same
as
FE-00 F0-00 •
4:
Restore
user
backup
parameters
FE-26 User-defined
function
code
26 Same
as
FE-00 F0-00 If
FP-01
is
set
to
4,
the
previous
backup
user
parameters
are
restored.
FE-27 User-defined
function
code
27 Same
as
FE-00 F0-00
FE-28 User-defined
function
code
28 Same
as
FE-00 F0-00
FE-29 User-defined
function
code
29 Same
as
FE-00 F0-00

FE
is
user-defined
parameter
group.
You
can
select
the
required
parameters
from
all
E4

functions
codes
and
add
them
into
this
group,
convenient
for
view
and
modification.

- 162 - - 163 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

The
E4
provides
display
of
two
types
of
individualized
parameters:
user-defined

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default parameters
and
user-modified
parameters.
Unit's
digit
(Group
U
display
selection) •
You-defined
parameters
are
included
in
group
FE.
You
can
add
a
maximum
of
32

parameters,
convenient
for
commissioning.
0:
Not
display
AC
drive
In
user-defined
parameter
mode,
symbol
"u"
is
added
before
the
function
code.
For

1:
Display
FP-02 parameter
display
11 example,
F1-00
is
displayed
as
uF1-00.
property Ten's
digit
(Group
A
display
selection)
•
You-modified
parameters
are
grouped
together,
convenient
for
on-site
troubleshooting.

0:
Not
display In
you-modified
parameter
mode,
symbol
"c"
is
added
before
the
function
code.
For

1:
Display example,
F1-00
is
displayed
as
cF1-00.
Unit's
digit
(User-defined
parameter

display
selection) Function
Code Name Setting
Range Default
0:
Not
display 0:
Modifiable
FP-04 Parameter
modification
property 0
Individualized
1:
Display 1:
Not
modifiable
FP-03 parameter
display
00
property Ten's
digit
(User-modified
parameter
It
is
used
to
set
whether
the
parameters
are
modifiable
to
avoid
mal-function.
If
it
is
set
to
0,

display
selection)
all
parameters
are
modifiable.
If
it
is
set
to
1,
all
parameters
can
only
be
viewed.
0:
Not
display
1:
Display Group
A0:
Torque
Control
and
Restricting
Parameters
The
setting
of
parameter
display
mode
aims
to
facilitate
you
to
view
different
types
of
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
parameters
based
on
actual
requirements.
The
E4
provides
the
following
three

0:
Speed
control
parameter
display
modes. A0-00 Speed/Torque
control
selection 0
1:
Torque
control
Table
5-9
Three
parameter
display
modes
provided
by
E4
It
is
used
to
select
the
AC
drive's
control
mode:
speed
control
or
torque
control.

Name Description The
E4
provides
DI
terminals
with
two
torque
related
functions,
function
29
(Torque

control
prohibited)
and
function
46
(Speed
control/Torque
control
switchover).
The
two
DI

Display
function
codes
of
the
AC
drive
in
sequence
of
F0

AC
drive
parameter
display to
FF,
A0
to
AF
and
U0
to
UF.
terminals
need
to
be
used
together
with
A0-00
to
implement
speed
control/torque
control

switchover.
User-defined
parameter
display Display
a
maximum
of
32
user-defined
parameters

included
in
group
FE. If
the
DI
terminal
allocated
with
function
46
(Speed
control/Torque
control
switchover)
is

User-modified
parameter
display Display
the
parameters
that
are
modified. OFF,
the
control
mode
is
determined
by
A0-00.
If
the
DI
terminal
allocated
with
function
46

is
ON,
the
control
mode
is
reverse
to
the
value
of
A0-00.
The
display
codes
of
different
parameter
types
are
shown
in
the
following
table. However,
if
the
DI
terminal
with
function
29
(Torque
control
prohibited)
is
ON,
the
AC
drive
is

Table
5-10
Display
codes
of
different
parameter
types fixed
to
run
in
the
speed
control
mode.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

Parameter
Type Display
Code
0:
Digital
setting
(A0-03)
AC
drive
parameter
1:
AI1
User-defined
parameter
2:
AI2
User-modified
parameter Torque
setting
source
in
3:
AI3
A0-01 0
torque
control 4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5)
5:
Communication
setting
6:
MIN
(AI1,
AI2)
7:
MAX
(AI1,
AI2)
Torque
digital
setting
in

A0-03 -200.0%‒+200.0% 150.0%
torque
control

- 164 - - 165 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default When
the
AI1
input
exceeds
the
limit,
VDO1
becomes
ON.
At
this
moment,
VDI1

becomes
ON
and
the
AC
drive
receives
you-defined
fault
1.
Then
the
AC
drive
reports

A1-03 VDI4
function
selection 0‒59 0
Err27
and
stops.
A1-04 VDI5
function
selection 0‒59 0
•
Decided
by
A1-06
VDI1
to
VDI5
have
the
same
functions
as
DI
terminals
on
the
control
board
and
can
be
used

The
VDI
state
is
determined
by
the
binary
bit
of
A1-06.
For
example,
to
implement

for
digital
input.
For
more
details,
see
description
of
F4-00
to
F4-09.
the
function
that
the
AC
drive
automatically
enters
the
running
state
after
power-on,

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default perform
the
following
setting:
Unit's
digit
(VDI1) 1)
Allocate
VDI1
with
function
1
"Forward
RUN
(FWD)"
(A1-00
=
1).
0:
Decided
by
state
of
VDOx 2)
Set
A1-05
to
xxx1:
The
state
of
VDI1
is
decided
by
A1-06.
1:
Decided
by
A1-06
3)
Set
A1-06
to
xxx1:
VDI1
is
valid.
Ten's
digit
(VDI2)
4)
Set
F0-02
to
1:
The
command
source
to
terminal
control.
0,
1
(same
as
VDI1)
5)
Set
F8-18
to
0:
Startup
protection
is
not
enabled.
A1-05 VDI state setting mode Hundred's
digit
(VDI3) 00000
When
the
AC
drive
completes
initialization
after
power-on,
it
detects
that
VDI1
is
valid

0,
1
(same
as
VDI1)
and
VDI1
is
allocated
with
the
function
of
forward
RUN.
That
is,
the
AC
drive
receives

Thousand's
digit
(VDI4) the
forward
RUN
command
from
the
terminal.
Therefore,
The
AC
drive
starts
to
run
in

0,
1
(same
as
VDI1) forward
direction.

Ten
thousand's
digit
(VDI5) Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

0,
1
(same
as
VDI1) A1-07 Function
selection
for
AI1
used
as
DI 0‒59 0
Unit's
digit
(VDI1) A1-08 Function
selection
for
AI2
used
as
DI 0‒59 0
0:
Invalid A1-09 Function
selection
for
AI3
used
as
DI 0‒59 0
1:
Valid Unit's
digit
(AI1)
Ten's
digit
(VDI2) 0:
High
level
valid
0,
1
(same
as
VDI1) 1:
Low
level
valid
A1-06 VDI
state
selection Hundred's
digit
(VDI3) 00000 A1-10 State
selection
for
AI
used
as
DI Ten's
digit
(AI2) 000
0,
1
(same
as
VDI1) 0,
1
(same
as
unit's
digit)
Thousand's
digit
(VDI4) Hundred's
digit
(AI3)
0,
1
(same
as
VDI1) 0,
1
(same
as
unit's
digit)
Ten
thousand's
digit
(VDI5)
The
functions
of
these
parameters
are
to
use
AI
as
DI.
When
AI
is
used
as
DI,
the
AI
state

0,
1
(same
as
VDI1)
is
high
level
if
the
AI
input
voltage
is
7
V
or
higher
and
is
low
level
if
the
AI
input
voltage
is
3

Different
from
DI
terminals,
VDI
state
can
be
set
in
two
modes,
selected
in
A1-05: V
or
lower.
The
AI
state
is
hysteresis
if
the
AI
input
voltage
is
between
3
V
and
7
V.
A1-10
is

used
to
determine
whether
high
level
valid
or
low
level
valid
when
AI
is
used
as
DI.

•
Decided
by
state
of
VDOx
The
setting
of
AIs
(used
as
DI)
function
is
the
same
as
that
of
DIs.
For
details,
see
the

Whether
the
state
a
VDI
is
valid
is
determined
by
the
state
of
the
corresponding
VDO
descriptions
of
group
F4.
and
VDIx
is
uniquely
bound
to
VDOx
(x
is
between
1
and
5).
For
example,
to
implement

the
function
that
the
AC
drive
reports
an
alarm
and
stops
when
the
AI1
input
exceeds
The
following
figure
takes
AI
input
voltage
as
an
example
to
describe
the
relationship

the
limit,
perform
the
following
setting: between
AI
input
voltage
and
corresponding
DI
state.

1)
Allocate
VDI1
with
function
44
"User-defined
fault
1"
(A1-00
=
44).
2)
Set
A1-05
to
xxx0.
3)
Allocate
VDO1
with
function
31
"AI1
input
limit
exceeded"
(A1-11
=
31).

- 166 - - 167 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

A0-01
is
used
to
set
the
torque
setting
source.
There
are
a
total
of
eight
torque
setting

sources. PROFIBUS-DP,
CANopen
and
CANlink.
They
cannot
be
used
simultaneously.

The
torque
setting
is
a
relative
value.
100.0%
corresponds
to
the
AC
drive's
rated
torque.
If
the
communication
mode
is
used,
a
communication
card
must
be
installed.
The

The
setting
range
is
-200.0%
to
200.0%,
indicating
the
AC
drive's
maximum
torque
is
twice
E4
provides
four
optional
communication
cards
and
you
can
select
one
based

of
the
AC
drive's
rated
torque. on
actual
requirements.
If
the
communication
protocol
is
Modbus,
PROFIBUS-DP

or
CANopen,
the
corresponding
serial
communication
protocol
needs
to
be
selected

If
the
torque
setting
is
positive,
the
AC
drive
rotates
in
forward
direction.
If
the
torque
setting
based
on
the
setting
of
F0-28.
is
negative,
the
AC
drive
rotates
in
reverse
direction.
The
CANlink
protocol
is
always
valid.
•
1:
Digital
setting
(A0-03)
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
The
target
torque
directly
uses
the
value
set
in
A0-03.
Forward
maximum
frequency
0.00
Hz
to
maximum

•
2:
AI1 A0-05 50.00
Hz
in
torque
control frequency
(F0-10)
•
3:
AI2 Reverse
maximum
frequency
0.00
Hz
to
maximum

A0-06 50.00
Hz
in
torque
control frequency
(F0-10)
•
4:
AI3
The
target
torque
is
decided
by
analog
input.
The
E4
control
board
provides
two
AI

two
parameters
are
used
to
set
the
maximum
frequency
in
forward
or
reverse
rotation
in

terminals
(AI1,
AI2).
Another
AI
terminal
(AI3)
is
provided
by
the
I/O
extension
card.
AI1
torque
control
mode.
is
0‒10
V
voltage
input,
AI2
is
0‒10
V
voltage
input
or
4‒20
mA
current
input
decided

In
torque
control,
if
the
load
torque
is
smaller
than
the
motor
output
torque,
the
motor's

by
jumper
J8
on
the
control
board,
and
AI3
is
-10
V
to
+10
V
voltage
input.
rotational
speed
will
rise
continuously.
To
avoid
runaway
of
the
mechanical
system,
the

The
E4
provides
five
curves
indicating
the
mapping
relationship
between
the
input
motor
maximum
rotating
speed
must
be
limited
in
torque
control.
voltage
of
AI1,
AI2
and
AI3
and
the
target
frequency,
three
of
which
are
linear
(point-
You
can
implement
continuous
change
of
the
maximum
frequency
in
torque
control

point)
correspondence
and
two
of
which
are
four-point
correspondence
curves.
You
can

dynamically
by
controlling
the
frequency
upper
limit.
set
the
curves
by
using
function
codes
F4-13
to
F4-27
and
function
codes
in
group
A6,

and
select
curves
for
AI1,
AI2
and
AI3
in
F4-33.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
When
AI
is
used
as
frequency
setting
source,
the
corresponding
value
100%
of
voltage/ A0-07 Acceleration
time
in
torque
control 0.00‒65000s 0.00s
current
input
corresponds
to
the
value
of
A0-03.
A0-08 Deceleration
time
in
torque
control 0.00‒65000s 0.00s
•
5:
Pulse
setting
(DI5)
In
torque
control,
the
difference
between
the
motor
output
torque
and
the
load
torque

The
target
torque
is
set
by
DI5
(high-speed
pulse).
The
pulse
setting
signal
specification

determines
the
speed
change
rate
of
the
motor
and
load.
The
motor
rotational
speed
may

is
9‒30
V
(voltage
range)
and
0‒100
kHz
(frequency
range).
The
pulse
can
only
be

change
quickly
and
this
will
result
in
noise
or
too
large
mechanical
stress.
The
setting
of

input
via
DI5.
The
relationship
(which
is
a
two-point
line)
between
DI5
input
pulse

acceleration/deceleration
time
in
torque
control
makes
the
motor
rotational
speed
change

frequency
and
the
corresponding
value
is
set
in
F4-28
to
F4-31.
The
corresponding

softly.
value
100.0%
of
pulse
input
corresponds
to
the
value
of
A0-03.
However,
in
applications
requiring
rapid
torque
response,
set
the
acceleration/deceleration

•
5:
Communication
setting
time
in
torque
control
to
0.00s.
For
example,
two
AC
drives
are
connected
to
drive
the
same

The
target
torque
is
set
by
means
of
communication. load.
To
balance
the
load
allocation,
set
one
AC
drive
as
master
in
speed
control
and
the

other
as
slave
in
torque
control.
The
slave
receives
the
master's
output
torque
as
the
torque

If
the
AC
drive
is
a
slave
in
point-point
communication
and
receives
data
as
torque
command
and
must
follow
the
master
rapidly.
In
this
case,
the
acceleration/deceleration

source,
data
transmitted
by
the
master
is
used
as
the
setting
value.
For
details,
see
the
time
of
the
slave
in
torque
control
is
set
to
0.0s.
description
of
group
A8.
If
PROFIBUS-DP
communication
is
valid
and
PZD1
is
used
for
torque
setting,
data
Group
A1:
Virtual
DI
(VDI)/Virtual
DO
(VDO)
transmitted
by
PDZ1
is
directly
used
as
the
torque
source.
The
data
format
is
-100.00%

to
100.00%.
100%
corresponds
to
the
value
of
A0-03.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
In
other
conditions,
data
is
given
by
host
computer
through
the
communication
address

A1-00 VDI1
function
selection 0‒59 0
0x1000.
The
data
format
is
-100.00%
to
100.00%.
100%
corresponds
to
the
value
of

A0-03. A1-01 VDI2
function
selection 0‒59 0

The
E4
supports
four
host
computer
communication
protocols:
Modbus,
A1-02 VDI3
function
selection 0‒59 0

- 168 - - 169 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Figure
5-33
Relationship
of
AI
input
voltage
and
corresponding
DI
status Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

Unit's
digit
(VDO1)
AI
input

voltage 0:
Positive
logic
1:
Reverse
logic
7
VDC
Ten's
digit
(VDO2)
3
VDC 0,
1
(same
as
unit's
digit)
A1-21 VDO
state
selection Hundred's
digit
(VDO3) 00000
0,
1
(same
as
unit's
digit)
Thousand's
digit
(VDO4)
Time
0,
1
(same
as
unit's
digit)
Ten
thousand's
digit
(VDO5)
0,
1
(same
as
unit's
digit)

VDO
functions
are
similar
to
the
DO
functions
on
the
control
board.
The
VDO
can
be
used

together
with
VDIx
to
implement
some
simple
logic
control.
AI
terminal
state
•
If
VDO
function
is
set
to
0,
the
state
of
VDO1
to
VDO5
is
determined
by
the
state
of

DI1
to
DI5
on
the
control
board.
In
this
case,
VDOx
and
DIx
are
one-to-one
mapping

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default relationship.
0:
Short
with
physical
DIx
internally •
If
VDO
function
is
set
to
non-0,
the
function
setting
and
use
of
VDOx
are
the
same
as

A1-11 VDO1
function
selection 1‒40:
Refer
to
function
selection
of
0 DO
in
group
F5.
physical
DO
in
group
F5.
The
VDOx
state
can
be
set
in
A1-21.
The
application
examples
of
VDIx
involve
the
use
of

0:
Short
with
physical
DIx
internally VDOx,
and
see
the
examples
for
your
reference.
A1-12 VDO2
function
selection 1‒40:
Refer
to
function
selection
of
0
physical
DO
in
group
F5.
Group
A2
to
A4:
Motor
2
to
Motor
4
Parameters
0:
Short
with
physical
Dix
internally
A1-13 VDO3

function
selection 1‒40:
Refer
to
function
selection
of
0 The
E4
can
switch
over
the
running
among
four
motors.
For
the
four
motors,
you
can:
physical
DO
in
group
F5.
•
Set
motor
nameplate
parameters
respectively
0:
Short
with
physical
Dix
internally
A1-14 VDO4
function
selection 1‒40:
Refer
to
function
selection
of
0 •
Perform
motor
parameter
auto-tuning
respectively
physical
DO
in
group
F5.
•
Select
V/F
control
or
vector
control
respectively
0:
Short
with
physical
Dix
internally
A1-15 VDO5
function
selection 1‒40:
Refer
to
function
selection
of
0 •
Set
encoder-related
parameters
respectively
physical
DO
in
group
F5. •
Set
parameters
related
to
V/F
control
or
vector
control
independently
A1-16 VDO1
output
delay 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s
Groups
A2,
A3
and
A4
respectively
correspond
to
motor
2,
motor
3
and
motor
4.
The

A1-17 VDO2
output
delay 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s
parameters
of
the
three
groups
are
the
same.
Here
we
just
list
the
parameters
of
group
A2

A1-18 VDO3
output
delay 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s for
reference.
A1-19 VDO4
output
delay 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s
All
parameters
in
group
A2
have
the
same
definition
and
usage
as
parameters
of
motor
1.

A1-20 VDO5
output
delay 0.0‒3600.0s 0.0s
For
more
details,
refer
to
the
descriptions
of
motor
1
parameters.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

0:
Common
asynchronous
motor
A2-00 Motor
type
selection 1:
Variable
frequency
asynchronous
motor 0
2:
Permanent
magnetic
synchronous
motor

- 170 - - 171 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Model
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
A2-01 Rated
motor
power 0.1‒1000.0
kW
dependent Encoder
installation

A2-31 0.0°‒359.9° 0.0°
Model
angle
A2-02 Rated
motor
voltage 1‒2000
V
dependent U,
V,
W
phase
0:
Forward
0.01‒655.35
A
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW) Model
A2-32 sequence
of
UVW
0
A2-03 Rated
motor
current encoder 1:
Reverse
0.1‒6553.5
A
(AC
drive
power
>
55
kW) dependent
UVW
encoder
angle

Rated
motor
Model
A2-33 0.0°‒359.9° 0.0°
A2-04 0.01
Hz
to
maximum
frequency offset
frequency dependent
Number
of
pole
pairs

Rated
motor
rotational
Model
A2-34 1‒65535 1
A2-05 1‒65535
RPM of
resolver
speed dependent
Encoder
wire-break
0.0s:
No
action
Stator
resistance
0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW) Model
A2-36 0.0s
A2-06 fault
detection
time 0.1‒10.0s
(asynchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
power
>
55
kW) dependent
0:
No
auto-tuning
Rotor
resistance 0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW) Model

A2-07 1:
Asynchronous
motor
static
auto-tuning
(asynchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
power
>
55
kW) dependent
2:
Asynchronous
motor
complete
auto-
Leakage
inductive
0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW) A2-37 Auto-tuning
selection tuning 0
reactance Model

A2-08 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
power
>
55
11:
Synchronous
motor
with-load
auto-
dependent
(asynchronous
motor) kW) tuning
Mutual
inductive
12:
Synchronous
motor
no-load
auto-tuning
0.1‒6553.5
mH
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW) Model

A2-09 reactance
0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power
>
55
kW) dependent Speed
loop

(asynchronous
motor) A2-38 0‒100 30
proportional
gain
1
No-load
current 0.01
A
to
A2-03
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW) Model
Speed
loop
integral

A2-10 A2-39 0.01‒10.00s 0.50s
(asynchronous
motor) 0.1
A
to
A2-03
(AC
drive
power
>
55
kW) dependent time
1

Stator
resistance
0.001‒65.535
Ω
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW) Model
A2-40 Switchover
frequency
1 0.00
to
A2-43 5.00
Hz

A2-16
(synchronous
motor) 0.0001‒6.5535
Ω
(AC
drive
power
>
55
kW) dependent Speed
loop

A2-41 0‒100 15
0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW) proportional
gain
2
Shaft
D
inductance Model

A2-17 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
power
>
55
Speed
loop
integral

(synchronous
motor) dependent A2-42 0.01‒10.00s 1.00s
kW) time
2
0.01‒655.35
mH
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW) A2-43 Switchover
frequency
2 A2-40
to
maximum
output
frequency 10.00
Hz
Shaft
Q
inductance Model

A2-18 0.001‒65.535
mH
(AC
drive
power
>
55
A2-44 Vector
control
slip
gain 50%‒200% 100%
(synchronous
motor) dependent
kW)
Time
constant
of

A2-45 0.000‒0.100s 0.000s
Back
EMF
Model
speed
loop
filter
A2-20 0.1‒6553.5
V
(synchronous
motor) dependent
Vector
control
over-
A2-46 0‒200 64
Encoder
pulses
per
excitation
gain
A2-27 1‒65535 1024
revolution
0:
A2-48
0:
ABZ
incremental
encoder 1:
AI1
1:
UVW
incremental
encoder 2:
AI2
A2-28 Encoder
type 2:
Resolver 0 Torque
upper
limit
3:
AI3
3:
SIN/COS
encoder A2-47 source
in
speed
0
control
mode 4:
Pulse
setting
(DI5)
4:
Wire-saving
UVW
encoder 5:
Via
communication
A,
B
phase
sequence
0:
Forward 6:
MIN(AI1,AI2)
A2-30 of
ABZ
incremental
0
1:
Reserve 7:
MIN(AI1,AI2)
encoder

- 172 - - 173 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default Group
A5:
Control
Optimization
Parameters

Digital
setting
of
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
A2-48 torque
upper
limit
in
0.0%‒200.0% 150.0%
speed
control
mode A5-00 DPWM
switchover
frequency
upper
limit 0.00‒15.00
Hz 12.00
Hz

Excitation
adjustment
This
parameter
is
valid
only
for
V/F
control.
A2-51 0‒20000 2000
proportional
gain
It
is
used
to
determine
the
wave
modulation
mode
in
V/F
control
of
asynchronous
motor.

Excitation
adjustment
If
the
frequency
is
lower
than
the
value
of
this
parameter,
the
waveform
is
7-segment

A2-52 0‒20000 1300
integral
gain continuous
modulation.
If
the
frequency
is
higher
than
the
value
of
this
parameter,
the

Torque
adjustment
waveform
is
5-segment
intermittent
modulation.
A2-53 0‒20000 2000
proportional
gain
The
7-segment
continuous
modulation
causes
more
loss
to
switches
of
the
AC
drive
but

Torque
adjustment
smaller
current
ripple.
The
5-segment
intermittent
modulation
causes
less
loss
to
switches

A2-54 0‒20000 1300
integral
gain of
the
AC
drive
but
larger
current
ripple.
This
may
lead
to
motor
running
instability
at
high

Unit's
digit:
Integral
separated frequency.
Do
not
modify
this
parameter
generally.
Speed
loop
integral

A2-55 0:
Disabled 0 For
instability
of
V/F
control,
refer
to
parameter
F3-11.
For
loss
to
AC
drive
and
temperature

property
1:
Enabled rise,
refer
to
parameter
F0-15.
0:
No
field
weakening Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Field
weakening
mode

A2-56 1:
Direct
calculation 0
of
synchronous
motor 0:
Asynchronous
modulation
2:
Adjustment A5-01 PWM
modulation
mode 0
1:
Synchronous
modulation
Field
weakening

A2-57 degree
of
50%‒500% 100% This
parameter
is
valid
only
for
V/F
control.
synchronous
motor
Synchronous
modulation
indicates
that
the
carrier
frequency
varies
linearly
with
the
change

Maximum
field
of
the
output
frequency,
ensuring
that
the
ratio
of
carrier
frequency
to
output
frequency

A2-58 1%‒300% 50%
weakening
current remains
unchanged.
Synchronous
modulation
is
generally
used
at
high
output
frequency,

Field
weakening
which
helps
improve
the
output
voltage
quality.
A2-59 automatic
adjustment
10%‒500% 100%
gain At
low
output
frequency
(100
Hz
or
lower),
synchronous
modulation
is
not
required.
This
is

because
asynchronous
modulation
is
preferred
when
the
ratio
of
carrier
frequency
to
output

Field
weakening
frequency
is
high.
A2-60 2‒10 2
integral
multiple
0:
Sensorless
flux
vector
control
(SFVC
)
Synchronous
modulation
takes
effect
only
when
the
running
frequency
is
higher
than
85
Hz.

0
If
the
frequency
is
lower
than
85
Hz,
asynchronous
modulation
is
always
used.
A2-61 Motor
2
control
mode 1:
Closed-loop
vector
control
(CLVC)
2:
Voltage/Frequency
(V/F)
control Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
0:
Same
as
motor
1 0:
No
compensation
Dead
zone
compensation

1:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
1 A5-02 1:
Compensation
mode
1 1
Motor
2
acceleration/ mode
selection
A2-62 2:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
2 0 2:
Compensation
mode
2
deceleration
time
3:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
3
Generally,
you
need
not
modify
this
parameter.
Try
to
use
a
different
compensation
mode

4:
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
4 only
when
there
is
special
requirement
on
the
output
voltage
waveform
quality
or
oscillation

0.0%:
Automatic
torque
boost Model
occurs
on
the
motor.
A2-63 Motor
2
torque
boost
0.1%‒30.0% dependent For
high
power
AC
drive,
compensation
mode
2
is
recommended.
Motor
2
oscillation
Model

A2-65 0‒100 Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
suppression
gain dependent
0:
Random
PWM
invalid
A5-03 Random
PWM
depth 0
1‒10

- 174 - - 175 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

The
setting
of
random
PWM
depth
can
make
the
shrill
motor
noise
softer
and
reduce
the
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

electromagnetic
interference.
If
this
parameter
is
set
to
0,
random
PWM
is
invalid.
A5-08 Dead-zone
time
adjustment 100%‒200% 150%
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
It
is
only
valid
for
1140
V
voltage
class.

0:
Disabled
A5-04 Rapid
current
limit 1 You
can
modify
the
value
of
this
parameter
to
improve
the
voltage
utilization
rate.
Too
small

1:
Enabled
value
may
system
instability.
Do
not
modify
it
generally.
The
rapid
current
limit
function
can
reduce
the
AC
drive's
overcurrent
faults
at
maximum,

guaranteeing
uninterrupted
running
of
the
AC
drive. Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

However,
long-time
rapid
current
limit
may
cause
the
AC
drive
to
overheat,
which
is
not
A5-09 Overvoltage
threshold 200.0‒2500.0
V 2000.0
V
allowed.
In
this
case,
the
AC
drive
will
report
Err40,
indicating
the
AC
drive
is
overloaded

It
is
used
to
set
the
overvoltage
threshold
of
the
AC
drive.
The
default
values
of
different

and
needs
to
stop.
voltage
classes
are
listed
in
the
following
table.
Table
6-12
Overvoltage
thresholds
for
different
voltage
classes
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

A5-05 Current
detection
compensation 0‒100 5 Voltage
Class Default
Overvoltage
Threshold

Single-phase
220
V 400.0
V
It
is
used
to
set
the
AC
drive
current
detection
compensation.
Too
large
value
may
lead
to

deterioration
of
control
performance.
Do
not
modify
it
generally. Three-phase
220
V 400.0
V
Three-phase
380
V 810.0
V
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Three-phase
480
V 890.0
V
A5-06 Undervoltage
threshold 60.0%‒140.0% 100.0%
Three-phase
690
V 1300.0
V

It
is
used
to
set
the
undervoltage
threshold
of
Err09.
The
undervoltage
threshold
100%
of

the
AC
drive
of
different
voltage
classes
corresponds
to
different
nominal
values,
as
listed
in
Note
the
following
table. The
default
value
is
also
the
upper
limit
of
the
AC
drive's
internal
overvoltage
protection
voltage.

The
parameter
becomes
effective
only
when
the
setting
of
A5-09
is
lower
than
the
default
value.
If

Table
6-11
Undervoltage
nominal
values
for
different
voltage
the
setting
is
higher
than
the
default
value,
use
the
default
value.
Voltage
Class Nominal
Value
of
Undervoltage
threshold
Single-phase
220
V 200
V
Group
A6:
AI
Curve
Setting
Three-phase
220
V 200
V
Three-phase
380
V 350
V Function
Code Name Setting
Range Default

Three-phase
480
V 450
V A6-00 AI
curve
4
minimum
input -10.00
V
to
A6-02 0.00
V

Three-phase
690
V 650
V Corresponding
setting
of
AI

A6-01 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0%
curve
4
minimum
input
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default A6-02 AI
curve
4
inflexion
1
input A6-00
to
A6-04 3.00
V
0:
No
optimization Corresponding
setting
of
AI

SFVC
optimization
mode
A6-03 -100.0%‒100.0% 30.0%
A5-07 1:
Optimization
mode
1 1 curve
4
inflexion
1
input
selection
2:
Optimization
mode
2 A6-04 AI
curve
4
inflexion
1
input A6-02
to
A6-06 6.00
V
Corresponding
setting
of
AI

•
1:
Optimization
mode
1 A6-05 -100.0%‒100.0% 60.0%
curve
4
inflexion
1
input
It
is
used
when
the
requirement
on
torque
control
linearity
is
high. A6-06 AI
curve
4
maximum
input A6-06
to
10.00
V 10.00
V
•
2:
Optimization
mode
2 Corresponding
setting
of
AI

A6-07 -100.0%‒100.0% 100.0%
curve
4
maximum
input
It
is
used
for
the
requirement
on
speed
stability
is
high.
A6-08 AI
curve
5
minimum
input -10.00
V
to
A6-10 0.00
V

- 176 - - 177 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Name Setting
Range Default

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
Corresponding
setting
of
AI

A6-09 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0%
curve
5
minimum
input Jump
point
of
AI3
input

A6-20 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0%
corresponding
setting
A6-10 AI
curve
5
inflexion
1
input A6-08
to
A6-12 3.00
V
Jump
amplitude
of
AI3
input

Corresponding
setting
of
AI
A6-21 0.0%‒100.0% 0.5%
A6-11 -100.0%‒100.0% 30.0% corresponding
setting
curve
5
inflexion
1
input
A6-12 AI
curve
5
inflexion
1
input A6-10
to
A6-14 6.00
V The
AI
terminals
(AI1
to
AI3)
of
the
E4
all
support
the
corresponding
setting
jump

function,
which
fixes
the
AI
input
corresponding
setting
at
the
jump
point
when
AI
input

Corresponding
setting
of
AI

A6-13 -100.0%‒100.0% 60.0% corresponding
setting
jumps
around
the
jump
range.
curve
5
inflexion
1
input
A6-14 AI
curve
5
maximum
input A6-14
to
10.00
V 10.00
V For
example,
AI1
input
voltage
jumps
around
5.00
V
and
the
jump
range
is
4.90‒5.10
V.

AI1
minimum
input
0.00
V
corresponds
to
0.0%
and
maximum
input
10.00
V
corresponds
to

Corresponding
setting
of
AI

A6-15 -100.0%‒100.0% 100.0% 100.0%.
The
detected
AI1
input
corresponding
setting
varies
between
49.0%
and
51.0%.
curve
5
maximum
input
If
you
set
A6-16
to
50.0%
and
A6-17
to
1.0%,
then
the
obtained
AI1
input
corresponding

The
function
of
curve
4
and
curve
5
is
similar
to
that
curve
1
to
curve
3,
but
curve
1
to
setting
is
fixed
to
50.0%,
eliminating
the
fluctuation
effect.
curve
3
are
lines,
and
curve
4
and
curve
5
are
4-point
curves,
implementing
more
flexible

corresponding
relationship.
The
schematic
diagram
of
curve
4
and
curve
5
is
shown
in
the

following
figure. Group
A7:
User
Programmable
Function
Figure
5-34
Schematic
diagram
curve
4
and
curve
5
Group
A8:
Point-point
Communication
AI
corresponding
setting

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

Corresponding
setting
0:
Disabled
of
AI
max.
input A8-00 Point-point
communication
selection 0
1:
Enabled

Corresponding
setting
of
It
is
used
to
decide
whether
to
enable
point-point
communication.
AI
curve
inflexion
1
input
AI
curve
Point-point
communication
indicates
direct
communication
between
two
or
more
E4
inflexion2 AI
input
AC
drives
by
using
CANlink.
The
master
gives
target
frequency
or
target
torque
to
one
or

0
V
(0
mA) voltage
AI
curve
multiple
slaves
according
to
its
own
frequency
or
torque
signal.
inflexion1 10
V
(20
mA)
Corresponding
setting
of

AI
curve
inflexion
2input
If
multiple
AC
drives
are
connected
by
using
CANlink
cards,
the
terminal
resistor
of
the

CANlink
card
connected
to
the
end
AC
drive
shall
be
switched
on.
Corresponding
setting

of
AI
min.
input
If
point-point
communication
is
enabled,
the
CANlink
communication
addresses
of
the
AC

When
setting
curve
4
and
curve
5,
note
that
the
curve's
minimum
input
voltage,
inflexion
1
drives
are
automatically
matched
without
special
setting.
voltage,
inflexion
2
voltage
and
maximum
voltage
must
be
in
increment
order. The
point-point
communication
rate
is
set
in
FD-00.
F4-34
(AI
curve
selection)
is
used
to
select
curve
for
AI1
to
AI3.
Function
Code Name Setting
Range Default
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default 0:
Master
A8-01 Master
and
slave
selection 0
Jump
point
of
AI1
input
1:
Slave
A6-16 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0%
corresponding
setting
Jump
amplitude
of
AI1
input
This
parameter
is
used
to
determine
whether
the
AC
drive
is
master
or
slave.
A6-17 0.0%‒100.0% 0.5%
corresponding
setting At
point-point
communication,
you
only
need
to
set
the
CANlink
communication
baud
rate.

Jump
point
of
AI2
input
The
communication
addresses
are
allocated
automatically
based
on
whether
the
AC
drive
is

A6-18 -100.0%‒100.0% 0.0%
corresponding
setting master
or
slave.
Jump
amplitude
of
AI2
input

A6-19 0.0%‒100.0% 0.5%
corresponding
setting

- 178 - - 179 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default If
"b"
expresses
the
zero
offset
of
received
data,
"k"
expresses
the
gain,
and
"y"
expresses

the
actually
used
data.
The
actually
used
data
can
be
obtained
based
on
the
formula:
0:
Slave
not
following

running

Slave
following
commands
of
the
master y
=
kx
+
b
A8-02 master
command
0
selection 1:
Slave
following

running
commands
The
value
y
ranges
from
-100.00%
to
100.00%.
of
the
master

When
A8-01
(Master
and
slave
selection)
is
set
to
1
(Slave)
and
F0-02
(Command
source
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

selection)
is
set
to
2
(Communication
control),
if
A8-02
is
set
to
1,
the
salve
follows
the
Point-point
communication
interruption

A8-06 0.0‒10.0s 1.0s
master
to
start
or
stop. detection
time

Function
Code Name Setting
Range Default It
is
used
to
set
the
point-point
communication
interruption
time
at
which
this
fault
is

detected.
If
it
is
set
to
0,
it
indicates
no
detection.
0:
Torque
setting
A8-03 Usage
of
data
received
by
slave 0
1:
Frequency
setting Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

It
is
used
to
determine
whether
the
slave
uses
data
received
from
the
master
for
torque
A8-07 Master
data
sending
cycle 0.001‒10.000s 0.001s
setting
or
frequency
setting.
This
function
can
be
used
only
when
the
frequency
source
or

It
is
used
to
set
the
data
sending
cycle
of
the
master
in
point-point
communication.
torque
source
must
be
communication
setting.
When
the
AC
drive
is
a
slave
in
point-point
communication
and
receives
data
for
torque
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
setting,
100.00%
of
the
received
data
corresponds
to
200.0%
of
torque
setting,
unrelated
A8-08 Zero
offset

of
received
data
(frequency) -100.00%‒100.00% 0.00%
to
A0-03.
If
zero
offset
of
the
slave
is
0.00%
and
the
gain
is
1.00,
it
means
that
the
slave

directly
takes
the
output
torque
of
the
master
as
the
target
torque. A8-09 Gain
of
received
data
(frequency) -10.00‒10.00 1.00

When
the
AC
drive
is
a
slave
in
point-point
communication
and
receives
data
for
frequency
These
two
parameters
are
used
to
adjust
data
received
from
the
master
and
define
the

setting,
100.00%
of
the
received
data
corresponds
to
the
value
of
F0-10
(Maximum
frequency). frequency
reference
relationship
between
the
master
and
the
slave.
For
example,
to
balance
the
load,
do
the
following
settings. If
"b"
expresses
the
zero
offset
of
received
data,
"k"
expresses
the
gain,
and
"y"
expresses

the
actually
used
data.
The
actually
used
data
can
be
obtained
based
on
the
formula:
Table
5-14
Settings
for
balancing
the
load
y
=
kx
+
b
Master Slave
The
value
y
ranges
from
-100.00%
to
100.00%.
A0-00
=
0:
Speed
control A0-00
=
1:
Torque
control
A8-00
=
1:
Point-point
communication
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default
enabled A8-00
=
1:
Point-point
communication
enabled
A8-10 Runaway
prevention
coefficient 0.00%‒100.00% 10.00%
A8-01
=
0:
Master
in
point-point

communication
A8-01
=
1:
Slave
in
point-point
communication

When
the
slave
is
set
to
troque
control
and
follows
the
master
to
output
torque
to
implement

A8-02
=
0:
Data
source
from
master
being
load
allocation,
this
parameter
becomes
active.
A8-03
=
0:
Slave
receiving
data
for
torque
setting
output
torque
If
it
is
set
to
0.00%,
it
indicates
that
the
runaway
prevention
function
is
disabled.
If
it
is
set
to

A0-01
=
5:
Torque
source
in
torque
control
set
to
another
value,
the
system
can
effectively
detects
whether
the
slave
is
in
the
runaway
state

communication
setting and
performs
efficient
protection.
The
recommended
value
range
is
5.00%‒20.00%.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

A8-04 Zero
offset
of
received
data
(torque) -100.00%‒100.00% 0.00%
A8-05 Gain
of
received
data
(torque) -10.00‒10.00 1.00

These
two
parameters
are
used
to
adjust
data
received
from
the
master
and
define
the


torque
reference
relationship
between
the
master
and
the
slave.

- 180 - - 181 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default

Group
AC:
AI/AO
Correction
AC-12 AO1
target
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V Factory-corrected
Function
Code Parameter
Name Setting
Range Default AC-13 AO1
measured
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V Factory-corrected
AC-00 AI1
measured
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V Factory-corrected AC-14 AO1
target
voltage
2 6.000‒.999
V Factory-corrected
AC-01 AI1
displayed
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V Factory-corrected AC-15 AO1
measured
voltage
2 6.000‒9.999
V Factory-corrected

AC-02 AI1
measured
voltage
2 6.000‒9.999
V Factory-corrected AC-16 AO2
target
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V Factory-corrected

AC-03 AI1
displayed
voltage
2 6.000‒9.999
V Factory-corrected AC-17 AO2
measured
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V Factory-corrected

AC-18 AO2
target
voltage
2 6.000‒9.999
V Factory-corrected
AC-04 AI2
measured
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V Factory-corrected
AC-19 AO2
measured
voltage
2 6.000‒9.999
V Factory-corrected
AC-05 AI2
displayed
voltage
1 0.500‒4.000
V Factory-corrected
AC-20 AI2
measured
current
1 0.000‒20.000
mA Factory
corrected
AC-06 AI2
measured
voltage
2 6.000‒9.999
V Factory-corrected
AC-21 AI2
sampling
current
1
0.000‒20.000
mA Factory
corrected
AC-07 AI2
displayed
voltage
2 9.999‒10.000
V Factory-corrected
AC-22 AI2
measured
current
2 0.000‒20.000
mA Factory
corrected
AC-08 AI3
measured
voltage
1 9.999‒10.000
V Factory-corrected
AC-23 AI2
sampling
current
2 0.000‒20.000
mA Factory
corrected
AC-09 AI3
displayed
voltage
1 9.999‒10.000
V Factory-corrected
AC-24 AO1
ideal
current
1 0.000‒20.000
mA Factory
corrected
AC-10 AI3
measured
voltage
2 9.999‒10.000
V Factory-corrected
AC-25 AO1
sampling
current
1 0.000‒20.000
mA Factory
corrected
AC-11 AI3
displayed
voltage
2 9.999‒10.000
V Factory-corrected
AC-26 AO1
ideal
current
2 0.000‒20.000
mA Factory
corrected
These
parameters
are
used
to
correct
the
AI
to
eliminate
the
impact
of
AI
zero
offset
and
AC-27 AO1
sampling
current
2 0.000‒20.000
mA Factory
corrected
gain.
These
parameters
are
used
to
correct
the
AO.
They
have
been
corrected
upon
delivery.
When
you
resume
the
factory
values,
these

They
have
been
corrected
upon
delivery.
When
you
resume
the
factory
values,
these

parameters
will
be
restored
to
the
factory-corrected
values.
Generally,
you
need
not
perform

parameters
will
be
restored
to
the
factory-corrected
values.
You
need
not
perform
correction

correction
in
the
applications.
in
the
applications.
Measured
voltage
indicates
the
actual
output
voltage
value
measured
by
instruments
such

Target
voltage
indicates
the
theoretical
output
voltage
of
the
AC
drive.
Measured
voltage

as
the
multimeter.
Displayed
voltage
indicates
the
voltage
display
value
sampled
by
the
AC

indicates
the
actual
output
voltage
value
measured
by
instruments
such
as
the
multimeter.
drive.
For
details,
refer
to
U0-21,
U0-22
and
U0-23.
During
correction,
send
two
voltage
values
to
each
AI
terminal,
and
save
the
measured
Group
U0:
Monitoring
Parameters
values
and
displayed
values
to
the
function
codes
AC-00
to
AC-11.
Then
the
AC
drive
will

automatically
perform
AI
zero
offset
and
gain
correction. Group
U0
is
used
to
monitor
the
AC
drive's
running
state.
You
can
view
the
parameter

If
the
input
voltage
and
the
actual
voltage
sampled
by
the
AC
drive
are
inconsistent,
perform
values
by
using
operation
panel,
convenient
for
on-site
commissioning,
or
from
the
host

correction
on
site.
Take
AI1
as
an
example.
The
on-site
correction
is
as
follows: computer
by
means
of
communication
(address:
0x7000-0x7044).

1)
Send
a
voltage
signal
(approximately
2
V)
to
AI1. U0-00
to
U0-31
are
the
monitoring
parameters
in
the
running
and
stop
state
defined
by
F7-

03
and
F7-04.
For
more
details,
see
Table
5-1.
2)
Measure
the
AI1
voltage
and
save
it
to
AC-00.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
3)
View
the
displayed
value
of
U0-21
and
save
the
value
to
AC-01.
U0-00 Running
frequency 0.00‒320.00
Hz
(F0-22
=
2)
4)
Send
a
voltage
signal
(approximately
8
V)
to
AI1.
U0-01 Set
frequency 0.00‒3200.0
Hz
(F0-22
=
1)
5)
Measure
AI1
voltage
and
save
it
to
AC-02.
These
two
parameters
display
the
absolute
value
of
theoretical
running
frequency
and
set

6)
View
the
displayed
value
of
U0-21
and
save
the
value
to
AC-03.
frequency.
For
the
actual
output
frequency
of
the
AC
drive,
see
U0-19.
At
correction
of
AI2
and
AI3,
the
actually
sampled
voltage
is
respectively
queried
in
U0-22

and
U0-23. Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range

For
AI1
and
AI2,
2
V
and
8
V
are
suggested
as
the
correction
voltages.
For
AI3,
-8
V
and
8
U0-02 Bus
voltage 0.0‒3000.0
V

V
are
suggested. It
displays
the
AC
drive's
bus
voltage.
- 182 - - 183 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range

U0-03 Output
voltage 0‒1140
V 0.00‒10.57
V

U0-10 AI2
voltage
(V)/current
(mA)
0.00‒20.00
mA
It
displays
the
AC
drive's
output
voltage
in
the
running
state.
When
F4-40
is
set
to
0,
AI2
samplin
g
data
is
displayed
in
the
unit
of
V.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range When
F4-40
is
set
to
1,
AI2
sampling
data
is
displayed
in
the
unit
of
mA.
0.00‒655.35
A
(AC
drive
power
≤
55
kW)
U0-04 Output
current Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
0.0‒6553.5
A
(AC
drive
power
>
55
kW)
U0-14 Load
speed 0‒65535
It
displays
the
AC
drive's
output
current
in
the
running
state.
For
more
details,
see
the
description
of
F7-12.
Function
Code Name Display
Range
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
U0-05 Output
power 0‒32767
U0-15 PID
setting 0‒65535
It
displays
the
AC
drive's
output
power
in
the
running
state. U0-16 PID
feedback 0‒65535

Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range They
display
the
PID
setting
value
and
PID
feedback
value.

U0-06 Output
torque -200.0%‒200.0% •
PID
setting
=
PID
setting
(percentage)
x
FA-04

•
PID
feedback
=
PID
feedback
(percentage)
x
FA-04
It
displays
the
AC
drive's
output
torque
in
the
running
state.
Function Code Parameter Name Display Range
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
U0-18 Input
pulse
frequency 0.00‒100.00
kHz
U0-07 X
state 0‒32767
It
displays
the
high-speed
pulse
sampled
frequency
of
X5,
in
minimum
unit
of
0.01
kHz.
It
displays
the
current
state
of
X
terminals.
After
the
value
is
converted
into
a
binary
number,

each
bit
corresponds
to
a
X.
"1"
indicates
high
level
signal,
and
"0"
indicates
low
level
signal.
Function Code Parameter Name Display Range
The
corresponding
relationship
between
bits
and
Xs
is
described
in
the
following
table.
-320.00‒320.00
Hz
U0-19 Feedback
speed
Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Bit7 Bit8 Bit9 -3200.0‒3200.0
Hz
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10
It
displays
the
actual
output
frequency
of
the
AC
drive.
Bit10 Bit11 Bit12 Bit13 Bit10 Bit11 Bit12 Bit13 Bit14 Bit15
•
If
F0-22
(Frequency
reference
resolution)
is
set
to
1,
the
display
range
is
-3200.00‒
VDI1 VDI2 VDI3 VDI4 VDI1 VDI2 VDI3 VDI4 VDI5 3200.00
Hz.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range •
If
F0-22
(Frequency
reference
resolution)
is
set
to
2,
the
display
range
is
-320.00Hz‒
320.00
Hz.
U0-08 DO
state 0‒1023
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
It
indicates
the
current
state
of
Y
terminals.
After
the
value
is
converted
into
a
binary

number,
each
bit
corresponds
to
a
Y.
"1"
indicates
high
level
signal,
and
"0"
indicates
U0-20 Remaining
running
time 0.0‒6500.0
min
low
level
signal.
The
corresponding
relationship
between
bits
and
Ys
is
described
in
the
It
displays
the
remaining
running
time
when
the
timing
operation
is
enabled.
For
details
on

following
table. timing
operation,
refer
to
F8-42
to
F8-44.
Table
5-15
Corresponding
relationship
between
bits
and
Ys
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 U0-21 AI1
voltage
before
correction 0.00‒10.57
V
Y3 Relay
1 Relay
2 Y1 Y2 VDO1 0.00‒10.57
V
U0-22 AI2
voltage
(V)/
current

(mA)
before
correction
Bit6 Bit7 Bit8 Bit9 Bit10 Bit11 0.00‒20.00
mA
VDO2 VDO3 VDO4 VDO5 U0-23 AI3
voltage
before
correction -10.57‒10.57
V

- 184 - - 185 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes
They
display
the
AI
sampleding
voltage/current
value
of
AI.
The
actually
used
voltage/
current
is
obtained
after
linear
correction
to
reduce
the
deviation
between
the
sampled
•
If
F0-22
(frequency
reference
resolution)
is
1,
the
display
range
is
-3200.0‒3200.0
Hz.
voltage/current
and
the
actual
input
voltage/current. •
If
F0-22
(frequency
reference
resolution)
is
2,
the
display
range
is
-320.00‒320.00
Hz.
For
actual
corrected
voltage,
see
U0-09,
U0-10
and
U0-11.
Refer
to
group
AC
for
the

Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
correction
mode.
U0-33 Synchronous
motor
rotor
position 0.0°‒359.9°
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
It
displays
the
rotor
position
of
the
synchronous
motor.
U0-24 Linear
speed 0‒65535
m/min
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
It
displays
the
linear
speed
of
the
X5
high-speed
pulse
sampling.
The
unit
is
meter/minute.
U0-34 Motor
temperature 0–200
°C
The
linear
speed
is
obtained
according
to
the
actual
number
of
pulses
sampled
per
minute

and
FB-07
(Number
of
pulses
per
meter). It
displays
the
motor
temperature
obtained
by
means
of
AI3
sampling.
For
the
motor

temperature
detection,
see
F9-56.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
U0-27 Pulse
input
frequency 0‒65535
Hz
U0-35 Target
torque -200.0%‒200.0%
It
displays
the
X5
high-speed
pulse
sampling
frequency,
in
minimum
unit
of
1
Hz.
It
is
the

same
as
U0-18,
except
for
the
difference
in
units. It
displays
the
current
torque
upper
limit.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range

U0-28 Communication
setting
value
-100.00%‒100.00% U0-36 Resolver
position 0‒4095
It
displays
the
data
written
by
means
of
the
communication
address
0x1000.
It
displays
the
current
resolver
position.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
-320.00‒320.00
Hz
U0-29 Encoder
feedback
speed U0-37 Power
factor
angle -
-3200.0‒3200.0
Hz

It
displays
the
motor
running
frequency
measured
by
the
encoder. It
displays
the
current
power
factor
angle.

•
If
F0-22
(Frequency
reference
resolution)
is
1,
the
display
range
is
-3200.0‒3200.0
Hz. Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range

•
If
F0-22
(Frequency
reference
resolution)
is
2,
the
display
range
is
-320.00‒320.00
Hz. U0-38 ABZ
position 0‒65535

Function
Code Name Display
Range

It
displays
the
phase
A
and
B
pulse
counting
of
the
current
ABZ
or
UVW
encoder.
This
value

0.00‒320.00
Hz is
four
times
the
number
of
pulses
that
the
encoder
runs.
For
example,
if
the
display
is
4000,

U0-30 Main
frequency
X
0.0‒3200.0
Hz the
actual
number
of
pulses
that
the
encoder
runs
is
4000/4
=
1000.

It
displays
the
setting
of
main
frequency
X. The
value
increase
when
the
encoder
rotates
in
forward
direction
and
decreases
when
the

encoder
rotates
in
reverse
direction.
After
increasing
to
65535,
the
value
starts
to
increase

• If
F0-22
(Frequency
reference
resolution)
is
1,
the
display
range
is
-3200.0‒3200.0
Hz. from
0
again.
After
decreasing
to
0,
the
value
starts
to
decrease
from
65535
again.
• If
F0-22
(Frequency
reference
resolution)
is
2,
the
display
range
is
-320.00‒320.00
Hz. You
can
check
whether
the
installation
of
the
encoder
is
normal
by
viewing
U0-38.

Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range

0.00‒320.00
Hz U0-39 Target
voltage
upon
V/F
separation 0
V
to
rated
motor
voltage
U0-31 Auxiliary
frequency
Y U0-40 Output
voltage
upon
V/F
separation 0
V
to
rated
motor
voltage
0.0‒3200.0
Hz

It
displays
the
setting
of
auxiliary
frequency
Y. They
display
the
target
output
voltage
and
current
actual
output
voltage
in
the
V/F

separation
state.
For
V/F
separation,
see
the
descriptions
of
group
F3.

- 186 - - 187 -
Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 5 Description of Function Codes

Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range

U0-41 DI
state
visual
display - U0-58 Phase Z counting 0–65535

It
displays
the
X
state
visually
and
the
display
format
is
shown
in
the
following
figure. It
displays
the
phase
Z
counting
of
the
current
ABZ
or
UVW
encoder.
The
value
increases
or

Figure
5-34
Display
format
of
the
X
state decreases
by
1
every
time
the
encoder
rotates
one
revolution
forwardly
or
reversely.

You
can
check
whether
the
installation
of
the
encoder
is
normal
by
viewing
U0-58.
AI2 VDI5 VDI3 VDI1

X9
X7
X5
X3
X1
X
state
display
ON

indicates
high
level Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
OFF
indicates
low
level
AI3 AI1 VDI4 VDI2 X10
X8
X6
X4
X2 U0-59 Current set frequency -100.00%–100.00%

Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range U0-60 Current running frequency -100.00%–100.00%

U0-42 Y
state
visual
display - It
displays
the
current
set
frequency
and
running
frequency.
100.00%
corresponds
to
the
AC

drive's
maximum
frequency
(F0-10).
It
displays
the
DO
state
visually
and
the
display
format
is
shown
in
the
following
figure.
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
Figure
6-35
Display
format
of
the
DO
state
U0-61 AC
drive
running
state 0‒65535
VDO2 Relay
2
VDO4

Y2

Y3
Y
state
display

ON
indicates
high
level It
displays
the
running
state
of
the
AC
drive.
The
data
format
is
listed
in
the
following
table:
OFF
indicates
low
level
VDO5 VDO1 Relay1 Bit0 0:
Stop
VDO3

Y1
1:
Forward
Bit1
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range 2:
Reverse
U0-43 DI
function
state
visual
display
1 - Bi2 0:
Constant
U0-61
1:
Accelerate
It
displays
whether
the
X
functions
1-40
are
valid.
The
operation
panel
has
five
7-segment
Bit3
2:
Decelerate
LEDs
and
each
7-segment
LED
displays
the
selection
of
eight
functions.
The
7-segment

LED
is
defined
in
the
following
figure. 0:
Bus
voltage
normal
Bit4
1:
Undervoltage
Figure
6-36
Definition
of
7-segment
LED
Function
Code Name Display
Range
1
X
function
state
display
6 2 ON
indicates
valid U0-62 Current
fault
code 0‒99
7
OFF
indicates
invalid
5 3 It
displays
the
current
fault
code.
4 8

Function
Code Name Display
Range

The
7-segment
LED
display
functions
1-8,
9-16,
17-24,
25-32
and
33-40
respectively
from

right
to
left. U0-63 Sent
value
of
point-point
communication -100.00%‒100.00%
U0-64 Received
value
of
point-point
communication -100.00%‒100.00%
Function
Code Parameter
Name Display
Range
It
displays
the
data
at
point-point
communication.
U0-63
is
the
data
sent
by
the
master,
and

U0-44 X
function
state
visual
display
2 - U0-64
is
the
data
received
by
the
slave.

It
displays
whether
the
X
functions
41‒59
are
valid.
The
display
format
is
similar
to
U0-43.
Function
Code Name Display
Range

The
7-segment
LEDs
display
functions
41‒48,
49‒56
and
57‒59,
respectively
from
right
to
left. U0-65 Torque
upper
limit -200.00%‒200.00%

It
displays
the
current
setting
torque
upper
limit.

- 188 - - 189 -
Chapter 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

6.1.3
Replacement
of
Vulnerable
Components
Chapter
6
Maintenance
and
Troubleshooting
The
vulnerable
components
of
the
AC
drive
are
cooling
fan
and
filter
electrolytic
capacitor.

Their
service
life
is
related
to
the
operating
environment
and
maintenance
status.
Generally,

the
service
life
is
shown
as
follows:
6.1
Routine
Repair
and
Maintenance
of
the
E4
Component Service
Life Possible
Damage
Reason Judging
Criteria
• Bearing
worn • Whether
there
is
crack
on
the
blade
6.1.1
Routine
Maintenance
Fan 2
to
3
years • Blade
aging • Whether
there
is
abnormal
vibration

The
influence
of
the
ambient
temperature,
humidity,
dust
and
vibration
will
cause
the
aging
noise
upon
startup
of
the
devices
in
the
AC
drive,
which
may
cause
potential
faults
or
reduce
the
service
life
of

• Input
power
supply • Whether
there
is
liquid
leakage.
the
AC
drive.
Therefore,
it
is
necessary
to
carry
out
routine
and
periodic
maintenance.




in
poor
quality • Whether
the
safe
valve
has
projected.
Routine
maintenance
involves
checking: Electrolytic
4
to
5
years • High
ambient
temperature • Measure
the
static
capacitance.
•
Whether
the
motor
sounds
abnormally
during
running capacitor
• Frequent
load
jumping • Measure
the
insulating
resistance.
•
Whether
the
motor
vibrates
excessively
during
running • Electrolytic
aging

•
Whether
the
installation
environment
of
the
AC
drive
changes.
6.1.4
Storage
of
the
AC
Drive
•
Whether
the
AC
drive's
cooling
fan
works
normally
For
storage
of
the
AC
drive,
pay
attention
to
the
following
two
aspects:
•
Whether
the
AC
drive
overheats
1)
Pack
the
AC
drive
with
the
original
packing
box
provided
by
BEST.
Routine
cleaning
involves:
2)
Long-term
storage
degrades
the
electrolytic
capacitor.
Thus,
the
AC
drive
must
be

•
Keep
the
AC
drive
clean
all
the
time. energized
once
every
2
years,
each
time
lasting
at
least
5
hours.
The
input
voltage

must
be
increased
slowly
to
the
rated
value
with
the
regulator.
•
Remove
the
dust,
especially
metal
powder
on
the
surface
of
the
AC
drive,
to
prevent

the
dust
from
entering
the
AC
drive.

6.2
Warranty
Agreement
•
Clear
the
oil
stain
on
the
cooling
fan
of
the
AC
drive.
1)
Free
warranty
only
applies
to
the
AC
drive
itself.

6.1.2
Periodic
Inspection
2)
BEST
will
provide
18-month
warranty
(starting
from
the
leave-factory
date
as

Perform
periodic
inspection
in
places
where
inspection
is
difficult. indicated
on
the
barcode)
for
the
failure
or
damage
under
normal
use
conditions.
If

Periodic
inspection
involves: the
equipment
has
been
used
for
over
18
months,
reasonable
repair
expenses
will
be

charged.
Check
and
clean
the
air
duct
periodically.
3)
Reasonable
repair
expenses
will
be
charged
for
the
damages
due
to
the
following

Check
whether
the
screws
become
loose. causes:
Check
whether
the
AC
drive
is
corroded. •
Improper
operation
without
following
the
instructions
Check
whether
the
wiring
terminals
show
signs
of
arcing; •
Fire,
flood
or
abnormal
voltage.
Main
circuit
insulation
test
•
Using
the
AC
drive
for
non-recommended
function
4)
The
maintenance
fee
is
charged
according
to
BEST's
uniform
standard.
If
there
is

Before
measuring
the
insulating
resistance
with
megameter
(500
VDC

megameter
recommended),
disconnect
the
main
circuit
from
the
AC
drive.
an
agreement,
the
agreement
prevails.
Prompt Do
not
use
the
insulating
resistance
meter
to
test
the
insulation
of
the

control
circuit.
The
high
voltage
test
need
not
be
performed
again
because
6.3
Faults
and
Solutions
it
has
been
completed
before
delivery.
The
E4
provides
a
total
of
24
pieces
of
fault
information
and
protective
functions.
After
a

fault
occurs,
the
AC
drive
implements
the
protection
function,
and
displays
the
fault
code
on

the
operation
panel
(if
the
operation
panel
is
available).

- 190 - - 191 -
Chapter 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Fault
Name Display Possible
Causes Solutions
Before
contacting
B
EST
for
technical
support,
you
can
first
determine
the
fault
type,

1:
The
output
circuit
is
grounded

analyze
the
causes,
and
perform
troubleshooting
according
to
the
following
tables.
If
the
1:
Eliminate
external
faults.
or
short
circuited.
fault
cannot
be
rectified,
contact
the
agent
or
BEST. 2:
Perform
the
motor
auto-
2:
Motor
auto-tuning
is
not

tuning.
Err22
is
the
AC
drive
hardware
overcurrent
or
overvoltage
signal.
In
most
situations,
performed.
hardware
overvoltage
fault
causes
Err22. Overcurrent
at
3:
Adjust
the
voltage
to

Err04 3:
The
voltage
is
too
low.
constant
speed normal
range.
Figure
6-1
Solutions
to
the
faults
of
the
E4 4:
A
sudden
load
is
added
during

4:
Remove
the
added
load.
operation.
Fault
Name Display Possible
Causes Solutions 5:
Select
an
AC
drive
of

5:
The
AC
drive
model
is
of
too

higher
power
class.
1:
The
output
circuit
is
grounded
small
power
class.
or
short
circuited. 1:
Eliminate
external
faults. 1:
Adjust
the
voltage
to

1:
The
input
voltage
is
too
high.
2:
The
connecting
cable
of
the
2:
Install
a
reactor
or
an
normal
range.
motor
is
too
long. output
filter. 2:
An
external
force
drives
the

2:
Cancel
the
external
force

Overvoltage
motor
during
acceleration.
3:
The
module
overheats. 3:
Check
the
air
filter
and
the
or
install
a
braking
resistor.
Inverter
unit
during
Err05 3:
The
acceleration
time
is
too

Err01 cooling
fan. 3:
Increase
the
acceleration

protection 4:
The
internal
connections
acceleration short.
become
loose. 4:
Connect
all
cables
time.
properly. 4:
The
braking
unit
and
braking

5:The
main
control
board
is
faulty. 4:
Install
the
braking
unit
and

resistor
are
not
installed.
5:
Contact
the
agent
or
BEST braking
resistor.
6:
The
drive
board
is
faulty.
7:
The
inverter
module
is
faulty. 1:
Adjust
the
voltage
to

1:
The
input
voltage
is
too
high.
normal
range.
1:
The
output
circuit
is
grounded
1:
Eliminate
external
faults. 2:
An
external
force
drives
the

2:
Cancel
the
external
force

or
short
circuited. 2:
Perform
the
motor
auto- Overvoltage
motor
during
deceleration.
or
install
the
braking
resistor.
2:
Motor
auto-tuning
is
not
tuning. during
Err06 3:
The
deceleration
time
is
too

deceleration 3:
Increase
the
deceleration

performed. 3:
Increase
the
acceleration
short.
time.
3:
The
acceleration
time
is
too
time. 4:
The
braking
unit
and
braking

4:
Install
the
braking
unit
and

short. 4:
Adjust
the
manual
torque
resistor
are
not
installed.
braking
resistor.
Overcurrent
4:
Manual
torque
boost
or
V/F
boost
or
V/F
curve.
curve
is
not
appropriate. 1:
Adjust
the
voltage
to

during
Err02 5:
Adjust
the
voltage
to
1:
The
input
voltage
is
too
high.
Overvoltage
at
normal
range.
acceleration 5:
The
voltage
is
too
low. normal
range. Err07 2:
An
external
force
drives
the

constant
speed 2:
Cancel
the
external
force

6:
The
startup
operation
is
6:
Select
rotational
speed
motor
during
deceleration.
or
install
the
braking
resistor.
performed
on
the
rotating
motor. tracking
restart
or
start
the

Control
power
The
input
voltage
is
not
within
the
Adjust
the
input
voltage
to

7:
A
sudden
load
is
added
during
motor
after
it
stops. Err08
supply
fault allowable
range. the
allowable
range.
acceleration. 7:
Remove
the
added
load.
8:
The
AC
drive
model
is
of
too
8:
Select
an
AC
drive
of
1:
Instantaneous
power
failure

small
power
class. higher
power
class. occurs
on
the
input
power
supply.
2:
The
AC
drive's
input
voltage
is
1:
Reset
the
fault.
1:
The
output
circuit
is
grounded

1:
Eliminate
external
faults. not
within
the
allowable
range.
or
short
circuited. 2:
Adjust
the
voltage
to

2:
Perform
the
motor
auto- Undervoltage Err09 3:
The
bus
voltage
is
abnormal. normal
range.
2:
Motor
auto-tuning
is
not

tuning. 4:
The
rectifier
bridge
and
buffer

performed. 3:
Contact
the
agent
or
BEST

3:
Increase
the
deceleration
resistor
are
faulty.
Overcurrent
3:
The
deceleration
time
is
too

time. 5:
The
drive
board
is
faulty.
during
Err03 short.
deceleration 4:
Adjust
the
voltage
to
6:
The
main
control
board
is
faulty.
4:
The
voltage
is
too
low.
normal
range.
5:
A
sudden
load
is
added
during
1:
Reduce
the
load
and

5:
Remove
the
added
load. 1:
The
load
is
too
heavy
or
locked-
deceleration. check
the
motor
and

6:
Install
the
braking
unit
and
rotor
occurs
on
the
motor.
6:
The
braking
unit
and
braking
AC
drive
overload Err10 mechanical
condition.
braking
resistor. 2:
The
AC
drive
model
is
of
too

resistor
are
not
installed. 2:
Select
an
AC
drive
of

small
power
class.
higher
power
class.

- 192 - - 193 -
Chapter 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Fault
Name Display Possible
Causes Solutions
Fault
Name Display Possible
Causes Solutions 1:
Replace
the
faulty
HALL

1:
Set
F9-01
correctly. Current
detection
1:
The
HALL
device
is
faulty. device.
1:
F9-01
is
set
improperly. Err18
2:
Reduce
the
load
and
fault 2:
The
drive
board
is
faulty. 2:
Replace
the
faulty
drive

2:
The
load
is
too
heavy
or
locked- board.
check
the
motor
and
the

Motor
overload Err11 rotor
occurs
on
the
motor.
mechanical
condition. 1:
Set
the
motor
parameters

3:
The
AC
drive
model
is
of
too
1:
The
motor
parameters
are
not
according
to
the
nameplate

3:
Select
an
AC
drive
of

small
power
class. set
according
to
the
nameplate. properly.
higher
power
class. Motor
auto-tuning

Err19
1:
The
three-phase
power
input
is
fault 2:
The
motor
auto-tuning
times
2:
Check
the
cable

abnormal. out. connecting
the
AC
drive
and

1:
Eliminate
external
faults.
Power
input
the
motor.
Err12 2:
The
drive
board
is
faulty. 2:
Contact
the
agent
or
BEST

phase
loss 1:
Set
the
encoder
type

3:
The
lightening
board
is
faulty.
correctly
based
on
the
actual

4:
The
main
control
board
is
faulty. 1:
The
encoder
type
is
incorrect.
situation.
1:
The
cable
connecting
the
AC
2:
The
cable
connection
of
the

2:
Eliminate
external
faults.
drive
and
the
motor
is
faulty. 1:
Eliminate
external
faults. Encoder
fault Err20 encoder
is
incorrect.
3:
Replace
the
damaged

2:
The
AC
drive's
three-phase
2:
Check
whether
the
motor
3:
The
encoder
is
damaged.
encoder.
Power
output
outputs
are
unbalanced
when
the
three-phase
winding
is
4:
The
PG
card
is
faulty.
Err13 4:
Replace
the
faulty
PG

phase
loss motor
is
running. normal.
card.
3:
The
drive
board
is
faulty. 3:
Contact
the
agent
or
BEST

EEPROM
read- Replace
the
main
control

4:
The
module
is
faulty. Err21 The
EEPROM
chip
is
damaged.
write
fault board.
1:
The
ambient
temperature
is
too
1:
Lower
the
ambient
1:
Handle
based
on

high. temperature. 1:
Overvoltage
exists. overvoltage.
AC
drive

2:
The
air
filter
is
blocked.
2:
Clean
the
air
filter. Err22
hardware
fault 2:
Overcurrent
exists. 2:
Handle
based
on

3:
The
fan
is
damaged.
3:
Replace
the
damaged
fan. overcurrent.
Module overheat Err14
4:
The
thermally
sensitive
resistor
4:
Replace
the
damaged
Short
circuit
to
The
motor
is
short
circuited
to
the

of
the
module
is
damaged. thermally
sensitive
resistor. Err23 Replace
the
cable
or
motor.
ground ground.
5:
The
inverter
module
is
5:
Replace
the
inverter
Accumulative
Clear
the
record
through

damaged. module. The
accumulative
running
time

running
time
Err26 the
parameter
initialization

reaches
the
setting
value.
1:
External
fault
signal
is
input
via
reached function.
External
DI.
1:
The
user-defined
fault
1
signal

Err15 Reset
the
operation.
equipment
fault 2:
External
fault
signal
is
input
via
User-defined
is
input
via
DI.
virtual
I/O. Err27 Reset
the
operation.
fault
1 2:
User-defined
fault
1
signal
is

1:
The
host
computer
is
in
1:
Check
the
cabling
of
host
input
via
virtual
I/O.
abnormal
state. computer. 1:
The
user-defined
fault
2
signal

2:
The
communication
cable
is
2:
Check
the
communication
User-defined is
input
via
DI.
Communication
Err28 Reset
the
operation.
Err16 faulty. cabling. fault
2 2:
The
user-defined
fault
2
signal

fault
3:
F0-28
is
set
improperly. 3:
Set
F0-28
correctly. is
input
via
virtual
I/O.
4:
The
communication
parameters
4:
Set
the
communication
Accumulative
Clear
the
record
through

The
accumulative
power-on
time

in
group
FD
are
set
improperly. parameters
properly. power-on
time
Err29 the
parameter
initialization

reaches
the
setting
value.
reached function.
1:
Replace
the
faulty
drive

1:
The
drive
board
and
power
Check
that
the
load
is

board
or
power
supply
board. The
AC
drive
running
current
is

Contactor
fault Err17 supply
are
faulty. Load
becoming
0 Err30 disconnected
or
the
setting
of

2:
Replace
the
faulty
lower
than
F9-64.
2:
The
contactor
is
faulty. F9-64
and
F9-65
is
correct.
contactor.
Check
the
PID
feedback

PID
feedback
lost
The
PID
feedback
is
lower
than

Err31 signal
or
set
FA-26
to
a

during
running the
setting
of
FA-26.
proper
value.

- 194 - - 195 -
Chapter 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting E4 User Manual E4 User Manual Chapter 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Fault
Name Display Possible
Causes Solutions Table
6-2
Troubleshooting
to
common
faults
of
the
AC
drive

1:
Reduce
the
load
and
SN Fault Possible
Causes Solutions

1:
The
load
is
too
heavy
or
locked-
check
the
motor
and

Pulse-by-pulse
rotor
occurs
on
the
motor. 1:
There
is
no
power
supply
to
the

Err40 mechanical
condition.
current
limit
fault 2:
The
AC
drive
model
is
of
too
AC
drive
or
the
power
input
to
the

2:
Select
an
AC
drive
of

small
power
class. AC
drive
is
too
low.
higher
power
class. 1:
Check
the
power
supply.
2:
The
power
supply
of
the
switch

Motor
switchover
Change
the
selection
of
the
motor
2:
Check
the
bus
voltage.
Perform
motor
switchover
on
the
drive
board
of
the
AC
drive
is

fault
during
Err41 via
terminal
during
running
of
the
3:
Re-connect
the
8-core
and

running AC
drive.
after
the
AC
drive
stops. There
is
no
display
faulty.
1 28-core
cables.
at
power-on. 3:
The
rectifier
bridge
is
damaged.
1:
Set
the
encoder
4:
Contact
the
agent
or
BEST
1:
The
encoder
parameters
are
set
4:
The
control
board
or
the

parameters
properly. for
technical
support.
incorrectly. operation
panel
is
faulty.
2:
Perform
the
motor
auto-
Too
large
speed
2:
The
motor
auto-tuning
is
not
5:
The
cable
connecting
the
control

Err42 tuning.
deviation performed. board
and
the
drive
board
and
the

3:
Set
F9-69
and
F9-70
operation
panel
breaks.
3:
F9-69
and
F9-70
are
set

correctly
based
on
the
actual

incorrectly. 1:
The
cable
between
the
drive

situation.
board
and
the
control
board
is
in

1:
Set
the
encoder
poor
contact.
1:
The
encoder
parameters
are
set
parameters
properly. 1:
Re-connect
the
8-core
and

2:
Related
components
on
the

incorrectly. 2:
Perform
the
motor
auto- 28-core
cables.
“HC”
is
displayed
control
board
are
damaged.
Motor
over-speed Err43 2:
The
motor
auto-tuning
is
not
tuning. 2 2:
Contact
the
agent
or
BEST

at
power-on. 3:
The
motor
or
the
motor
cable
is

performed.3:
F9-69
and
F9-70
are
3:
Set
F9-69
and
F9-70
for
technical
support.
short
circuited
to
the
ground.
set
incorrectly. correctly
based
on
the
actual

4:
The
HALL
device
is
faulty.
situation.
5:
The
power
input
to
the
AC
drive

1:
Check
the
temperature
is
too
low.
sensor
cabling
and
eliminate

1:
The
cabling
of
the
temperature
1:
Measure
the
insulation
of
the

the
cabling
fault. 1:
The
motor
or
the
motor
output

Motor
overheat Err45 sensor
becomes
loose. motor
and
the
output
cable
with

2:
The
motor
temperature
is
too
high.
2:
Lower
the
carrier
“Err23”
is
displayed
cable
is
short-circuited
to
the
a
megger.
frequency
or
adopt
other
3 ground.
at
power-on.
heat
radiation
measures.

2:
Contact
the
agent
or


2:
The
AC
drive
is
damaged.
IBEST
for
technical
support.
Check
that
the
motor

Initial
position

The
motor
parameters
are
not
set
parameters
are
set
correctly
The
AC
drive

Err51 display
is
normal

fault based
on
the
actual
situation. and
whether
the
setting
of
1:The
cooling
fan
is
damaged
or

rated
current
is
too
small. upon
power- locked-rotor
occurs. 1:
Replace
the
damaged
fan.
4 “HC”
on.
But

is

displayed
after
2:
The
external
control
terminal
2:
Eliminate
external
fault.
cable
is
short
circuited.
6.4
Common
Faults
and
Solutions running
and
stops

immediately.

You
may
come
across
the
following
faults
during
the
use
of
the
AC
drive.
Refer
to
the
1:
The
setting
of
carrier
frequency
is

1:
Reduce
the
carrier
frequency

following
table
for
simple
fault
analysis. too
high.
Err14
(module
(F0-15).
2:
The
cooling
fan
is
damaged,
or

overheat)
fault
2:
Replace
the
fan
and
clean
the

5 the
air
filter
is
blocked.
is
reported
air
filter.
frequently. 3:
Components
inside
the
AC
drive

3:
Contact
the
agent
or
BEST
are
damaged
(thermal
coupler
or

for
technical
support.
others).

- 196 - - 197 -
Chapter 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting E4 User Manual

SN Fault Possible
Causes Solutions

1:
Check
the
motor
and
the
motor

cables. 1:
Ensure
the
cable
between

the
AC
drive
and
the
motor
is

2:
The
AC
drive
parameters
are
set
normal.
The
motor
does
improperly
(motor
parameters).
6 not
rotate
after
the
2:
Replace
the
motor
or
clear

AC
drive
runs. 3:
The
cable
between
the
drive
mechanical
faults.
board
and
the
control
board
is
in

poor
contact. 3:
Check
and
re-set
motor

parameters.
4:
The
drive
board
is
faulty.
1:
Check
and
reset
the

1:
The
parameters
are
set
parameters
in
group
F4.
incorrectly. 2:
Re-connect
the
external

The
DI
terminals
2:
The
external
signal
is
incorrect. signal
cables.
7
are
disabled. 3:
The
jumper
bar
across
OP
and
3:
Re-confirm
the
jumper
bar

+24
V
becomes
loose. across
OP
and
+24
V.
4:
The
control
board
is
faulty. 4:
Contact
the
agent
or
BEST
for
technical
support.

1:
The
encoder
is
faulty. 1:
Replace
the
encoder
and

The
motor
speed
2:
The
encoder
cable
is
connected
ensure
the
cabling
is
proper.
8 is
always
low
in
incorrectly
or
in
poor
contact. 2:
Replace
the
PG
card.
CLVC
mode. 3:
The
PG
card
is
faulty. 3:
Contact
the
agent
or
BEST

4:
The
drive
board
is
faulty. for
technical
support.

1:
Re-set
motor
parameters

1:
The
motor
parameters
are
set
or
re-perform
the
motor
auto-
The
AC
drive
improperly. tuning.
reports
overcurrent

9 2:
The
acceleration/deceleration
2:
Set
proper
acceleration/
and
overvoltage

time
is
improper. deceleration
time.
frequently.
3:
The
load
fluctuates. 3:
Contact
the
agent
or
BEST
for
technical
support.
1:
Check
whether
the
contactor

cable
is
loose.
2:
Check
whether
the
contactor

Err17
is
reported
is
faulty.

The
soft
startup
contactor
is
not

10 upon
power-on
or

picked
up. 3:
Check
whether
24
V
power

running.
supply
of
the
contactor
is
faulty.
4:
Contact
the
agent
or
BEST
for
technical
support.

is

Related
component
on
the
control

11 displayed
upon
Replace
the
control
board.
board
is
damaged.
power-on.

- 198 -